Concrete Mechanics and Design - Solution Manual

Chapter 3
3-1 What is the significance of the “critical stress”?
(a) with respect to the structure of the concrete?
A continuous pattern of mortar cracks begins to form. As a result there are few undamaged portions
to carry load and the stress-strain curve is highly nonlinear.
(b) with respect to spiral reinforcement?
At the critical stress the lateral strain begins to increase rapidly. This causes the concrete core within
the spiral to expand, stretching the spiral. The tension in the spiral is equilibrated by a radial
compression in the core. This in turn, biaxially compresses the core, and thus strengthens it.
(c) with respect to strength under sustained loads?
When concrete is subjected to sustained loads greater than the critical stress, it will eventually fail.
3-2 A group of 43 tests on a given type of concrete had a mean strength of 3622 psi and a
standard deviation of 421 psi. Does this concrete satisfy the requirements of ACI Code Section
5.3.2 for 3000-psi concrete?
From Eq. 3-3a:

f c′ f cr′ − 1.34 s
=
Assume f cr′ = 3622 psi
(for design) f c′ = 3622 − 1.34 × 421 = 3058 psi

From Eq. 3-3b:
f c′ =f cr′ − 2.33s + 500
Using f cr′ = 3622 psi
(for design) f c′ = 3622 − 1.23 × 421 + 500 = 3141 psi

Because both of these exceed 3000 psi, the concrete satisfies the requirements of ACI Code
Section 5.3.2 for 3000 psi concrete.
3-1
3-3 The concrete containing Type I cement in a structure is cured for 3 days at 70° F followed
by 6 days at 40° F. Use the maturity concept to estimate its strength as a fraction of the 28-day
strength under standard curing.
5
Note: °C = ( °F − 32 ) , so 70° F = 21.1° C and 40° F = 4.4° C
9
From Eq. 3-6:
n
M
= ∑ (T + 10)(t )
i =1
i i
= (21.1 + 10)(3) + (4.4 + 10)(6) = 180 C days
From Fig. 3-8 the compressive strength will be between 0.60 and 0.70 times the 28-day strength
under standard curing conditions.
3-4 Use Fig. 3-12a to estimate the compressive strength σ 2 for biaxially loaded concrete
subject to:
(a) σ 1 = 0.0, σ2 = f c '
(b) σ 1 = 0.75 ft ' in tension, σ 2 = 0.5 f c '
(c) σ 1 = 0.5 fc ' in compression, σ 2 = 1.2 f c'
3-5 The concrete in the core of a spiral is subjected to a uniform confining stress σ 3 of 800 psi.
What will the compressive strength, σ 1 be? Assume fc ' = 4000 psi.
From Eq. 3-16:

σ=
1 f c′ + 4.1σ 3
σ 1= 4000 + 4.1× 800= 7280 psi
3-2
3-6 What factors affect the shrinkage of concrete?
(a) Relative humidity. Shrinkage increases as the relative humidity decreases, reaching a
maximum at RH ≤ 40%.
(b) The fraction of the total volume made up of paste. As this fraction increases, shrinkage
increases.
(c) The modulus of elasticity of the aggregate. As this increases, shrinkage decreases.
(d) The water/cement ratio. As the water content increases, the aggregate fraction decreases,
causing an increase in shrinkage.
(e) The fineness of the cement. Shrinkage increases for finely ground cement that has more
surface area to attract and absorb water.
(f) The effective thickness or volume to surface ratio. As this ratio increases, the shrinkage
occurs more slowly and the total shrinkage is likely reduced.
(g) Exposure to carbon dioxide tends to increase shrinkage.
3-7 What factors affect the creep of concrete?
(a) The ratio of sustained stress to the strength of the concrete. The creep coefficient, φ, is
roughly constant up to a stress of 0.5 f c ', but increases above that value.
(b) The humidity of the environment. The amount of creep decreases as the RH increases above
40%.
(c) As the effective thickness or volume to surface ratio increases, the rate at which creep
develops decreases.
(d) Concretes with a high paste content creep more that concretes with a large aggregate fraction
because only the paste creeps.
3-3
3-8 A structure is made from concrete containing Type 1 cement. The average ambient relative
humidity is 70 percent. The concrete was moist-cured for 4 days. f c ' = 4000 psi.
(a) Compute the unrestrained shrinkage strain of a rectangular beam with cross-sectional
dimensions of 8 in. x 20 in. at 3 years after the concrete was placed.
1. Compute basic shrinkage strain using Eqs. 3-29 and 3-30.
ε cso = ε s ( f cm ) β RH
ε s ( f cm ) =160 + β sc ( 9 − f cm f cmo )  ×10−6
β sc = 50 for Type I cement
f cm =
1.2 × 4000 =4800 psi
f cmo = 1450 psi
ε s ( f cm ) = 160 + 50 ( 9 − 4800 1450 )  ×10−6 = 444 ×10−6
−1.55 1 − ( RH RH o ) 
3
β RH =
 
RH o = 100%
−1.55 1 − ( 70 100 )  =
3
β RH = −1.018
 
ε cso =444 ×10 × (−1.018) =−452 ×10−6
−6
2. Compute development of shrinkage with time using Eq. 3-32.
0.5
 (t − ts ) t1 
β s (t , ts ) =  2 
 350(he ho ) + (t − ts ) t1 
he = 2 Ac u
Ac =8 × 20 =160 in.2
u = 2(8 + 20) = 56 in.
he = 2 ×160 / 56 =5.71 in.
ho = 4 in.
t= 3 × 365 =
1095 days
ts = 4 days
t1 = 1 day
0.5
 (1095 − 4) /1 
=β s (t , ts ) = 2  0.778
 350(5.71/ 4) + (1095 − 4) /1 
3-4
3. Compute shrinkage strain.
ε s (t , ts ) =
−452 ×10−6 × 0.778 =
−352 ×10−6
(b) Compute the stress dependent (creep) strain in the concrete of a 20 in. x 20 in. column at
age 2 years. A compression load of 400 kips was applied to the column at 60 days.
1. Compute basic creep strain, φ o , using Eqs. 3-38.
φo = φRH β ( f cm ) β (to )
1 − RH / RH o
φRH = 1 +
0.46(hc / ho )1/3
RH = 70%
RH o = 100%
hc =
2 Ac / u =
2 × 400 / 80 =
10 in.
ho = 4 in.
1 − 70 /100
φRH =
1+ 1.48
=
0.46(10 / 4)1/3
5.3 5.3
β ( f cm ) =
= 0.5
= 2.91
( f cm / f cmo ) (4800 /1450)0.5
1
β (to ) =
0.1 + (to / t1 )0.2
to = 60 days
t1 = 1 day
1
=β (to ) = 0.422
0.1 + (60 /1)0.2
φo = 1.48 × 2.91× 0.422 = 1.82
2. Compute development of creep with time using Eq. 3-42.

0.3
 (t − to ) t1 
β c (t , to ) =  
 β H + (t − to ) / t1 
β H = 150 1 + (1.2RH / RH o )18  (he / ho ) + 250 ≤ 1500
β H = 150 1 + (1.2 × 70 /100)18  (10 / 4) + 250= 641
t =×
2 365 =
730 days
0.3
 (730 − 60) /1 
=β c (t , to ) =  0.818
 641 + (730 − 60) /1 
3-5
3. Compute creep coefficient, φ(t,t o ), using Eq. 3-37.
φ (t , to ) =
φo × β (t , to ) =
1.82 × 0.818 =
1.49
4. Compute the total stress-dependent strain, ε cσ (t), using Eq. 3-44.
 1 φ (t , to ) 
=ε cσ (t ) σ c (to )  + 
 Ec (to ) Ec (28) 
Ec = f c′ 3.605 ×106 psi
(28) 57, 000=
 to 
f c′ (to ) = f c′ (28)  
 4 + 0.85to 
 60 
= 4000 =   4364 psi
 4 + 0.85 × 60 
E=
c (to ) = 3.765 ×106 psi
57, 000 4364
σ c (to ) = (400 kips) / (400 in.
= 2
) 1=
ksi 1000 psi
 1 1.49 
ε cσ (t ) =
1000  6
+ 6
679 ×10−6
=
 3.765 ×10 3.605 ×10 
3-6
Chapter 4
4-1 Figure P4-1 shows a simply supported beam and the cross-section at midspan. The
beam supports a uniform service (unfactored) dead load consisting of its own weight plus
1.4 kips/ft and a uniform service (unfactored) live load of 1.5 kip/ft. The concrete strength is
3500 psi, and the yield strength of the reinforcement is 60,000 psi. The concrete is normal-
weight concrete. Use load and strength reduction factors from ACI Code Sections 9.2 and
9.3. For the midspan section shown in part (b) of Fig. P4-1, compute φ M n and show that it
exceeds M u .
1. Calculate the dead load of the beam.

24 × 12
Weight/ft = × 0.15 =0.3 kips/ft
144
2. Compute the factored moment, M u .

Factored load/ft: wu = 1.2(0.30 + 1.40) + 1.6(1.50) = 4.44 k/ft
M u =wu  2 8 =4.44 × 202 8 =222 kips-ft
3. Compute the nominal moment capacity of the beam, M n and the strength reduction factor, φ .
Tension steel area: A s = 3 No. 9 bars = 3 × 1.00 in.2 = 3.00 in.2
Compute the depth of the equivalent rectangular stress block, α , assuming that tension steel is
yielding. From equilibrium (using Eq. (4-14)):
A f
s y 3.00 × 60000
α β=
= c = = 5.04 in.
1
0.85 f ' b 0.85 × 3500 × 12
c
For f c' = 3500 psi, β1 = 0.85 . Therefore,
= c α= 5.04 = 5.93 in.
β1 0.85
Check whether tension steel is yielding:

using Eq.(4-18) ε =
s ( )
ε =
t
 d −c
 c  ε cu =
 
 21.5 − 5.93 

 5.93 
 × 0.003 =0.00788
Thus, ε > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s = f y ).

s
Compute the nominal moment strength, using Eq. (4-21):

 5.04 
3.00 × 60000 ×  21.5 −
 α   2 
M
= A f d −= = 285 kips-ft
n s y 2  12000
Since,
= ε t 0.00788 > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and φ =0.9. Then,
φ M=n 0.9 × 285 kip-ft = 256 kip-ft. Clearly, φ M n > M u
4-1
4-2 A cantilever beam shown in Fig. P4-2. The beam supports a uniform service
(unfactored) dead load of 1 kip/ft plus its own dead load and it supports a concentrated
service (unfactored) live load of 12 kips as shown. The concrete is normal-weight concrete
with f c' = 4000 psi and the steel is Grade 60. Use load and strength-reduction factors form
ACI Code Section 9.2 and 9.3. For the end section shown in part (b) of Fig. P4-2, compute
φ M n and show it exceeds M u .
1. Calculate the dead load of the beam.

30 × 18
Weight/ft = × 0.15 =0.563 kips/ft
144
2. Compute the factored moment, M u .

Factored distributed load/ft: wu = 1.2(0.563 + 1.0) = 1.88 k/ft
Factored live load is a concentrated load: Pu = 1.6 × 12 = 19.2 kips
( )
− wu  2 2 − Pu (  − 1) =
Mu = ( )
− 1.88 × 10 2 2 − (19.2 × 9 ) =
−267 k-ft
Tension steel area: As = 6 No. 8 bars = 6 × 0.79 in.2 =4.74 in.2
A f
s y 4.74 × 60000
α β=
= c = = 2.79 in.
1
0.85 f ' b 0.85 × 4000 × 30
c
'
For f c = 4000 psi, β1 = 0.85 . Therefore,
= c α= 2.79 = 3.28 in.
β1 0.85

using. Eq.(4-18) ε =
s ( )
ε =
t
 d −c
  ε =
 15.5 − 3.28 

 c  cu  3.28 
 × 0.003 =0.011 > 0.0021

s
 2.79 
4.74 × 60000 × 15.5 −
 α  2 
M
= A f d −= = 334 kip-ft
n s y 2 12000
Since,
= ε t 0.011 > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and φ =0.9. Then,
φ M n =0.9 × 334 =301 kip-ft = 267 kip-ft. Clearly, φ M n > M u
4-2
4-3 (a) Compare φ M n for singly reinforced rectangular beams having the following
properties. Use loads and strength reduction factors from ACI Code Sections 9.2 and 9.3.
Beam b d f c' fy
Bars
No. (in.) (in.) (psi) (psi)
1 12 22 3 No. 7 3,000 60,000
2 12 22 2 No. 9 plus 1 No. 8 3,000 60,000
3 12 22 3 No. 7 3,000 40,000
4 12 22 3 No. 7 4,500 60,000
5 12 33 3 No. 7 3,000 60,000
Beam No.1
yielding.
A f
s y 3 × 0.60 × 60000
α β=
= c = = 3.53 in.
1
0.85 f ' b 0.85 × 3000 × 12
c
'
= c α= 3.53 = 4.15 in.
β1 0.85
ε
s ( =εt ) = d c− c  ε cu = 224.15
− 4.15 
 × 0.003 =

0.013

s
Since, ε t > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and φ =0.9.

 3.53 
0.9 × 3 × 0.60 × 60000 ×  22 −
 α  2 
φ=
M φ A f  d −= = 164 kip-ft
n s y 2  12000
For Beam 1, φ M = 164 kip-ft

n
Beam No.2
yielding.
A f ( 2 × 1.00 + 0.79 ) × 60000

s y
α β=
= c = = 5.47 in.
1
0.85 f ' b 0.85 × 3000 × 12
c
= c α= 5.47 = 6.44 in.
β1 0.85
4-3
ε
s ( =εt ) = d c− c  ε cu = 226.44
− 6.44 
 × 0.003 =

0.0072

s

 5.47 
0.9 × 2.79 × 60000 ×  22 −
 α  2 
φ=
M φ A f  d −= = 242 kip-ft
n s y 2  12000
n
Beam No.3
yielding.
A f
s y 1.8 × 40000
α β=
= c = = 2.35 in.
1 ' 0.85 × 3000 × 12
0.85 f b
c
'
For f c = 3000 psi, β1 = 0.85 . Therefore,= c α= 2.35 = 2.76 in.
β1 0.85
ε
s ( =εt ) = d c− c  ε cu = 222.76
− 2.76 
 × 0.003 =

0.021

s

 2.35 
0.9 × 1.8 × 40000 ×  22 −
 α  2 
φ=
M φ A f  d −= = 113 kip-ft
n s y 2  12000
n
Beam No.4
yielding.
A f
s y 1.8 × 60000
α β=
= c = = 2.35 in.
1 '
0.85 f b 0.85 × 4500 × 12
c
'
= c α= 2.35 = 2.85 in.
β1 0.825
ε (s =εt ) = d c− c  ε cu = 222.85

− 2.85 
 × 0.003 =

0.020

s
4-4
 2.35 
0.9 × 1.8 × 60000 ×  22 −
 α  2 
φ=
M φ A f  d −= = 169 kip-ft
n s y 2  12000
n
Beam No.5
yielding.
A f
s y 1.8 × 60000
=α β= c = = 3.53 in.
1
0.85 f ' b 0.85 × 3000 × 12
c
= c α= 3.53 = 4.15 in.
β1 0.85
ε
s ( =εt ) = d c− c  ε cu = 334.15
− 4.15 
 × 0.003 =

0.021

s

 3.53 
0.9 × 1.8 × 60000 ×  33 −
 α  2 
φ=
M φ A f  d −= = 253 kip-ft
n s y 2  12000
n
(b) Taking beam 1 as the reference point, discuss the effects of changing As , f y ,
f c' , and d on φ M n . (Note that each beam has the same properties as beam 1 except for the
italicized quantity.)
Beam φM
n
No. (kips-ft)
1 164
2 242
3 113
4 169
5 253
Effect of As (Beams 1 and 2)

An increase of 55% in As (from 1.80 to 2.79 in.2) caused on increase of 48% in φ M n . It is clear
that increasing the tension steel area causes a proportional increase in the strength of the section,
4-5
with a loss of ductility. Note that in this case, the strength reduction factor was 0.9 for both
sections.
Effect of f y (Beams 1 and 3)

A decrease of 33% in f y caused a decreased of 31% in φ M n . A decrease in the steel yield
strength has essentially the same effect as decreasing the tension steel area.
Effect of f c' (Beams 1 and 4)

An increase of 50% in f c' caused an increase of 3% in φ M n . It is clear that changes in the
concrete strength have a much smaller effect on moment strength compared with changes in the
tension steel area and steel yield strength.
Effect of d (Beams 1 and 5)

An increase of 50% in d caused an increase of 54% in φ M n .It is clear that increasing the
effective flexural depth of the section increases the section moment strength (without decreasing
the section ductility).
(c) What is the most effective way of increasing φ M n ? What is the least effective
way?
Disregarding any other effects of increasing d , As or f y such as changes in cost, etc., the most
effective way to increase φ M n is the increase the effective flexural depth of the section, d ,
followed by increasing f y and As . Note that increasing f y and As too much may make the beam
over-reinforced and thus will result in a decrease in ductility.
The least effective way of increasing φ M n is to increase f c' .Note that increasing f c' will cause a
significant increase in curvature at failure.
4-6
4-4 A 12-ft-long cantilever supports its own dead load plus an additional uniform
service (unfactored) dead load of 0.5 kip/ft. The beam is made from normal-weight 4000-psi
concrete and has b = 16 in., d = 15.5 in., and h = 18 in. It is reinforced with four No. 7 Grade-
60 bars. Compute the maximum service (unfactored) concentrated live load that can be
applied at 1ft from the free end of the cantilever. Use load and strength –reduction factors
from ACI Code Sections 9.2 and 9.3. Also check As ,min .
A f
s y 2.4 × 60000
α β=
= c = = 2.65 in.
1
0.85 f ' b 0.85 × 4000 × 16
c
'
= c α= 2.65 = 3.1 in.
β1 0.85

using Eq.(4-18) ε =
s ( )
ε =
t
 d −c

 c 
 ε cu =
 15.5 − 3.1 

 3.1 
 × 0.003 =0.012

s

 2.65 
2.4 × 60000 × 15.5 −
 α  2 
M
= A f d −= = 170 kips-ft
n s y 2  12000
Since,
= ε t 0.012 > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and,
φ M=
n 0.9 × 170 kips-ft = 153 kips-ft
2. Compute Live Load
M u φ=
Set = M n 153 kips-ft
16 × 18
Weight/ft of beam = × 0.15 = 0.3 kips/ft
144
Factored dead load = 1.2 ( 0.3 + 0.5 ) =0.96 kips/ft
Factored dead load moment = wl 2 2 =0.96 × 122 2 =69.1 kips-ft
Therefore the maximum factored live load moment is: 153 kips-ft – 69.1 kip-ft = 83.9 kips-ft
Maximum factored load at 1 ft from the tip = 83.9 kips-ft / 11 ft = 7.63 kips
Maximum concentrated service live load = 7.63 kips / 1.6 = 4.77 kips
4-7
3. Check of As ,min
The section is subjected to positive bending and tension is at the bottom of this section, so we
should use bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 3 f c' is equal to 189 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
200 200
As=
,min b=
wd = 0.82 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 16 × 15.5
fy 60,000
4-8
4-5 Compute φ M n and check As ,min for the beam shown in Fig. P4-5. Use f c' = 4500 psi
and f y = 60,000 psi.
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers, where the distance from the
tension edge to the centroid of the total tension reinforcement is given as d = 19 in.
Assuming that the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than or equal to the thickness of the
compression flange, α ≤ h f( ) and that the tension steel is yielding, (ε s ≥ ε y ) , using Eq. (4-16):
A f
s y 4.74 × 60000
=α = = 1.55 in. < h f =
6 in. (o.k.)
0.85 f ' b e 0.85 × 4500 × 48
c

= c α= 1.55 = 1.88 in.
β1 0.825
Comparing the calculated depth to the neutral axis, c , to the values for d and dt , it is clear that
the tension steel strain, ε s , easily exceeds the yield strain (0.00207) and the strain at the level of
the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, ε t , exceeds the limit for tension-controlled sections
(0.005). Thus, φ =0.9 and we can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :
 1.55 
4.74 × 60000 × 19 −
 α  2 
M= A f d −= = 432 kips-ft
n s y 2  12000
φ M= n 0.9 × 432 kips-ft = 389 kips-ft
2. Check of As ,min
should use bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 3 f c' is equal to 201 psi, so use 3 f c' in the numerator:
3 f c' 201
As=
,min b=
wd 19 0.76 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 12 ×=
fy 60,000
4-9
and f y = 60,000 psi.
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers, where the distance from the
tension edge to the centroid of the total tension reinforcement is given as d = 18.5 in.
( ) ( )
compression flange, α ≤ h f and that the tension steel is yielding, ε s ≥ ε y , using Eq. (4-16):
A f
s y 4.74 × 60000
=α = = 4.18 in. < h f =
5 in. (o.k.)
'
0.85 f b e 0.85 × 4000 × 20
c

= c α= 4.18 = 4.92 in.
β1 0.85

 d −c  18.5 − 4.95 
using Eq.(4-18)= ε  =ε  × 0.003
= 0.0082
s  c  cu 

4.95 
Thus, ε > 0.002 and it is clear that the steel is yielding in both layers of reinforcement.
s
It is also clear that the section is tension-controlled ( φ = 0.9), but just for illustration the value
of ε can be calculated as:
t
 d −c  19.5 − 4.92 
= ε  t = ε × 0.003
= 0.0089
t  c  cu  4.92 
We can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :

 4.18 
4.74 × 60000 × 18.5 −
 α  2 
M= A f d −=  = 389 kips-ft
n s y 2 12000
2. Check of As ,min
200 200
As=
,min b=
wd = 0.74 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 12 × 18.5
fy 60,000
4-10
4-7 Compute the negative-moment capacity, φ M n , and check As ,min for the beam shown
in Fig. P4-7. Use f c' = 3500 psi and f y = 40,000 psi.
1. Calculation of φ M n
This section is subjected to negative bending and tension will develop in the top flange and the
compression zone is at the bottom of the section. ACI Code Section 10.6.6 requires that a portion
of the tension reinforcement be distributed in the flange, so assuming that the No. 6 bars in the
flange are part of the tension reinforcement:
2
As = 2.64 in.
6 × 0.44 =
The depth of the Whitney stress block can be calculated using Eq. (4-16) , using b = 12 in., since
the compression zone is at the bottom of the section:
A f
s y 2.64 × 40000
=α = = 2.96 in.
'
0.85 f b e 0.85 × 3500 × 12
c

= c α= 2.96 = 3.48 in.
β1 0.85
We should confirm that the steel is yielding:
 d −c  19.5 − 3.48 

s ( t )  c  cu  3.48 
using Eq.(4-18) ε = ε = ε = × 0.003 =0.014
Clearly, the steel is yielding (

εs > ε y = )
0.00207 and this is tension-controlled
section ( ε t > 0.005 ) .
 2.96 
2.64 × 40000 × 19.5 −
 α  2 
M= A f d −= = 159 kips-ft
n s y 2  12000
2. Check of As ,min
The beam is subjected to negative bending and since the flanged portion of the beam section is in
tension, the value of As ,min will depend on the use of that beam.
Assuming that the beam is part of a continuous, statically indeterminate floor system, the
minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 3 f c' is equal
to 177 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
4-11
200 200
As=
,min b=
wd = 1.17 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 12 × 19.5
fy 40,000
However, for a statically determinate beam, bw should be replaced by the smaller of

2bw ( = 24 in.) or be . Given that be is 48 in. for this beam section,
200 200
As ,min
= b=
wd = 2.34 < As (o.k.)
× 24 × 19.5
fy 40,000
4-12
4-8 For the beam shown in Fig. P4-8, f c' = 3500 psi and f y = 60,000 psi.
(a) Compute the effective flange width at midspan.
The limits given in ACI Code Section 8.12 for determining the effective compression flange, be ,
for a flanged section that is part of a continuous floor system are:
  
 4 
 
be ≤  bw + 2(8h f ) 
b + 2(clear trans. distance)/2 
 w 
 
Assuming that the columns are 18 in. × 18 in. , the longitudinal span is approximated as:
 18 in. 
= 21 ft +   ft =
22.5 ft
 12 in. 
 ft 
 12 in. 
The clear transverse distance for the 9 ft.-6 in. span is: 9.5 ft −  =8.5 ft
 12 in. 
 ft 
1  12 in. 18 in. 
and for the 11 ft. span is: 11 ft −  + 9.75 ft
=
2  12 in. 12 in. 
 ft ft 
So, the average clear transverse distance is 9.125 ft
The effective compression flange can now be computed as:
 22.5 ft (12 in./ft ) 

 = 67.5 in. 
 4 
be ≤  12 in. + 2 ( 8 × 6 in.) = 108 in. 
 
12 in. + 2 ( 9.125 ft (12 in./ft ) ) /2=122 in.
 
The first limit governs for this section, so be = 67.5 in.
(b) Compute φ M n for the positive- and negative-moment regions and check
As ,min for both sections. At the supports, the bottom bars are in one layer; at midspan, the
No. 8 bars are in the bottom, the No. 7 bars in a second layer.
Positive moment region
1. Calculation of φ M n
Tension steel area: As = 3 No. 8 bars + 2 No. 7 bars = 3 × 0.79 + 2 × 0.60 =3.57 in.2
4-13
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers. Assuming the section will
include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to assume that the distance from the extreme
tension edge of the section to the centroid of the lowest layer of steel is approximately 2.5 in.
Thus the distance from the top of the section to the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, dt ,
can be calculated to be:
dt = 21 in. – 2.5 in. =18.5 in.
The minimum spacing required between layers of reinforcement is 1 in. (ACI Code Section
7.6.2). Thus the spacing between the centers of the layers is approximately 2 in. So the distance
from the tension edge to the centroid of the total tension reinforcement is:
( 3 × 0.79 ) × 2.5 + ( 2 × 0.60 ) × 4.5

= 3.17 in.
3.57
Therefore, the effective flexural depth, d , is:
d = 21 in. – 3.17 in. =17.8 in.
(
compression flange, α ≤ h f = ) ( )
6 in. and that the tension steel is yielding, ε s ≥ ε y , using Eq.(4-
16):
A f
s y 3.57 × 60000
=α = = 1.07 in. < h f =
6 in. (o.k.)
0.85 f ' b e 0.85 × 3500 × 67.5
c

= c α= 1.07 = 1.26 in.
β1 0.85
Comparing the calculated depth to the neutral axis, c , to the values for d and dt , it is clear that
the tension steel strain, ε s , easily exceeds the yield strain (0.00207) and the strain at the level of
the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, ε t , exceeds the limit for tension-controlled sections
(0.005). Thus, φ =0.9 and we can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :
 1.07 
3.57 × 60000 × 17.8 −
 α  2 
M= A f d −=  = 308 kips-ft
n s y 2 12000
2. Check of As ,min
4-14
200 200
As=
,min b=
wd = 0.71 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 12 × 17.8
fy 60,000
Negative moment region
The tension and compression reinforcement for this section is provided in single layers.
Assuming the section will include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to assume that the
distance from the extreme tension or compression edge of the section to the centroid of the
tension or compression layer of steel is approximately 2.5 in.
2
As = 7 No. 7 bars = 7 × 0.60 =
4.2 in. , d = 18.5 in.
2
As' = = 2 No. 8 bars = 2 × 0.79 =
1.58 in. , d ' = 2.5 in.
Because this is a doubly reinforced section, we will initially assume the tension steel is yielding
and use the trial and error procedure described in Section 4-7 to find the neutral axis depth, c.
Try=c d 4 ≈ 4.5 in.

 c − d'   4.5 − 2.5 
ε s' 
= =ε cu   × 0.003
= 0.00133
 c   4.5 
f s' =E s ε s' =29,000 ksi × 0.00133 = (
38.6 ksi ≤ f y )
( )
C 's =As' f s' − 0.85 f c' =1.58 in.2 ( 38.6 ksi − 2.98 ksi ) =56.3 kips
Cc = 0.85 f c'bβ1c = 0.85 × 3.5 ksi × 12 in. × 0.85 × 4.5 in.=137 kips
T =As f y =4.20 in.2 × 60 ksi =252 kips
Because T > Cc + C 's , we should increase c for the second trial.
Try c = 5.9 in.

ε s' = 0.00173
=f s' 50.2 ksi ≤ f y ( )
C 's = 74.6 kips
Cc = 179 kips
=T 254 kips ≈ Cc +=
Cs 254 kips
With section equilibrium established, we must confirm the assumption that the tension steel is
yielding.
 d −c  18.5 − 5.9 
ε 
using Eq.(4-18)= =ε × 0.003
= 0.0064
s  c  cu  5.9 
( )
Thus, the steel is yielding ε > 0.00207 and it is a tension-controlled section ( ε t > ε s =
s
0.0102 ) .
So, using α = β1c = 5.0 in. , use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n .
0.85 × 5.9 in. =
 α
n  2
( )
M = Cc  d −  + C 's d − d ' = 179 kips × 16 in. + 74.6 kips × 16 in.
M = 2865 k-in. + 1195 k-in = 4060 k-in = 338 k-ft

n
4-15
φ M=
n 0.9 × 338 kips-ft = 304 kips-ft
2. Check of As ,min
The flanged portion of the beam section is in tension and the value of As ,min will depend on the
use of that beam. Since the beam is part of a continuous, statically indeterminate floor system, the
minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw in Eq. (4-11). Also, 3 f c' is equal
to 177 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
200 200
As=,min b=
wd = 0.74 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 12 × 18.5
fy 60,000
4-16
and f y = 60, 000 psi, and
(a) the reinforcement is six No. 8 bars.
Tension steel area: As = 6 No. 8 bars = 6 × 0.79 in.2 = 4.74 in.2
( )
top flange, (α ≤ 5 in.) and that the tension steel is yielding, ε s ≥ ε y , using Eq. (4-16) with
b = 30 in. :
A f
s y 4.74 × 60000
=α = = 3.19 in. < h f =
5 in. (o.k.)
'
0.85 f b 0.85 × 3500 × 30
c

= c α= 3.19 = 3.76 in.
β1 0.85

 d −c  32.5 − 3.76 
s ( t )  c  cu 
using Eq.(4-18) ε = ε = ε =  × 0.003 =0.023
3.76 
s

 3.18 
4.74 × 60000 ×  32.5 −
 α  2 
M= A f d −= = 733 kips-ft
n s y 2  12000
2. Check of As ,min
use of that beam.
minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw = 2 × 5 = 10 in. in Eq. (4-11). Also,
3 f c' is equal to 177 psi, so use 200 psi in the numerator:
200 200
As=
,min b=
wd = 1.08 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 10 × 32.5
fy 60,000
4-17
However, for a statically determinate beam, bw should be replaced by the smaller of
200 200
As ,min
= b=
wd = 2.17 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 20 × 32.5
fy 60,000
(b) the reinforcement is nine No. 8 bars.
(
compression flange, α ≤ h f = ) ( )
5 in. and that the tension steel is yielding, ε s ≥ ε y , using Eq. (4-
16) with b = 30 in. :
A f
s y 7.11 × 60000
=α = = 4.78 in. < h f =
5 in. (o.k.)
'
0.85 f b 0.85 × 3500 × 30
c

= c α= 4.78 = 5.62 in.
β1 0.85

 d −c  32.5 − 5.62 
s ( t )  c  cu 
using Eq.(4-18) ε = ε = ε =  × 0.003 =0.014
5.62 
s
 4.78 
7.11 × 60000 ×  32.5 −
 α  2 
M= A f d −=  = 1070 kips-ft
n s y 2 12000
2. Check of As ,min
As ,min is the same as in part (a).
4-18
and f y = 60,000 psi, and
Tension will develop in the bottom flange and the compression zone is at the top of the section.
( )
Thus, assuming that the tension steel is yielding, ε s ≥ ε y , in Eq. (4-16) we should use
b = 2 × 6 = 12 in. and we find the depth of the Whitney stress block as:
A f
s y 4.8 × 60000
=α = = 5.65 in.
'
0.85 f b 0.85 × 5000 × 12
c
= c α= 5.65 = 7.06 in.
β1 0.80
 d −c  23.5 − 7.06 
s ( t )  c  cu 
using Eq.(4-18) ε = ε = ε =  × 0.003 =0.007
7.06 
s
Since, ε t > 0.005 the section is tension-controlled and φ =0.9.
 5.65 
4.8 × 60000 ×  23.5 −
 α  2 
M= A f d −= = 496 kips-ft
n s y 2  12000
2. Check of As ,min
use of that beam.
minimum tension reinforcement should be calculated using bw = 2 × 6 = 12 in. in Eq. (4-11). Also,
note that 3 f c' is equal to 212 psi:
212 212
As=
,min b=
wd = 1.00 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 12 × 23.5
fy 60,000
However, for a statically determined beam, bw should be replaced by the smaller of
212 212
As ,min
= b=
wd = 1.99 in.2 < As (o.k.)
× 24 × 23.5
fy 60,000
4-19
4-11 (a) Compute φ M n for the three beams shown in Fig. P4-11. In each case,
f c' = 4000 psi and f y = 60=
ksi, b 12
= in., d 32.5 in.,
= and h 36 in.
Beam No. 1
The tension reinforcement for this section is provided in two layers. Assuming the section will
include a No. 3 or No. 4 stirrup, it is reasonable to assume that the distance from the extreme
tension edge of the section to the centroid of the lowest layer of steel is approximately 2.5 in.
Thus the distance from the top of the section to the extreme layer of tension reinforcement, dt ,
can be calculated to be:
dt = 36 in. – 2.5 in. =33.5 in.
The effective flexural depth, d , is given as : d = 32.5 in.
( )
Assuming that the tension steel is yielding, ε s ≥ ε y , using Eq. (4-16):
A f
s y 6.00 × 60000
=α = = 8.82 in.
'
0.85 f b 0.85 × 4000 × 12
c
= c α= 8.82 = 10.4 in.
β1 0.85
We need to check whether tension steel is yielding:

 d −c  32.5 − 10.4 
using Eq.(4-18)= ε  =ε × 0.003
= 0.0064
s  c  cu  10.4 
s
Also, clearly ε t > 0.005 , the section is tension-controlled and φ =0.9.
Thus, φ =0.9 and we can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :
 8.82 
6.00 × 60000 ×  32.5 −
 α  2 
M= A f d −= = 843 kips-ft
n s y 2  12000
Beam No. 2

Compression steel area: A s' = 2 No. 9 bars = 2 × 1.00 in.2 =2.00 in.2
As was discussed for beam No. 1, d = 32 in., dt = 33.5 in. and d ' is given as d ' = 2.5 in.
4-20
Try=c d 4 ≈ 8 in.
'  c − d'   8 − 2.5 
ε=
s  ε=
cu   × 0.003
= 0.00206
 c   8 
f s' =
E s ε s' =
29,000 ksi × 0.00206 = (
59.7 ksi ≤ f y )
( )
C 's =As' f s' − 0.85 f c' =2.00 in.2 ( 59.7 ksi − 3.4 ksi ) =113 kips
Cc = 0.85 f c'bβ1c = 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in. × 0.85 × 8 in.=277 kips
T =As f y =6.00 in.2 × 60 ksi =360 kips
Because T < Cc + C 's , we should decrease c for the second trial.
Try c = 7.4 in.

ε s' = 0.00199
=f s' 57.7 ksi ≤ f y ( )
C 's = 109 kips
Cc = 257 kips
=T 360 kips ≈ Cc +=
C 's 366 kips
yielding.
 d −c  32.5 − 7.4 
ε 
using Eq.(4-18)= =ε  × 0.003
= 0.0102
s  c  cu  7.4 
( )
Clearly, the steel is yielding ε > 0.00207 and it is a tension-controlled section ( ε t > ε s =
s
0.0102 ) .
So, using α = β1c = 6.3 in. , use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n .
0.85 × 7.4 in. =
 α
n  2
( )
M = Cc  d −  + C 's d − d ' = 257 kips × 29.3 in. + 108.6 kips × 30 in.
M = 7545 k-in. + 3270 k-in = 10800 k-in = 901 k-ft

n
Beam No. 3

Compression steel area: A s' = 4 No. 9 bars = 4 × 1.00 in.2 =4.00 in.2
As was discussed for beam No. 1, d = 32.5 in., and dt = 33.5 in.
The compression reinforcement for this beam section is provided in two layers and d ' is given as
3.5 in.
4-21
Because this is a doubly reinforced section, we will the same procedure as for beam No. 2
(assuming that the tension steel is yielding).
The depth of the neutral axis for this section should be smaller compared with beam section No.
2, since the compression reinforcement is increased for this section.
Try c = 7 in.
 c − d'   7 − 3.5 
ε= '
s   ε=
cu   × 0.003
= 0.0015
 c   7 
f s' =E s ε s' =29, 000 ksi × 0.0015 =43.5 ksi ( ≤ f y )
( )
C 's =As' f s' − 0.85 f c' =4.00 in.2 ( 43.5 ksi − 3.4 ksi ) =160 kips
Cc = 0.85 f bβ1c = 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in. × 0.85 × 7 in.=243 kips
c
'
T =As f y =6.00 in.2 × 60 ksi =360 kips

Because T < Cc + C 's , we should decrease c for the second trial.
Try c = 6.3 in. (Note that both layers of the compression steel will actually be in the compression zone)
ε s' = 0.00133
=f s' 38.6 ksi ≤ f y ( )
C 's = 141 kips
Cc = 218 kips
=T 360 kips ≈ Cc +=
Cs 359 kips
yielding.
 d −c  32.5 − 6.3 

ε 
using Eq.(4-18)= = ε  × 0.003
= 0.012
s  c  cu  6.3 
Clearly, the steel is yielding (ε s > 0.00207 ) and it is a tension-controlled
section ( ε t > ε s =
0.012 ) .
So, using α =
β1c = 5.36 in. , use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n .
0.85 × 6.3 in. =
 α
n  2
( )
M = Cc  d −  + C 's d − d ' = 218 kips × 29.8 in. + 141 kips × 29 in.
M = 6495 k-in. + 4090 k-in = 10585 k-in = 882 k-ft

n
4-22
(b) From the results of part (a), comment on weather adding compression
reinforcement is a cost-effective way of increasing the strength, φ M n , of a beam.
Comparing the values of φ M n for the three beams, it is clear that for a given amount of tension
reinforcement, the addition of compression steel has little effect on the nominal moment capacity,
provided the tension steel yields in the beam without compression reinforcement. As a result,
adding compression reinforcement in not a cost effective way of increasing the nominal moment
capacity of a beam. However, adding compression reinforcement improves the ductility and
might be necessary when large amounts of tension reinforcement are used to change the mode of
failure.
4-23
4-12 Compute φ M n for the beam shown in Fig. P4-12. Use f c' = 3500 psi and
f y = 60,000 psi. Does the steel yield in this beam at nominal strength?
As = 6 No. 8 bars = 6 × 0.79 in.2 =4.74 in.2 , d =25 in. − 2.5 in. =22.5 in.
As' = 2 No. 7 bars = 2 × 0.60 in.2 =1.2 in.2 , d ' = 2.5 in.
Try=c d 4 ≈ 5.5 in.

For f c' = 3500 psi, β1 = 0.85 . Thus, α =0.85 × 5.5 in. =4.68 in. < 5.0 in.
Since the depth of the Whitney stress block is less than 5.0 in. , (α < 5.0 in.) ,the width of the
compression zone is constant and equal to 10 in., i.e. b = 10 in.
 c − d'   5.5 − 2.5 

ε s' 
= =ε cu   × 0.003
= 0.00164
 c   5.5 
f' =
s
E ε' =
s s
29,000 ksi × 0.00164 = 47.6 ksi ≤ f( )
y
( )
C 's =As' f s' − 0.85 f c' =1.2 in.2 ( 47.6 ksi − 2.98 ksi ) =53.5 kips
Cc = 0.85 f c'bβ1c = 0.85 × 3.5 ksi × 10 in. × 0.85 × 5.5 in.=139 kips
T =As f y =4.74 in.2 × 60 ksi =284 kips
Because T > Cc + C 's , we should increase c for the second trial.
Try c = 6.5 in.

and find α = 0.85 × 6.5 in. =5.53 in.> 5.0 in.
'
ε s = 0.00185
=f s' 53.7 ksi ≤ f y ( )
C 's = 60.9 kips
In this case, the width of the compression zone is not constant. Using a similar reasoning as in the
case of flanged sections, where the depth of the Whitney stress block is in the web of the section,
the compression force can be calculated from the following equations (refer to Fig. S4-12):
Ccw= 0.85 f c' × (10 in.) × α= 0.85 × 3.5 ksi × 10 in. × 5.53 in.=165 kips
Ccf = 0.85 f c' × ( 20 − 10 in.) × (α − 5 in.) = 0.85 × 3.5 ksi × 10 in. × 0.53 in. = 15.8 kips
Cc =165 + 15.8 =181 kips
=T 284 kips > = Cc + C 's 242 kips , we should increase c for the third trial.
Try c = 7.2 in.

and find α = 0.85 × 7.2 in. =6.12 in.> 5.0 in.
'
ε s = 0.00196
4-24
= (
f s' 56.8 ksi ≤ f y )
C 's = 64.6 kips
Ccw = 182 kips
Ccf = 33.3 kips
Cc = 215 kips
=T 284 kips ≈ Cc +=
C 's 276 kips
yielding.
 d −c  22.5 − 6.12 

ε 
using Eq.(4-18)= = ε  × 0.003
= 0.00803
s  c  cu  6.12 
( )
Thus, the steel is yielding ε > 0.00207 and it is a tension-controlled section ( ε t > ε s =
s
0.012 ) .
Summing the moments about the level of the tension reinforcement:
 α  α −5 
M= Ccw  d −  + Ccf  d −
n  2  2 
(
− 5  + C 's d − d ')
M = 182 kips × 19.4 in. + 33.3 kips × 16.9 in. + 64.6 kips × 20 in.
n
M = 3530 k-in. + 563 k-in +1290 k-in = 5385 k-in = 449 k-ft
n
4-25
bw
0.85f'c
ht a
f's
d
h
f
fs=fy
b (assumed)
a) total beam section and stress distribution
bw
a/2 d' Cs
ht a
Ccw
d
h
T1
F
b
b) Part 1: web of section and corresponding internal forces
bw
ht a (a+ht)/2
Ccf
d
h
T2
F
b
c) Part 2: overhanging flanges and corresponding internal forces
Fig. S4-12.1 Beam section and internal forces for the case of α > ht .
4-26
Chapter 5
5-1 Give three reasons for the minimum cover requirements in the ACI code.
- To ensure enough concrete is present to develop the reinforcement.

- To protect reinforcement from corrosive agents.
- To insulate reinforcement in case of fire.
Under what circumstances are larger covers used?
- Highly corrosive environments.

- Situations where abrasion to the concrete surface may result in a reduction in cover provided.
Note: See Section 5.3 “Concrete Cover and Bar Spacing” for further discussion.
5-2 Give two reasons for the minimum bar spacing requirements in the ACI code.
- To ensure enough concrete is present to develop the reinforcement.

- To provide sufficient space for wet concrete to flow freely between reinforcing bars.
5-3 Give three reasons for using compression reinforcement in beams.
- To reduce long-term deflections (i.e. creep).

- It tends to lead to a more ductile failure mode.
- Some compression reinforcement is always required for fabrication of rebar cages.
5-1
5-4 Design a rectangular beam section, i.e. select b, d, h, and the required tension
reinforcement, at midspan for a 22 ft-span simply supported rectangular beam that
supports its own dead load, a superimposed service dead load of 1.25 kip/ft, and a
uniform service load of 2 kip/ft. Use the procedure in Section 5.3 for the design of
beam sections where the dimensions are unknown. Use f’ c = 4500 psi and f y = 60 ksi.
Step 1: Estimate the dead load due to self-weight of the beam:
Method 1: DL ≅ 0.10 to 0.15 × ( SDL + LL)

DL ≅ 0.10 to 0.15 × (1.25 k/ft + 2 k/ft )
DL ≅ 325 lb/ft to 490 lb/ft
Method 2:  / 18 ≤ h ≤  / 12, so estimate h ≅ 22 in

b ≅ 0.8h ≅ 18 in
bh lb 18 in × 22 in lb lb
DL ≅ × 150= × 150= 413
144 in 2 /ft 2 ft 3 144 in 2 /ft 2 ft 3 ft
Therefore, DL = 410 lb/ft seems like a good first estimate of the weight of the beam.
Step 2: Compute the total factored load and factored design moment, M u :
From ACI-08 Chapter 9:

= wu 1.2 wD + 1.6 wL , or 1.4 wD
wu = 1.2 × (0.41 k/ft + 1.25 k/ft) + 1.6 × (2 k/ft), or 1.4 × (0.41 k/ft + 1.25 k/ft)
wu = 5.20 k/ft, or 2.35 k/ft
For this simply supported span,

wu  2 5.20 k/ft × (22 ft) 2
=Mu = = 315= k-ft 3775 k-in
8 8
Step 3: Select ρ and the corresponding R-factor:
Assume the desirable strain diagram shown in Fig. 5-27b, which leads to φ = 0.9 .
From Eq. (5-19):
β f ' 0.825 × 4,500 psi
ρ=≅ 1 c = 0.0154 Note: β 1 = 0.825 for f’ c = 4,500 psi
4 fy 4 × 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
ρ f y 0.0154 × 60,000 psi
= ω = = 0.205
f 'c 4,500 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
=R ω f 'c (1 − 0.59ω=) 0.205 × 4.5 ksi ⋅ (1 − 0.59 × 0.205)
= 0.811 ksi
(Note that this R-factor is reasonable based on values given in Table A-3)
5-2
Step 4: Select section dimensions, b and h:
From Eq. (5-23):
2 Mu 3775 k-in
bd
= = = 5170 in 3
φ R 0.9 × 0.811 ksi
Since no column dimensions are given which control the width of the beam, the designer can
assume any reasonable α value. Here we assume α = 0.7
1 1
 M  3  3775 k-in  3
d=
≥ u   =  19.5 in
 αφ R   0.7 × 0.9 × 0.811 ksi 
h=d + 2.5 in =
22 in
b=α d =×0.7 19.5 in = 13.65 in ≈ 14 in
Note that both h and b are rounded up to the nearest even inch value for constructability.
Step 5: Determine A s and select the reinforcing bars:

First, go back and recalculate the weight of the beam with the final selected dimensions:
DL ≅ 2 2
× 150= 3 2 2
× 150= 3
321
144 in /ft ft 144 in /ft ft ft
So, wu = 5.09 k/ft and = M u 308= k-ft 3695 k-in
Calculate the required area of steel, assuming jd = 0.9d :

From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3695 k-in
As = ≅ 3.90 in 2
=
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 19.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.90 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 4.37 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4.5 ksi × 14 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3695 k-in
= As = = 3.95 in 2
 a  4.37 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi × 19.5 in -
 2  2 
No further iterations are necessary, since the estimated lever arm was very reasonable. Select 4#9
bars as bottom reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
As = 4 Ab =4 × 1.0 in 2 =
4.0 in 2 ≥ 3.95 in 2 OK
Step 6: Required Checks:
1) Use minimum bar spacing and cover values, or Table A-5, to verify that b = 14 in is sufficiently
wide for 4 #9 bars to be placed in a single layer. OK
5-3
2) Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’ c = 4,500 psi, 3 f=
'c 201 ≥ 200 so use 3 f 'c
3 f 'c 3 4500
As ,min= bw=
d = 0.92 in 2 ≤ 4.0 in 2
× 14 in × 19.5 in OK
fy 60,000 psi
3) Calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming φ = 0.9 is valid.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 4.0 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 4.48 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4.5 ksi × 14 in
We know that β1 = 0.825 (see above).
a 4.48 in
=c = = 5.43 in
β1 0.825
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 19.5 in - 5.43 in
εt = ε cu = × 0.003 = 0.0078 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 5.43 in
Therefore the designer is permitted to use φ = 0.9 for this beam design.
4) Finally, verify that the nominal flexural strength is sufficient for the applied loads.
From Eq. (5-15):
 a  4.48 in 
φ M n = φ As f y  d −  = 0.9 × 4.0 in 2 × 60 ksi × 19.5 in −  = 3725 k-in
 2  2 
φ M n = 310 k-ft ≥ 308 k-ft = M u
Therefore, this design is sufficient without being too conservative.
Note that other combinations of b, h, and A s may also be correct if different assumptions were
made by the designer. If all checks listed in Step 6 are satisfied, without being unreasonably
conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
14in.
22in.
4 #9 bars
2.5in.
Fig. S5-4 Cross-section of final design at mid-span
5-4
5-5 The rectangular beam shown in Fig. P5-5 carries its own dead load (you must guess
values for b and h) plus an additional uniform service load of 0.5 kip/ft and a uniform
service live load of 1.5 kip/ft. The dead load acts on the entire beam, of course, but
the live load can act on parts of the span. Three possible loading cases are shown in
Fig. P5-5. Use load and strength reduction factors from ACI Code sections 9.2 and
9.3.
a) Draw factored bending-moment diagrams for the three loading cases shown
and superimpose them to draw a bending-moment envelope.
Begin by estimating the dead load due to self-weight of the beam:
Method 1: DL ≅ 0.10 to 0.15 × ( SDL + LL)

DL ≅ 0.10 to 0.15 × (0.5 k/ft + 1.5 k/ft )
DL ≅ 200 lb/ft to 300 lb/ft
Method 2:  / 18 ≤ h ≤  / 12, so estimate h ≅ 22 in

b ≅ 0.8h ≅ 18 in
DL ≅ 2 2
× 150= 3 2 2
× 150= 3
413
144 in /ft ft 144in /ft ft ft
We select DL = 350 lb/ft as a first estimate of the weight of the beam.
So, using
= wu 1.2 wD + 1.6 wL from ACI 318-08, Chapter 9, the bending-moment envelope is as
follows:
Fig. S5-5a Bending moment envelope
5-5
b) Design the beam, selecting b, d, h, and the reinforcing bars. Use the
procedure in Section 5.3 for the design of beam sections where the dimensions
are unknown. Use f’ c =5000 psi and f y = 60 ksi.
It is necessary to design this beam section for both negative and positive bending. The
need for a practical design makes it reasonable to assume that the outer dimensions of the beam
will be constant along the length, and that these dimensions will be controlled by the design of the
section subjected to the largest absolute value of moment. As seen in Part (a), the largest expected
moment is a positive moment of 226 k-ft (2715 k-in). Begin by designing the beam at this section.
From Eq. (5-19):
β f ' 0.80 × 5,000 psi
ρ=≅ 1 c = 0.0167 Note: β 1 =0.80 for f’ c = 5,000 psi
4 fy 4 × 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
ρ f y 0.0167 × 60,000 psi
= ω = = 0.20
f 'c 5,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
R= ω f 'c (1 − 0.59ω )= 0.20 × 5 ksi × (1 − 0.59 × 0.20)= 0.882 ksi

From Eq. (5-23):
2 Mu 2715 k-in
bd
= = = 3420 in 3
φ R 0.9 × 0.882 ksi
1 1
 M  3  2715 k-in  3
d ≥ u  =   17.0 in ≅ 17.5 in
=
 αφ R   0.7 × 0.9 × 0.882 ksi 
h= d + 2.5 in =
20 in
b= α d =×0.7 17.5 in = 12.5 in ≅ 14 in
Step 3: Determine A s and select the reinforcing bars:

First, go back and recalculate the weight of the beam with the final selected dimensions:
DL ≅ 2 2
× 150= 3 2 2
× 150= 3
292
144 in /ft ft 144 in /ft ft ft
So, using pattern loading again, the maximum positive moment = is: M u 222= k-ft 2670 k-in
Now calculate the required area of steel, assuming jd = 0.9d :
5-6
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 2670 k-in
As = ≅ =3.14 in 2
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 17.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
With this estimate, iterate once to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.14 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 3.16 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 5 ksi × 14 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 2670 k-in
= As = = 3.11 in 2
 a  3.16 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi × 17.5 in -
 2  2 
As = 4 Ab =4 × 0.79 in 2 =
3.16 in 2 ≥ 3.11 in 2 OK
required.
For f’ c = 5,000 psi, 3 f=
'c 212 ≥ 200 so use 3 f 'c
3 f 'c 3 5000
As ,min= bw=
d = 0.87 in 2 ≤ 3.16 in 2 OK
× 14 in × 17.5 in
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.16 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 3.19 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 5 ksi × 14 in
a 3.19 in
=c = = 3.99 in
β1 0.80
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 17.5 in - 3.99 in
εt = ε cu = × 0.003 = 0.0102 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 3.99 in
5-7
From Eq. (5-15):
 a  3.19 in 
 2  2 
φ M n = 226 k-ft ≥ 222 k-ft = M u
Therefore, this design for positive bending is sufficient without being too conservative.
Design for negative bending:
Since the outer dimensions are selected, the design for negative bending follows the method for
designing a rectangular section where the section dimensions are known. The maximum expected
negative moment, considering pattern loading,= is M u 135.7
= k-ft 1630 k-in
Step 5: Determine A s and select the reinforcing bars for negative bending:
Assume jd = 0.9d :
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1630 k-in
As = ≅ =1.92 in 2
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 17.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 1.92 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 1.94 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 5 ksi × 14 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1630 k-in
= As = = 1.83 in 2
 a  1.94 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi × 17.5 in -
 2  2 
Although it may not be warranted in this case, we’ll iterate once to confirm this value.
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 1.83 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 1.85 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 5 ksi × 14 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1630 k-in
= As = = 1.82 in 2
 a  1.85 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi × 17.5 in -
 2  2 
No further iterations are necessary since the solution has converged. Select 2#9 bars as top
reinforcement at the critical section of the beam.
As = 2 Ab =2 × 1.0 in 2 =2.0 in 2 ≥ 1.82 in 2 OK
5-8
required.
For f’ c = 5,000 psi, 3 f=
'c 212 ≥ 200 so use 3 f 'c
3 f 'c 3 5000
As ,min= bw=
d = 0.87 in 2 ≤ 2.0 in 2
× 14 in × 17.5 in OK
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 2.0 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 2.02 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 5 ksi × 14 in
a 2.02 in
=c = = 2.53 in
β1 0.80
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 17.5 in - 2.53 in
εt = ε cu = × 0.003 = 0.0178 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 2.53 in
From Eq. (5-15):
 a  2.02 in 
 2  2 
φ M n = 148 k-ft ≥ 136 k-ft = M u
5-9
c) Draw beam cross sections at the points of maximum and negative moment.
14in. 14in.
2.5in.
2 #9 bars
20in. 20in.
4 #8 bars
2.5in.
Fig. S5-5b Cross-sections of final designs for positive and negative bending respectively
Note that other combinations of b, h, and A s may also be correct if different assumptions were
made by the designer. If all checks listed in Steps 4 and 6 are satisfied, without being unreasonably
conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
5-10
5-6 Design three rectangular beam sections, i.e. select b and d and the tension steel area
A s , to resist a factored design moment, M u = 260 k-ft. For all three cases select a
section with b = 0.5d and use f’ c = 4000 psi and f y = 60 ksi.
a) Start your design by assuming that ε t = 0.0075 (as was done in Section 5.3)
The equations presented in section 5.3 initially assumed that ε t = 0.0075. So, while no changes
need to be made, their derivation will briefly be shown to easy comparisons with the solutions to
parts (b) and (c).
ε cu 0.003
= c =×d =× d 0.286d
ε cu + ε s 0.003 + 0.0075
C=c 0.85 f 'c β1bc
= 0.85 f 'c β1b × 0.286=
d 0.24 β1 f 'c bd
Now, enforce equilibrium:
Cc = T
0.24 β1 f 'c bd = As f y
Thus we have an expression for the initial ρ value when ε t = 0.0075 is assumed, from Eq. 5-19:
0.24 β1 f 'c 0.24 × 0.85 × 4,000 psi
= ρinitial = = 0.0136
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
ρ f y 0.0136 × 60,000 psi
= ω = = 0.204
f 'c 4,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
=R ω f 'c (1 − 0.59ω= ) 0.204 × 4 ksi ⋅ (1 − 0.59 × 0.204)
= 0.718 ksi
From Eq. (5-23):
Mu 3120 k-in
bd
= 2
= = 4830 in 3 Note that with ε t = 0.0075, ϕ = 0.9
φ R 0.9 × 0.718 ksi
We are told to assume α = 0.5
1 1
 M  3  3120 k-in  3
d ≥ u  =   21.3 in ≅ 21.5 in
=
 αφ R   0.5 × 0.9 × 0.718 ksi 
α d 0.5 21.5 in =
b ==× 10.8 in ≅ 12 in
Note that both d and b are rounded up so that h and b both result in even inch values for
constructability.
Now, determine A s and select the reinforcing bars, assuming jd = 0.9d :

From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3120 k-in
As =≅ 2.99 in 2
=
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 21.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
5-11
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 2.99 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 4.40 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3120 k-in
= As = = 3.00 in 2
 a   4.4 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi ×  21.5 in -
 2  2 
As = 3 Ab =3 × 1.0 in 2 =
3.0 in 2 ≥ 3.0 in 2 OK
Now do the required checks:
required.
For f’ c = 4,000 psi, 3 f=
'c 190 ≤ 200 so use 200.
200 psi 200 psi
As ,min= bw=
d = 0.86 in 2 ≤ 3.0 in 2 OK
× 12 in × 21.5 in
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.0 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 4.41 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
We know that β1 = 0.85 .
a 4.41 in
=c = = 5.19 in
β1 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 21.5 in - 5.19 in
εt = ε cu = × 0.003 = 0.0094 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 5.19 in
From Eq. (5-15):
 a  4.41 in 
φ M n = φ As f y  d −  = 0.9 × 3.0 in 2 × 60 ksi ×  21.5 in −  = 3125 k-in
 2  2 
φ M n = 260 k-ft ≥ 260 k-ft = M u
5-12
b) Start your design by assuming that ε t = 0.005
We need to re-derive an expression for ρ, using the same approach used in part (a).
ε cu 0.003
= c = d = × d 0.375d
ε cu + ε s 0.003 + 0.005
Cc =0.85 f 'c β1bc =0.85 f 'c β1b × 0.375d =0.319 × β1 f 'c bd
Cc = T
0.319 β1 f 'c bd = As f y
Thus we have an expression for the initial ρ value when ε t = 0.005 is assumed:
0.319 β1 f 'c 0.319 × 0.85 × 4,000 psi
= ρinitial = = 0.0181
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
ρ f y 0.0181 × 60,000 psi
= ω = = 0.271
f 'c 4,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
=R ω f 'c (1 − 0.59ω= ) 0.271 × 4 ksi × (1 − 0.59 × 0.271)
= 0.911 ksi
From Eq. (5-23):
Mu 3120 k-in
bd
= 2
= = 3805 in 3 Note that with ε t = 0.005, ϕ = 0.9
φ R 0.9 × 0.911 ksi
We are told to assume α = 0.5
1 1
 M  3  3120 k-in  3
d ≥ u  =   = 19.7 in ≅ 19.5 in
 αφ R   0.5 × 0.9 × 0.911 ksi 
h= d + 2.5 in = 22 in
b= α d =×0.5 19.5 in = 10 in
Note that both h and b are rounded to even inch values for constructability. Normally these values
would be rounded up, but since the estimate for d is so much nearer to 19.5 in than 21.5 in, it is
rounded down in this solution. Adequate strength of the section will still be achieved by selection
of an appropriate A s value.
Now, determine A s and select the reinforcing bars, assuming jd = 0.9d :

From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3120 k-in
As = ≅ =3.29 in 2
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 19.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.29 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 5.81 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 10 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3120 k-in
= As = = 3.48 in 2
 a  5.81 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi × 19.5 in -
 2  2 
5-13
Iterate once more to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.48 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 6.14 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 10 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3120 k-in
= As = = 3.52 in 2
 a   6.14 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi × 19.5 in -
 2  2 
No further iterations are necessary, since the solution has converged. Select 3#10 bars as bottom
As = 3 Ab = 3 × 1.27 in 2 =3.81 in 2 ≥ 3.52 in 2 OK
wide for 3 #10 bars to be placed in a single layer. NOT OK
So, either different bars must be selected, or the beam must be widened. Here we choose to widen
the beam so that b = 12 in.
required.
For f’ c = 4,000 psi, 3 f=
'c 190 ≤ 200 so use 200.
200 psi 200 psi
As ,min= bw=
d = 0.78 in 2 ≤ 3.81 in 2 OK
× 12 in × 19.5 in
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.81 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 5.60 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
a 5.60 in
=c = = 6.59 in
β1 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 19.5 in - 6.59 in
εt = ε cu = × 0.003 = 0.0059 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 6.59 in
From Eq. (5-15):
 a  5.60 in 
 2  2 
φ M n = 286 k-ft ≥ 260 k-ft = M u
5-14
Therefore, this design is sufficient. Since φ M n is 10% larger than M u , this design is perhaps
starting to be too conservative. Options for optimizing this design might be selecting different
bars, or slightly resizing the element. Notice that the design in part (a) was more efficient, so
different initial assumptions can lead to different designs.
c) Start your design by assuming that ε t = 0.004
We need to re-derive an expression for ρ, using the same approach used in part (a).
ε cu 0.003
= c =×d =× d 0.429d
ε cu + ε s 0.003 + 0.004
C=c 0.85 f 'c β1bc
= 0.85 f 'c β1b × 0.429=
d 0.365β1 f 'c bd
Cc = T
0.365β1 f 'c bd = As f y
Thus we have an expression for the initial ρ value when ε t = 0.004 is assumed:
0.365β1 f 'c 0.365 × 0.85 × 4,000 psi
= ρinitial = = 0.0207
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
ρ f y 0.0207 × 60,000 psi
=ω = = 0.310
f 'c 4,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
=R ω f 'c (1 − 0.59ω= ) 0.310 × 4 ksi × (1 − 0.59 × 0.310)
= 1.013 ksi
Before we can estimate the dimensions of the beam with Eq. (5-23), we need to determine φ . If
ε t = 0.004, we are in a transition zone between φ = 0.65 and 0.9 , which is defined by Eq. (4-28):
250 250
φ= 0.65 + ( ε t − 0.002 ) 0.65 + ( 0.004 − 0.002 )
= 0.82
=
3 3
From Eq. (5-23):
2 Mu 3120 k-in
bd
= = = 3805 in 3
φ R 0.82 × 1.013 ksi
We are told to assume α = 0.5. Also, since we had difficulty placing all the steel required in part
(b) due to insufficient beam width, and part (c) requires a higher reinforcement ratio to limit the
tensile strains, we will begin by assuming that two layers of reinforcement will be required.
1 1
 M  3  3120 k-in 3
d ≥ u  =   =19.6 in ≅ 20.5 in
 αφ R   0.5 × 0.82 × 1.013 ksi 
h= d + 3.5 in = 24 in
Note: Use 3.5 in instead of 2.5 in to account for the effect the second layer of steel has on
the location of the centroid of the tension reinforcement.
α d 0.5 20.5 in ≅ 10 in
b ==×
Note that both h and b are rounded to even inch values for constructability.
5-15
Now, Determine A s and select the reinforcing bars, assuming jd = 0.9d :
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3120 k-in
As = ≅ =3.44 in 2
 a  0.82 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 20.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.44 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 6.07 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 10 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3120 k-in
= As = = 3.63 in 2
 a  6.07 in 
φ f y  d −  0.82 × 60 ksi ×  20.5 in -
 2  2 
Iterate once more to have a better estimate of the lever arm jd .
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.63 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 6.41 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 10 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3120 k-in
= As = = 3.67 in 2
 a  6.41 in 
φ f y  d −  0.82 × 60 ksi ×  20.5 in -
 2  2 
No further iterations are necessary, since the solution has converged. Select 5#8 bars as bottom
As = 5 Ab = 5 × 0.79 in 2 =3.95 in 2 ≥ 3.67 in 2 OK
required.
For f’ c = 4,000 psi, 3 f=
'c 190 ≤ 200 so use 200.
200 psi 200 psi
As ,min= bw=
d = 0.68 in 2 ≤ 3.95 in 2 OK
× 10 in × 20.5 in
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.95 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 6.97 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 10 in
a 6.97 in
=c = = 8.2 in
β1 0.85
5-16
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 20.5 in - 8.2 in
εt = ε cu = × 0.003 = 0.0045 ≤ 0.005 OK
c 8.2 in
Since ε t = 0.0045, we are in a transition zone between φ = 0.65 and 0.9 , which is defined by
Eq. (4-28):
250 250
φ= 0.65 + ( ε t − 0.002 ) = 0.65 + ( 0.0045 − 0.002 ) 0.85
=
3 3
From Eq. (5-15):
 a  6.97 in 
 2  2 
φ ⋅ M=
n = Mu
285 k-ft ≥ 260 k-ft
Therefore, this design is sufficient. Again, since φ M n is 10% larger than M u , this design is perhaps
starting to be too conservative. Options for optimizing this design might be selecting different
bars, or slightly resizing the element. Notice that the design in part (a) was more efficient, so
different initial assumptions can lead to different designs.
5-17
d) Compare and discuss your three section designs.
12in. 10in.
12in.
24in. 22in. 24in.
3.5in.
2.5in. 3 #9 bars 2.5in. 3 #10 bars 5 #8 bars
Fig S5-6 Cross sections of section designs from parts (a), (b), and (c), respectively
Note that the area of reinforcement provided is higher in the third design compared to
either of the first two, even though the section size is similar. Remarkably, the design for part (c)
isn’t much more conservative than for part (a), and is less conservative than the design for part (b),
even though more steel is provided (due to the different φ value). Also, note that the design of the
beam in part (c) had, in essence, an additional variable to deal with since the φ -factor is a function
of the design choices made, rather than being held constant.
5-18
5-7 For column line 2, use the ACI Moment Coefficients given in ACI Code section 8.3.3
to determine the maximum positive and negative factored moments at the support
faces for columns A-2 and B-2, and at the midspans of an exterior span and the
interior span.
First, confirm that the ACI moment coefficients can be used.

a) Two or more spans OK
b) Longer span length within 20% of shorter OK
c) Loads are uniformly distributed OK
d) Unfactored LL load does not exceed 3 times DL OK
e) Members are prismatic OK
Now, estimate the dead load supported by column line 2:

Dead load from beam, per foot of beam:
12 in × 18 in lb lb
2
× 150 3 = 225
144 in ft ft
ft 2
Dead load from slab, per foot of beam:
 (12 ft + 11 ft ) 
6 in × 
 2  lb lb
× 150 3 = 863
12 in ft ft
ft
Superimposed dead load, per foot of beam:
12 ft + 11 ft lb lb
× 20 2 = 230
2 ft ft
Can the live load be reduced? From Eq. (5-3):
At column A-2 and midspan of exterior beam:
 15  2  15  2
Lr = L 0.25 + = 0.050 k/ft × 0.25 + = 0.041 k/ft
 K LL AT   2 × 11.5 ft × 30 ft 
At column B-2:
 15  2  15  2
Lr = L 0.25 + = 0.050 k/ft × 0.25 + = 0.034 k/ft
 K LL AT   2 × 11.5 ft × 55 ft 
At midspan of interior span:
 15  2  15  2
Lr = L 0.25 + = 0.050 k/ft × 0.25 + = 0.044 k/ft
 K A
LL T    2 × 11.5 ft × 25 ft 
Live load, per foot of beam:
12 ft + 11 ft lb lb
At column A-2 and midspan of exterior beam: × 41 2 = 472
2 ft ft
12 ft + 11 ft lb lb
At column B-2: × 34 2 = 391
2 ft ft
12 ft + 11 ft lb lb
At midspan of interior span: × 44 2 = 506
2 ft ft
5-19
So, using
= wu 1.2 DL + 1.6 LL , the factored loads are:
wu = 1.2 × ( 0.225 k/ft + 0.863 k/ft + 0.230 k/ft ) + 1.6 × ( 0.472 k/ft ) = 2.34 k/ft
At column B-2:
Calculate the clear span length,  n :

At column A-2: = n 30
= ft -16 in 28.67 ft
At midspan of exterior span: = n 30
= ft -16 in 28.67 ft
At column B-2 (exterior):
= n (=
30 ft + 25 ft ) -16 in
2
26.17 ft
At column B-2 (interior):

= n (=
30 ft + 25 ft ) -16 in
2
26.17 ft
At midspan of interior span: = n 25
= ft -16 in 23.67 ft
Design Moments using ACI Moment Coefficients from section 8.3.3:

2.34 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft )
2
w 2
At column A-2: Mu =
− u n = − −120 k-ft
=
16 16
wu  n 2 2.34 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft )
2
At midspan of exterior span: Mu =

= = 137 k-ft
14 14
2.21 k/ft × ( 26.17 ft )
2
wu  n 2
At column B-2 (exterior): Mu =
− =
− −151 k-ft
=
10 10
2.21 k/ft × ( 26.17 ft )
2
w 2
At column B-2 (interior): Mu =
− u n = − −138 k-ft
=
11 11
wu  n 2 2.39 k/ft × ( 23.67 ft )
2
At midspan of interior span: Mu =

= = 83.7 k-ft
16 16
5-20
5-8 Repeat problem 5-7, but use structural analysis software to determine the maximum
positive and negative moments described in problem 5-7. The assumed beam, slab
and column dimensions are given in the figure. You must use appropriate live load
patterns to maximize the various factored moments. Use a table to compare the
answers from Problems 5-7 and 5-8.
From Problem 5-7, the factored loads are:

At column A-2 and midspan of exterior beam: wu = 2.34 k/ft
At column B-2: wu = 2.21 k/ft
At midspan of interior span: wu = 2.39 k/ft
Properties of elements used for model:

Column:
Ag = 16 in × 16 in = 256 in 2
(16 in ) / 12
4
=Ig = 5, 460 in 4
Beam (Use properties of the web as an approximation of the cracked properties):
Ag =12 in × 24 in = 288 in 2
12 in × ( 24 in ) / 12 =
3
Ig = 13,800 in 4
We assume story heights of 12 ft above and below the continuous beam being modeled, and
include columns, fixed at their ends, in our model. Then we apply the appropriate load
combinations following Example 5-2, and the following design moments result:
Location ACI Design Moment Design Moment

(From Problem 5-7) (From software)
At column A-2: -120 k-ft -135 k-ft
At midspan of exterior span: 137 k-ft 93.0 k-ft
At column B-2 (exterior): -151 k-ft -157 k-ft
At column B-2 (interior): -138 k-ft -113 k-ft
At midspan of interior span: 83.7 k-ft 55.0 k-ft
5-21
5-9 Repeat problems 5-7 and 5-8 for column line 1.

Now, estimate the dead weight supported by column line 1:

Dead weight from beam, per foot of beam:
2
× 150 3 = 225
144 in 2 ft ft
ft
Dead weight from slab, per foot of beam:
6 in × 6.5 ft lb lb
× 150 3 = 488
12 in ft ft
ft
lb lb
6.5 ft × 20 2 = 130
ft ft
 15  2  15  2
Lr = L 0.25 + = 0.050 k/ft × 0.25 + = 0.052 k/ft
 K LL AT   2 × 6 ft × 30 ft 
since L r ≥ LL, no reduction is possible, so use LL = 0.050 k/ft2
At column B-1:
 15  2  15  2
Lr = L 0.25 + = 0.050 k/ft × 0.25 + = 0.042 k/ft
 K LL AT   2 × 6 ft × 55 ft 
 15  2  15  2
Lr = L 0.25 + = 0.050 k/ft × 0.25 + = 0.056 k/ft
 K LL AT   2 × 6 ft × 25 ft 
since L r ≥ LL, no reduction is possible, so use LL = 0.050 k/ft2

lb lb
At column A-1 and midspan of exterior beam: 6.5 ft × 50 2
325
=
ft ft
lb lb
At column B-1: 6.5 ft × 42 2 = 273
ft ft
lb lb
At midspan of interior span: 6.5 ft × 50 2 = 325
ft ft
5-22
So, using
At column B-1:

At column A-1: = n 30
= ft -16 in 28.67 ft
= ft -16 in 28.67 ft
At column B-1 (exterior):
= n (=
30 ft + 25 ft ) -16 in
2
26.17 ft
At column B-1 (interior):

= n (=
30 ft + 25 ft ) -16 in
2
26.17 ft
= ft -16 in 23.67 ft

1.53 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft )
2
w 2
At column A-1: Mu =− u n = − −78.6 k-ft
=
16 16
wu  n 2 1.53 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft )
2
At midspan of exterior span: = Mu = = 89.8 k-ft

14 14
1.45 k/ft × ( 26.17 ft )
2
wu  n 2
At column B-1 (exterior): Mu =− =
− −99.3 k-ft
=
10 10
1.45 k/ft × ( 26.17 ft )
2
w 2
At column B-1 (interior): Mu =− u n = − −90.3 k-ft
=
11 11
wu  n 2 1.53 k/ft × ( 23.67 ft )
2
At midspan of interior span: = Mu = = 53.6 k-ft

16 16
Now, assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following properties:
Column:
Ag = 16 in × 16 in = 256 in 2
(16 in ) / 12
4
=Ig = 5, 460 in 4
Ag =12 in × 24 in = 288 in 2
I cr ≅ 12 in × ( 24 in ) / 12 =
3
13,800 in 4
5-23

(From software)
At column A-1: -78.6 k-ft -88.8 k-ft
At midspan of exterior span: 89.8 k-ft 60.9 k-ft
At column B-1 (exterior): -99.3 k-ft -103 k-ft
At column B-1 (interior): -90.3 k-ft -74.7 k-ft
5-24
5-10 Repeat problems 5-7 and 5-8 for the beam m-n-o-p in Fig. P5-7. Be sure to comment
on the factored design moment at the face of the spandrel beam support at point m.

Now, estimate the dead weight supported by beam m-n-o-p:

2
× 150 3 = 225
144 in 2 ft ft
ft
6 in × 12 ft lb lb
× 150 3 = 900
12 in ft ft
ft
lb lb
12 ft × 20 2 = 240
ft ft
At m and midspan of exterior beam:
 15  2  15  2
Lr = L 0.25 + = 0.050 k/ft × 0.25 + = 0.040 k/ft
 K LL AT   2 × 12 ft × 30 ft 
At n:
 15  2  15  2
Lr = L 0.25 + = 0.050 k/ft × 0.25 + = 0.033 k/ft
 K LL AT   2 × 12 ft × 55 ft 
 15  2  15  2
Lr = L 0.25 + = 0.050 k/ft × 0.25 + = 0.043 k/ft
 K LL AT   2 × 12 ft × 25 ft 
lb lb
At m and midspan of exterior beam: 12 ft × 40 2 = 480
ft ft
lb lb
At n: 12 ft × 33 2 = 396
ft ft
lb lb
At midspan of interior span: 12 ft × 43 2 = 516
ft ft
5-25
So, using
At m and midspan of exterior beam:
At n:
At m: = n 30
= ft -12 in 29 ft
= ft -12 in 29 ft
At n (exterior): =n (=
30 ft + 25 ft ) -12 in
2
26.5 ft
At n (interior): =n (=
30 ft + 25 ft ) -12 in
2
26.5 ft
= ft -12 in 24 ft

2.41 k/ft × ( 29 ft )
2
w 2
At m: Mu = − u n = − = −84.5 k-ft
24 24
wu  n 2 2.41 k/ft × ( 29 ft )
2
At midspan of exterior span: = Mu = = 145 k-ft

14 14
2.27 k/ft × ( 26.5 ft )
2
wu  n 2
At n (exterior): Mu = − =
− = −159 k-ft
10 10
2.27 k/ft × ( 26.5 ft )
2
wu  n 2
At n (interior): Mu = − =
− = −145 k-ft
11 11
wu  n 2 2.46 k/ft × ( 24 ft )
2
At midspan of interior span: = Mu = = 88.6 k-ft

16 16
Now, assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following properties:
Ag =12 in × 24 in = 288 in 2
12 in × ( 24 in ) / 12 =
3
Ig = 13,800 in 4
Here we follow the recommendations from chapter 5 of the text, and assume that the beam is
pinned at m and supported by rollers (which are free to rotate) at n, o, and p. This neglects the
relatively small amount of moment transferred into the supporting beams due to their torsional
rigidity.
5-26
Now apply the appropriate load combinations following Example 5-2, and the following design
moments result:

(From software)
At m: -84.5 k-ft -14.6 k-ft
At midspan of exterior span: 145 k-ft 184 k-ft
At n (exterior): -159 k-ft -195 k-ft
At n (interior): -145 k-ft -200 k-ft
The software model assumes that there is no torsional rigidity supplied by the supporting beams.
Therefore, the moment that is predicted by the software at m is only due to the fact that the beam is
offset from the centerline of the supporting spandrel beam. While neglecting the torsional rigidity
of the spandrel beams is not realistic, it is also unlikely that the spandrel beam is torsionally rigid
enough to result in a moment as high as the ACI Design Moments.
5-27
5-11 Repeat problems 5-7 and 5-8 for the one-way slab strip shown in Fig. P5-7. For this
problem, find the factored design moments at all the points, a through i, indicated in
Fig. P5-7.

Now, estimate the dead load supported by slab strip a-i:

Dead load from slab, per foot of slab:
6 in × 12 in lb lb
2
× 150 3 = 75
144 in 2 ft ft
ft
Superimposed dead load, per foot of slab:
lb lb
1 ft × 20 2 = 20
ft ft
Live load, per foot of slab:
lb lb
1 ft × 50 2 = 50
ft ft
This live load cannot be reduced due to the very small influence area of the slab strip.
So, using
wu = 1.2 × ( 0.075 k/ft + 0.020 k/ft ) + 1.6 × ( 0.050 k/ft ) = 0.194 k/ft
Calculate the clear span lengths,  n :
=  n 12= ft -12 in 11 ft
=  n 11= ft -12 in 10 ft
Also, assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following cracked properties:
Beam:
Ag = 12 in × 6 in = 72 in 2
0.5 × 12 in × ( 6 in ) / 12 =
3
I cr =0.5 I g = 108 in 4
Here, we follow the recommendations from chapter 5 of the text, and assume that the slab strip is
pinned at a, and supported by rollers (which are free to rotate) at c, e, g, and i. Note that although i
is a point of geometrical symmetry, it cannot be modeled as fixed, since the pattern loads are not
necessarily symmetrical. Also note that pinning these supports neglects the relatively small
amount of moment transferred into the supporting beams due to their torsional rigidity.
Once the model is constructed, apply the appropriate load combinations following Example 5-2.
5-28
Design Moments using ACI Moment Coefficients from section 8.3.3, compared to design moments
resulting from software model:
Location ACI Moment ACI Design Moment Design Moment

Coefficient (From Software)
a -1/24 -0.978 k-ft 0.423 k-ft
b 1/14 1.68 k-ft 2.14 k-ft
c -1/11 -2.13 k-ft -2.86 k-ft
d 1/16 1.47 k-ft 1.29k-ft
e -1/11 -1.76 k-ft -1.99 k-ft
f 1/16 1.21 k-ft 1.29 k-ft
g -1/11 -1.76 k-ft -1.99 k-ft
h 1/16 1.21 k-ft 1.24 k-ft
i -1/11 -1.76 k-ft -1.94 k-ft
5-29
5-12 Use structural analysis software to find the maximum factored moments for the
girder on column line C. Find the maximum factored positive moments at o and y,
and the maximum factored negative moments at columns C-1, C-2, and C-3.
Estimate the loads supported by the beam along column line C:
Distributed dead load from beam, per foot of beam:

2
× 150 3 = 300
144 in 2 ft ft
ft
The remaining loads are transferred to the girder as a point load at mid-span. Loads transferring
from the adjacent interior span will transfer directly to the girder, whereas loads from the adjacent
exterior span must be amplified by 15% according to the ACI shear coefficient.
Dead load from beams and slab, applied at the mid-point of the girder between C-1 and C-2:
    
12 in × 18 in ×  25 ft − 6 in  + 6 in × 12 ft ×  25 ft − 6 in   × 150 lb = 13.5 k
 144 in 2  2 12 in  12 in  2 12 in   ft 3
 ft 2  ft  ft  ft  
 
12 in × 18 in  30 ft 6 in  6 in × 12 ft  30 ft 6 in   lb
1.15 ×  × − + × − ×150 3 = 18.8 k
 144 in 2
 2 12 in  12 in  2 12 in   ft
 ft 2  ft  ft  ft  
18.8 k + 13.5 k = 32.3 k
Dead load from beams and slab, applied at the mid-point of the girder at the interior spans:
    
12 in × 18 in ×  25 ft − 6 in  + 6 in × 11 ft ×  25 ft − 6 in   × 150 lb = 12.6 k
 144 in 2  2 12 in  12 in  2 12 in   ft 3
 ft 2  ft  ft  ft  
 
 12 in × 18 in  30 ft 6 in  6 in × 11 ft  30 ft 6 in   lb
1.15 × × − + × − × 150 3 =
17.5 k
 144 in 2
 2 12 in  12 in  2 12 in   ft
 ft 2  ft  ft  ft  
12.6 k + 17.5 k = 30.1 k
Superimposed dead load, applied at the mid-point of the girder at the exterior spans:
  25 ft   lb
12 ft ×  2   × 20 ft 2 = 3.0 k
  
  30 ft   lb
1.15 × 12 ft ×    × 20 3 = 4.14 k
  2  ft
3.00 k + 4.14 k = 7.14 k
Superimposed dead load, applied at the mid-point of the girder at the interior spans:
  25 ft   lb
11 ft ×  2   × 20 ft 2 = 2.75 k
  
  30 ft   lb
1.15 × 11 ft ×    × 20 3 =
3.80 k
  2  ft
2.75 k + 3.80 k = 6.55 k
5-30
Live load, applied as a point load:
For negative moment at C-1 and positive moment at o:
 15   15 
Lr = L × 0.25 + = 50 lb/ft 2 × 0.25 + =33 lb/ft 2
 AI   24 ft × 55 ft 
 25 ft   30 ft  
LL= o 33 lb/ft 2 ×   × 12 ft + 1.15 ×   × 12 ft=
 11.8 k
 2   2  
For negative moment at C-2:
 15   15 
Lr = L × 0.25 + = 50 lb/ft 2 × 0.25 + =27.4 lb/ft 2
 A 
I   46 ft × 55 ft 
 25 ft   30 ft  
=LLo 27.4 lb/ft 2 ×   × 12 ft + 1.15 ×   × 12= ft  9.78 k
 2   2  
 25 ft   30 ft  
=LLy 27.4 lb/ft 2 ×   × 11 ft + 1.15 ×   × 11=ft  8.97 k
 2   2  
For positive moment at y:
 15   15 
Lr = L × 0.25 + = 50 lb/ft 2 × 0.25 + =34 lb/ft 2
 AI   22 ft × 55 ft 
 25 ft   30 ft  
LL
= y 34 lb/ft 2 ×   × 11 ft + 1.15 ×   × 11 ft= 11.1 k
 2   2  
For negative moment at C-3:
 15   15 
Lr = L × 0.25 + = 50 lb/ft 2 × 0.25 + =27.7 lb/ft 2
 A 
I   44 ft × 55 ft 
 25 ft   30 ft  
LLy 27.7 lb/ft 2 × 
=  × 11 ft + 1.15 ×   × 11=
ft  9.06 k
 2   2  
Between C-1 and C-2: =  n 24= ft -16 in 22.67 ft
Between C-2 and C-3: =  n 22= ft -16 in 20.67 ft
Now assemble a model using structural analysis software. Use the following cracked properties:
Column:
Ag = 16 in × 16 in = 256 in 2
(16 in ) / 12
4
=Ig = 5, 460 in 4
Ag =12 in × 24 in = 288 in 2
I cr ≅ 12 in × ( 24 in ) / 12 =
3
13,800 in 4
5-31
Location Design Moment

(From Software)
Negative at C-1 -121 k-ft
Positive at o 236 k-ft
Negative at C-2 (o-side) -224 k-ft
Negative at C-2 (y-side) -198 k-ft
Positive at y 175 k-ft
Negative at C-3 -164 k-ft
5-32
5-13 Assume the maximum factored positive moment near midspan of the floor beam
between columns A-2 and B-2 is 60 k-ft. Using the beam dimensions given in
Fig. P5-7, determine the required area of tension reinforcement to satisfy all the ACI
Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement area. Select bars and
provide a sketch of your final section design.
as M u 60
The maximum expected positive moment is given = = k-ft 720 k-in
Determine the effective flange width:

By ACI code section 8.12:
= b f 30 ft= / 4 7.5
= ft 90 in
Check that:
 2 × 8 × 6 in + 12 in = 108 in

b f < 11 ft -12 in OK
 × 2 + 12 in = 132 in
2
Determine A s and select the reinforcing bars:
Assume jd = 0.95d :
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 720 k-in
As = ≅ =0.65 in 2
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.95 × 21.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 0.65 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 0.13 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 90 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 720 k-in
= As = = 0.62 in 2
 a  0.13 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi ×  21.5 in -
 2  2 
This seems like a very small area of required steel, so check minimum steel requirement before
selecting bars.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
For f’ c = 4,000 psi, 3 × f 'c = 189 ≤ 200 so use 200
3 f 'c 200
As=
,min bw d
= × 12 in × 21.5
= in 0.86 in 2
fy 60,000 psi
The minimum steel requirement will govern here. Select 3 #5 bars.
As =
3 Ab = 3 × 0.31 in 2 =0.93 in 2 ≥ 0.86 in 2 OK
Required Checks:
required. Since this requirement governed our bar selection, this is satisfied by default. OK
5-33
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 0.93 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 0.182 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 90 in
We know that β1 = 0.85 for f’ c = 4,000 psi
a 0.182 in
=c = = 0.214 in
β1 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 21.5 in - 0.214 in
εt = × ε cu = × 0.003= 0.297 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 0.214 in
From Eq. (5-15):
 a  0.182 in 
 2  2 
φ M n = 89.6 k-ft ≥ 60 k-ft= M u
Therefore, this design is sufficient. It seems too conservative, but that is because the minimum
area requirement governed bar selection.
90in.
24in.
2.5in. 3 #5 bars
Fig. S5-13 Cross-section of final design for positive bending region
Note that other selections A s may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied, without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
5-34
5-14 Assume the maximum factored negative moment at the face of column B-2 for the
floor beam along column line 2 is -120 k-ft. Using the beam and slab dimensions
given in Fig. P5-7, determine the required area of tension reinforcement to satisfy all
the ACI Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement area. Select
bars and provide a sketch of your final section design.
The maximum expected negative moment is given as M u =

−120 k-ft =
−1440 k-in
Although this is a T-section, there is no need to determine the effective flange width since the
compression zone is located in the web of the beam.

Assume jd = 0.9d :
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1440 k-in
As = ≅ =1.38 in 2
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 21.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 1.38 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 2.03 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1440 k-in
= As = = 1.30 in 2
 a  2.03 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi ×  21.5 in -
 2  2 
Select 3 #5 bars over the web, and 4 #3 bars in the flange. This will result in “part” of the
reinforcement (about 1/3) being spread into the flange, and most (2/3) remaining over the web.
As = 3 Ab1 + 4 Ab 2 = 3 × 0.31 in 2 + 4 × 0.11 in 2 = 1.37 in 2 ≥ 1.30 in 2 OK
Required Checks:
required.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
For f’ c = 4,000 psi, 3 f=
'c 190 ≤ 200 so use 200 psi
3 f 'c 200 psi
As ,min= bw=
d = 0.86 in 2 < 1.37 in 2 OK
× 12 in × 21.5 in
fy 60,000 psi
5-35
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 1.37 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 2.01 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
a 2.01 in
=c = = 2.36 in
β1 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 21.5 in - 2.36 in
εt = × ε cu = × 0.003= 0.024 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 2.36 in
From Eq. (5-15):
 a  2.01 in 
 2  2 
φ M n = 126 k-ft ≥ 120 k-ft = M u
Therefore, this design is sufficient.
90in.
3 #5 bars and 4 #3 bars
12in.
24in.
Fig. S5-14 Cross-section of final design for negative bending region
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate. Also note that all flange
reinforcement that is considered to contribute to the negative bending capacity of this section is
placed within two flange depths of the web.
5-36
5-15 Assume the maximum factored negative moment at support n of the floor beam
m-n-o-p is -150 k-ft. Using the design procedure for singly reinforced beam sections
given in Section 5-3 (design of beams when section dimensions are not known),
determine the beam dimensions and select the required area of tension reinforcement
to satisfy all the ACI Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement
area. Select bars and provide a sketch of your final section design.

−150 k-ft =
−1800 k-in
From Eq. (5-19):
β f ' 0.85 × 4,000 psi
ρ=≅ 1 c = 0.0142 Note: β 1 =0.85 for f’ c = 4,000 psi
4 fy 4 × 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
ρ f y 0.0142 × 60,000 psi
= ω = = 0.2125
f 'c 4,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
= R ω f 'c (1 − 0.59=
ω ) 0.2125 × 4 ksi × (1 − 0.59 × 0.2125)
= 0.743 ksi

From Eq. (5-23):
2 Mu 1800 k-in
bd
= = = 2690 in 3
φ R 0.9 × 0.743 ksi
1 1
 M  3  1800 k-in  3
d ≥ u  =   17.6 in ≅ 17.5 in
=
 αϕ R   0.5 × 0.9 × 0.734 ksi 
h= d + 2.5 in =
20 in
b= α d =×0.5 17.5 in = 8.75 in ≅ 10 in
Note that both h and b are rounded to the nearest even inch value for constructability.

Assume jd = 0.9d :
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1800 k-in
As = ≅ 2.12 in 2
=
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 17.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
5-37
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 2.12 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 3.74 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 10 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1800 k-in
= As = = 2.13 in 2
 a  3.74 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi × 17.5 in -
 2   2 
Since I am not satisfied that any of the possible bar combinations that fulfill this requirement are
not too conservative, I will choose to widen the beam slightly to help get a more efficient design.
Select b = 12 in.
Now re-determine A s and select the reinforcing bars:

Assume jd = 0.9d :
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1800 k-in
As = ≅ = 2.12 in 2
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 17.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 2.12 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 3.12 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 1800 k-in
= As = = 2.09 in 2
 a  3.12 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi × 17.5 in -
 2  2 
Required Checks:
required.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
For f’ c = 4,000 psi, 3 f=
'c 190 ≤ 200 so use 200
3 f 'c 200 psi
As ,min= bw=
d = 0.70 in 2 < 2.12 in 2 OK
× 12 in × 17.5 in
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 2.12 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 3.12 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
5-38
a 3.12 in
=c = = 3.67 in
β1 0.85
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 17.5 in - 3.67 in
εt = × ε cu = × 0.003= 0.011 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 3.67 in
From Eq. (5-15):
 a  3.12 in 
 2  2 
φ M n = 152 k-ft ≥ 150 k-ft = M u
90in.
6in.
12in. 20in.
12in.
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate. Also note that all flange
5-39
5-16 Assume the maximum factored negative moment at the face of column C-2 for the
girder along column line C is -250 k-ft. Using the design procedure given in
section 5-4 for the design of doubly reinforced sections, determine the beam
dimensions and select the required areas of tension and compression reinforcement to
satisfy all the ACI Code requirements for strength and minimum reinforcement area.
Select bars and provide a sketch of your final section design.

−250 k-ft =
−3000 k-in
Select ρ and the corresponding R-factor:

From Eq. (5-25):
0.36 β1 f 'c 0.36 × 0.85 × 4,000 psi
ρ ≅= = 0.0204 Note: β 1 =0.85 for f’ c = 4,000 psi
fy 60,000 psi
From Eq. (5-21):
ρ f y 0.0204 × 60,000 psi
= ω = = 0.306
f 'c 4,000 psi
From Eq. (5-22):
R ω f 'c (1 − 0.59ω=
= ) 0.306 × 4 ksi × (1 − 0.59 × 0.306)
= 1.0 ksi
Select section dimensions, b and h:

From Eq. (5-23):
2 Mu 3000 k-in
bd
= = = 3330 in 3
φ R 0.9 × 1.0 ksi
1 1
 M  3  3000 k-in  3
d ≥ u  =   17.2 in ≅ 17.5 in
=
 αϕ R   0.65 × 0.9 × 1.0 ksi 
h= d + 2.5 in = 20 in
b= αd = 0.65 × 17.5 in = 11.4 in ≅ 12 in
Note that both h and b are rounded to the nearest even inch value for constructability.

Assume jd = 0.9d :
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3000 k-in
As = ≅ 3.53 in 2
=
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 17.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
5-40
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 3.53 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 5.2 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 3000 k-in
= As = = 3.73 in 2
 a   5.2 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi × 17.5 in -
 2  2 
Also, select compression reinforcement such that the area of compression reinforcement (A’ s ) is
greater than one half of the tension steel. Here we select 3 #8 bars so that A’ s = 2.37 in2.
Required Checks:
required.
From ACI-08 Eq. (10-3):
For f’ c = 4,000 psi, 3 f=
'c 190 ≤ 200 so use 200
3 f 'c 200
As ,min= bw=
d = 0.70 in 2 < 3.80 in 2 OK
× 12 in × 17.5 in
fy 60,000 psi
First, an iterative procedure must be used to determine the depth of the neutral axis. Following the
procedure shown in Chapter 4, c = 4.2 in.
From Eq. (4-18):
d -c 17.5 in - 4.2 in
εt = × ε cu = × 0.003= 0.010 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 4.2 in
From Eq. (5-15):
As a result of the iterations used to determine c, the following forces were determined:
T = As f y =3.8 in 2 × 60 ksi =228 k
Cc = β1c0.85 f 'c bw = 0.85 × 4.2 in × 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in = 145 k
c−d'  4.2 in − 2.5 in  2
C '=
s  c  × 0.003Es =
As   × 0.003 × 29,000 ksi × 2.37 in= 83 k
   4.2 in 
5-41
So, the nominal moment capacity of the section is:
  a 
φ=
Mn φ Cc  d −  + C 's ( d − d ') 
  2 
  0.85 × 4.2 in  
φ M n = 0.9 × 145 kip × 17.5 in −  + 83 k × (17.5 in − 2.5 in ) 
  2  
φ M n = 3170 k-in = 264 k-ft ≥ 250 k-ft = M u
90in.
12in. 20in.
2.5in. 3 #8 bars
12in.
Note that other selections of b, h, and A s may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied, without
being unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate. Also note that all flange
5-42
5-17 For the one-was slab shown in Fig. P5-7, assume the maximum negative moment at
support c is -3.3 k-ft/ft, and the maximum factored positive moment at midspan point
b is 2.4 k-ft/ft.
(a) Using the given slab thickness of 6 in, determine the required reinforcement
size and spacing at both of these locations to satisfy ACI Code flexural
strength requirements. Be sure to check the ACI Code requirements for
minimum flexural reinforcement in slabs.
Negative Moment M u = −39.6 k-in :

−3.3 k-ft =
Assume 0.75 in of cover will be provided. This results in a d = 5 in.

From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 39.6 k-in
As ft ft 0.16 in 2
= ≅ =
ft  a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 5 in ) ft
φ fy  d − 
 2
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 0.16 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 0.24 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 39.6 k-in
As ft ft 2
= = = 0.15 in
ft  a  0.24 in  ft
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi ×  5 in - 
 2  2 
Minimum reinforcement:
As ,min 2
= 0.0018bh= 0.0018 × 12 in × 6 in= 0.13 in
ft ft
Strength requirements govern here.
Maximum reinforcement spacing is limited to 3h or 18 in, which is the same value for this 6 in deep
slab. Also, we must check reinforcement spacing for crack control. Since f y and c c are the same
here as in Example 5-7, the maximum spacing for crack control is 12 in. This governs.
If we select #3 bars at 8 in, the result is:

As 12 in 2 2
= 0.11 in 2 × = 0.165 in ≥ 0.15 in OK
ft 8 in ft ft
Check that strength is satisfied:

 a  0.24 in 
φ M n = φ As f y  d −  = 0.9 × 0.165 in 2 × 60 ksi ×  5 in −  = 43.5 k-in
 2  2 
φ M n = 3.62 k-ft ft ≥ 3.3 k-ft ft= M u OK
5-43
Remember to calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that
assuming φ = 0.9 is valid.
d -c 5 in - 0.24 / 0.85 in
εt = × ε cu = × 0.003= 0.050 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 0.24 / 0.85 in
Positive Moment
= M u 2.4
= k-ft 28.8 k-in :
Assume 0.75 in of cover will be provided. This results in a d = 5 in.

From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 28.8 k-in
As ft ft 0.12 in 2
= ≅ =
ft  a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 ⋅ 5 in ) ft
φ fy  d − 
 2
From Eq. (5-17):
As f y 0.12 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 0.17 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 4 ksi × 12 in
From Eq. (5-16):
Mu 28.8 k-in
As ft ft 2
= = = 0.11 in
ft  a  0.17 in  ft
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi ×  5 in - 
 2  2 
Minimum reinforcement:
As ,min 2
= 0.0018bh= 0.0018 × 12 in × 6 in= 0.13 in
ft ft
Minimum requirements govern here.
Maximum reinforcement spacing is limited to 3 ⋅ h or 18 in, which is the same value for this 6 in
deep slab. Also, we must check reinforcement spacing for crack control. Since f y and c c are the
same here as in Example 5-7, the maximum spacing for crack control is 12 in. This governs.
If we select #3 bars at 10 in, the result is:

As 12 in 2 2
= 0.11 in 2 × = 0.132 in ≥ 0.13 in OK
ft 10 in ft ft
Check that strength is satisfied:

 a  0.17 in 
φ M n = φ As f y  d −  = 0.9 × 0.132 in 2 × 60 ksi ×  5 in −  = 35.0 k-in
 2  2 
φ M n = 2.9 k-ft ft ≥ 2.4 k-ft ft = M u OK
5-44
Remember to calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that
assuming φ = 0.9 is valid.
d -c 5 in - 0.17 / 0.85 in
εt = × ε cu = × 0.003= 0.072 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 0.17 / 0.85 in
(b) At both locations, determine the required bar size and spacing to be provided
in the transverse direction to satisfy ACI Code section 7.12.2 requirements for
minimum shrinkage and temperature reinforcement.
Since the positive flexural region was controlled by temperature and shrinkage reinforcement, the
reinforcement specified there would suffice in the transverse direction at all locations.
So, use #3 bars at 10 in. Placement near the top or bottom of the slab makes no difference here, so
specify that bars are to be placed wherever is easiest.
(c) For both locations provide a sketch of the final design of the slab section.
#3@8in. #3@10in.
6in. 6in.
12in. 12in.
Fig. S5-17 Cross-section of final design for negative and positive bending regions, respectively
Note that other selections of A s may also be correct. If all checks are satisfied, without being
unreasonably conservative, the design may be considered adequate.
5-45
Chapter 6
6-1 For the beam shown in Fig P6-1:

(a) Draw a shear force diagram.
16.0
7.3
0.2
10
V, kips
-9.8
-17.7
(b) Show the direction of the principal tensile stresses at middepth at points A,
B, and C.
A B C
(c) On a drawing of the beam sketch the inclined cracks that would develop at
A, B, and C.
A B C
6-1
6-2, 6-3, 6-4 and 6-5 Compute φVn for the cross sections shown in Figs. P6-2, P6-3, P6-4
and P6-5. In each case use f c′ = 4000 psi and f yt = 40000 psi
6-2 φ=
Vn φ (Vc + Vs ) kips
= ′bw d 2 4000 ×15 × 22.5 /1000
Vc 2 f c= = 42.7 kips
Vs =Av f yt d / s =[ 0.22 × 40000 × 22.5 /10] /1000 =19.8 kips
φVn =0.75 × (42.7 + 19.8) =46.9 kips
6-3 Vc 2 4000 ×12 × 22.5 /1000

= = 34.2 kips ( assume a concrete cover of 2.5 in.)
Vs =[ 0.22 × 40000 × 22.5 / 6] /1000 =33.0 kips
φVn =0.75 × ( 34.2 + 33.0 ) =50.4 kips
Vc 2 4000 × 6 × 24 /1000
6-4 = = 18.2 kips
Vs =[ 0.22 × 40000 × 24 / 8] /1000 =26.4 kips
φVn =0.75 × (18.2 + 26.4 ) =33.5 kips
6-5 Vc 2 4000 × (5 + 5) × 20 /1000

= = 25.3 kips
Vs =[ 0.22 × 40000 × 20 / 6] /1000 =29.3 kips
φVn = 41.0 kips
6-6 ACI Sec. 12.13.1 states that “ Web reinforcement shall be as close to the
compression and tension surfaces of the member as cover requirements and
proximity of other reinforcement permits.” Explain why.
A beam resisting shear can be modeled as an analogous truss. The stirrups are the vertical
tension members in this truss. For the truss to transmit loads the stirrups must be
anchored to the compression chord and the tension chord.
6-7 ACI Sec. 11.4.5.1 sets the maximum spacing of vertical stirrups at d / 2 . Explain
why.
Every inclined crack must be crossed by at least one stirrup. The assumed horizontal
projection of the crack is d so every crack will be crossed by at least one stirrup.
6-8 Figure P6-8 shows a simply supported beam. The beam has No. 3 Grade 40 double-
leg stirrups with Av f yt = 8.8 kips and 4 No.8 Grade 60 longitudinal bars with
As f yt = 190 kips. The plastic truss model for the beam is shown in the figure.
Assuming that the stirrups are all loaded to Av f yt .
(a) Use the method of joints to compute the forces in each panel of the
compression and tension chords and plot them.
6-2
The force in member L11 − L13 is M U 12 / jd .
Assume all stirrups yield As f yt = 8.8 kips
Joint L11 : Vertical force in stirrup = 8.8 kips
∑V = 0 at Joint L11 gives vertical component in strut U12 − L11 as 8.8
kips downward (compression in U12 − L11 ).
12 in.
Horizontal component in U12 − L11= × 8.8 kips = 5.28 kips acting
20 in.
to the left on Joint L11 .
Joint U12 : Each inclined strut has a vertical component of 8.8 kips, therefore 6
struts are needed to equilibrate 52.8 kips force at Joint U12 as shown.
Joint U 8 : Total downward load is 26.4 kips applied load plus 8.8 kips in stirrup
U 8 − L8 , therefore 4 struts are needed to equilibrate 35.2 kips force at
U 8 as shown.
Forces in Inclined Struts in Web
Vertical Horizontal Horizontal

Member Component Projection Component
(kips) (in.) (kips)
U12 − L11 8.8 12 5.28
U12 − L10 8.8 24 10.56
U12 − L9 8.8 36 15.84
U11 − L8 8.8 36 15.84
U10 − L7 8.8 30 13.20
U 9 − L6 8.8 24 10.56
U 8 − L5 8.8 18 7.92
U 8 − L4 8.8 24 10.56
U 8 − L3 8.8 30 13.20
U 8 − L2 8.8 36 15.84
U 7 − L1 8.8 36 15.84
U 6 − L0 8.8 36 15.84
U 5 − L0 8.8 30 13.20
U 4 − L0 8.8 24 10.56
U 3 − L0 8.8 18 7.92
U 2 − L0 8.8 12 5.28
U1 − L0 8.8 6 2.64
6-3
Compute Forces in Lower Chord
Maximum moment = 52.8 × 8 − 26.4 × 4 =316.8 ft-kips

M 316.8 ×12
Force in L11 − L13 = = = 190.0 kips (in tension)
jd 20
∑ H at Joint L11 gives force in L10 − L11= 190.0 − 5.28= 184.7 kips
Force in Lower Chords
Horizontal Lower Chord

Member Joint Force in Strut Force
(kips) (kips)
L11 − L13 - - 190.0 tension
L10 − L11 L11 5.28 184.7
L9 − L10 L10 10.56 174.2
L8 − L9 L9 15.84 158.3
L7 − L8 L8 15.84 142.5
L6 − L7 L7 13.20 129.3
L5 − L6 L6 10.56 118.7
L4 − L5 L5 7.92 110.8
L3 − L4 L4 10.56 100.2
L2 − L3 L3 13.20 87.0
L1 − L2 L2 15.84 71.2
L0 − L1 L1 15.84 55.4
L0 15.84
+13.20
+10.56
+7.92
+5.28
+2.64
Total: 55.4
The force in L0 − L1 is 55.4 kips. This must be anchored in Joint L0 . The sum of the
horizontal forces in the struts at Joint L0 is 55.4 kips and ∑ H = 0 at Joint L .
0
6-4
Forces in Upper Chords:
Joint U1 : There is no force in the compression chord to the right of U1 .
Horizontal Force Lower Chord

Member Joint in Struts Force
(kips) (kips)
2.64
U1 − U 2 U1 2.64
compression
U 2 − U3 U2 5.28 7.92
U3 − U 4 U3 7.92 15.84
U 4 − U5 U4 10.56 26.4
U5 − U6 U5 13.20 39.8
U6 −U7 U6 15.84 55.4
U 7 − U8 U7 15.84 71.3
U8 − U9 U8 15.84
+13.20
+10.56
+7.92 118.8
U 9 − U10 U9 10.56 129.4
U10 − U11 U10 13.20 142.6
U11 − U12 U11 15.84 158.4
Compression at Midspan U12 15.84
+10.56
+5.28 190.0
6-5
Plot of Forces in Upper Chords:
Plot of Forces in Lower Chords:
6-6
(b) Plot As f s = M / jd on the diagram from part (a) and compare the bar
forces from the truss model to those computed from M / jd .
The bar forces in the lower chords provided by As f s = M / jd appear to be less

than the values provided by the truss model throughout the span except at the
midspan where the two values match.
(c) Compute the compression stress in the diagonal member L1 − L7 (see Eq. 6-
11). The beam width, bw , is 12 in.
θ 20 / 36
Slope of L1 − L7 : tan = θ 29.05°
= 0.556 ⇒ =
V  1  52800  1 
f cd
=  tan θ + =   0.556 + =  518 psi
bw jd  tan θ  12 × 20  0.556 
6-9 The beam shown in Fig. P6-9 supports the unfactored loads shown. The dead load
includes the weight of the beam.
(a) Draw shearing force diagram for
wDu = 1.2 ×1.4 = 1.68 k/ft

wLu = 1.6 ×1.5 = 2.4 k/ft
(1) factored dead and live load on the entire beam.
At the left support:

= Vu
(=
1.68 + 2.4 ) × 25
51.0 kips
2
Vu , kips
51.0
Case (1)
- 51.0
6-7
(2) factored dead load on the entire beam plus factored live load on the
left haft-span.
252 12.52
1.68 × + 2.4 ×
At the
= right support: Vu = 2 2 28.5 kips
25
At the right support: Vu = 1.68 × 25 + 2.4 × 12.5 − 28.5 = 43.5 kips
At the midspan: 43.5 − (1.68 + 2.4 ) × 12.5 =
Vu = −7.5 kips
Vu , kips
Case (2)
-28.5
-7.5
(3) factored dead load on the entire beam plus factored live load on the
right haft-span.
Due to the asymmetry of loadings Case (3) to loadings Case (2), the shear
diagram of Case (3) is asymmetric to that of Case (2).
Vu , kips
28.5
7.5
Case (3)
- 43.5
(b) Superimpose the diagram to get a shear force envelope. Compare the shear
at midspan to that from Eq. 6-26.
wLu  2.4 × 25
Eq. 6-26: Vu (midspan)
= = = 7.5 kips
8 8
Vu , kips
51.0
7.5
-7.5
- 51.0
6-8
(c) Design stirrups. Use f c′ = 4500 psi and No.3 double-leg stirrups with
f yt = 40000 psi.
Vu
, kips
φ
68.0
10.0
φ = 0.75
- 10.0
- 68.0
Are stirrups required?
V
Vc= 2 4500 ×12 ×17 /1000= 27.4 < u= 68.0 kips
φ
∴ Stirrups are required.
Check stirrups anchorage

Use No. 3 Grade 40 stirrups. ACI code Sec. 12.13.2.1. allows these to be anchored by a
hook around a top bar.
Maximum spacing
d/2 = 8.5 in.
Vu
< 6 f c′bw d =
82.1 kips ∴ Maximum spacing of d / 4 is not required.
φ
Av f y 0.22 × 40000
= = 14.6 in. (note 0.75
= f c′ 50.3 psi > 50 psi, use 50.3 psi )
0.75 f c′bw 50.3 ×12
∴ Maximum spacing smax = 8.5 in.
Compute spacing to resist shear forces

• At d from supports:
Vu
68 −
=
( 68 − 10 ) ×17 =
61.4 kips
φ (12.5 ×12 )
Av f yt d 0.22 × 40 ×17
s= = = 4.4 in. < smax= 8.5 in.
Vu / φ − Vc ( 61.4 − 27.4 )
∴ Use s = 4.0 in.
V 0.22 × 40 ×17
• =
Change this to 6 in. where u
=+ 27.4 52.3 kips.
φ 6
68 − 52.3
at x
This occurs = × (12.5 ×=
12 ) 40.6 in. from end.
68 − 10
6-9
V 0.22 × 40 ×17
• =
Change this to 8 in. where u
=+ 27.4 46.1 kips.
φ 8
68 − 46.1
at x
This occurs = × (12.5 ×=
12 ) 56.6 in. from end.
68 − 10
V Vc 27.4
• Terminate stirrups where =
u
= = 13.7 kips.
φ 2 2
68 − 13.7
x
This occurs at= × (12.5 ×12 ) = 140.4 in.
68 − 10
Compute the number of stirrups
From the center of the support, use 1 @ 2 in.

40.6 − 2
Required number of stirrups at the spacing of 4 in.: = 9.7 , use 10 @ 4 in.
4
56.6 − ( 2 + 10 × 4 )
Required number of stirrups at the spacing of 6 in.: = 2.4 , use 3 @ 6
6
in.
140.4 − ( 2 + 10 × 4 + 3 × 6 )
Required number of stirrups at the spacing of 8 in.: = 10.1 ,
8
use 11 @ 8 in.
∴ Provide No.3 U stirrups Grade 40 steel. Starting from the center of the support,
use 1 @ 2 in., 10 @ 4 in., 3 @ 6 in., 11 @ 8 in. from each end.
0.22 × 40 ×17
that Vs (max)
(Note = = 37.4 kips= < 8 f c′ bw d 109.5 kips , OK)
4
6-10
6-10 The beam shown in Fig. P6-10 supports the unfactored loads shown in the figure.
The dead load includes the weight of the beam.
(a) Draw shearing force diagrams for

(1) factored dead and live load on the entire length of beam.
(2) factored dead load on the entire beam plus factored live load
between B and C.
(3) factored dead load on the entire beam plus factored live load
between A and B and between C and D.
Loadings (2) and (3) will give the maximum positive and negative shears at B.
wDu = 2.4 k/ft
wLu = 2.4 k/ft
wu = 4.8 k/ft
V, kips
33.0
28.8
(a1) -5.4
-43.8
21.3
(a2)
2.1
14.4
-36.3
28.2
28.8
(a3)
-29.4
-10.2
6-11
(b) Draw the shear force envelope. The shear at B should be the dead load shear
plus or minus the shear from Eq. 6-26.
2.4 ×16
Eq. 6-26: Vu (midspan)
= = 4.8 kips
8
33.0
28.8
Envelope from Part (a)
2.1
-10.2
-43.8
33.0
Envelope from Eq. 6-26
28.8
4.8-2.7 = 2.1
-4.8-2.7 = -7.5
-43.8
Eq. 6-26 is correct for s simple beam without overhangs. It is an approximation for all
other cases. However, we shall assume it is close enough and use it for the rest of this
example.
(c) Design stirrups. Use f c′ = 3500 psi and f yt No.3 double-leg stirrups of
40000 psi.

Vu
Vc 2 3500 ×12 × 21.5 /1000
= = 30.5 kips <= 33.0 kips
φ
Check anchorage
Use No. 3 stirrups. These can be anchored by a hook around a top bar.
6-12
Maximum spacing
d/2 = 10.8 in.
Vu
< 6 f c′bw d =
φ
Av f y 0.22 × 40000
= = 14.7 in. (note 0.75 f c′ = 44.4 psi < 50 psi, use 50 psi )
50bw 50 ×12
Compute spacing to resist shear forces – Part AB

• At d from support A:
Vu
44 −
=
( 44 − 2.8) × 21.5 =
34.8 kips
φ (8 ×12 )
0.22 × 40 × 21.5
s= = 44 in. > smax= 10.8 in.
( 34.8 − 30.5)
∴ Use s = 10 in.
V Vc 30.5
u
= = 15.3 kips
φ 2 2
44 − 15.3
at x
This occurs= × ( 8=
×12 ) 69 in.
44 − 2.8
∴ Part A-B: Provide No.3 stirrups Grade 40 steel. Starting from A use 1 @ 5 in., 7
@ 10 in.
Compute spacing to resist shear forces – Part BC

• At d from support C
Vu
=58.4 −
( 58.4 − 10 ) × 21.5 =
47.6 kips
φ 8 ×12
0.22 × 40 × 21.5
s
= = 11.1 in. > smax= 10.8 in.
( 47.6 − 30.5)
∴ Use s = 10 in.
V Vc 30.5
u
= = 15.3 kips
φ 2 2
58.4 − 15.3
=
This occurs at x × ( 8 ×12 ) =86 in.
58.4 − 10
∴ Part BC: Provide No.3 stirrups Grade 40 steel. Starting from C use 1 @ 5 in., 9
@ 10 in.
6-13
Compute spacing to resist shear forces – Part CD
• At d from support C
Vu 38.4 × 21.5
= 38.4 − = 26.9 kips < Vc = 30.5 kips
φ 6 × 12
V V
∴ Can terminate stirrups where u < c . However, place minimum shear reinforcement
φ 2
throughout part CD.
∴ Part CD: Use No. 3 U stirrups, Grade 40. Starting from C use 1 @ 5 in., 7 @ 10
in.
6-11 Fig. P6-11 shows an interior span of a continuous beam. The shears at the ends are
± wu  n / 2 . The shear at midspan is from Eq. 6-26.
(a) Draw a shear force envelope.
wDu = 1.2 ×1.5 = 1.8 k/ft

wLu = 1.6 ×1.8 = 2.88 k/ft
wu = 4.68 k/ft
End shears = 4.68 × 22 / 2 =51.5 kips
Midspan shears = 2.88 × 22 / 8 =7.92 kips
Vu
, kips
φ
68.7
10.6
φ = 0.75
- 10.6
- 68.7
(b) Design stirrups using f c′ = 4000 psi and f yt = 40000 psi for the stirrups.

Vc 2 4000 ×12 ×17.5 /1000
= = 26.6 kips
Check anchorage
Use No. 3 stirrups. These can be anchored by a bend around a top bar.
Maximum spacing
d/2 = 8.8 in.
6-14
Vu
< 6 f c′bw d =
φ
Av f y 0.22 × 40000
= = 14.7 in. (note 0.75 f c′ = 47.4 psi < 50 psi, use 50 psi )
50bw 50 ×12
Computing spacing to resist shear forces
• At d from face of column:

Vu
68.7 −
=
( 68.7 − 10.6 ) ×17.5 =
61.0 kips
φ (11×12 )
0.22 × 40 ×17.5
=s = 4.5 in.
( 61.0 − 26.6 )
∴ Use s = 4 in.
V 0.22 × 40 ×17.5
• =
Changing stirrup spacing to 6 in. where u
= + 26.6 52.3 kips
φ 6
68.7 − 52.3
=
This occurs at x × (11
= × 12 ) 37.3 in.
68.7 − 10.6
V 0.22 × 40 ×17.5
• =
Changing stirrup spacing to 8 in. where u
= + 26.6 45.9 kips
φ 8
68.7 − 45.9
=
= × 12 ) 51.8 in.
68.7 − 10.6
V Vc 26.6
• Terminate stirrups when =
u
= = 13.3 kips
φ 2 2
68.7 − 13.3
=
= ×12 ) 126 in.
68.7 − 10.6
∴ Use No.3 Grade 40 U stirrups. Starting form face of column at each end, use 1 @
2 in., 9@ 4 in., 3 @ 6in., and 9 @ 8in.
6-15
6-12 Fig. P6-12 shows a rigid frame and the factored loads acting on the frame. The 7-kip
horizontal load can act from the left or the right. f c′ = 5000 psi, f yt = 40000 psi
(a) Design stirrups in the beam
34.9 Wind from right

27.2
Vu , kips
CL 3.85
-3.85
CL
Wind from left
-27.2
-34.9
44 .5
46
38 .1
.0
Vu
, kips CL
φ
5.1
d from face
of column -5.1
face of column

Assume d = 20 – 2.5 = 17.5 in.
Vu
Vc 2 5000 ×12 ×17.5
= = 29.7 kips <= 46.5 kips
φ
Maximum spacing
Use No. 3
d/2 = 8.8 in.
Vu
< 6 f c′bw d =
φ
Av f y
= 14.7 in. (note 0.75 f c′ = 53 psi < 50 psi, use 50 psi )
50bw
6-16
Compute spacing to resist shears

Vu
• At d from face of column = 38 kips
φ
0.22 × 40 ×17.5
s
= = 18.6 in. > smax= 8.8 in. in.
( 38 − 29.7 )
V Vc
• Terminate stirrups when =
u
= 14.9 kips
φ 2
44.1 − 14.9
at x
This occurs= × 113 84.6 in.
=
44.1 − 5.1
∴ Provide No. 3, Grade 40 U stirrups. Starting at face of column from each end, use
1 @ 4 in., 11@ 8 in.
(b) Are stirrups requitredd in the columns? If so, design the stirrups for the
columns.
Maximum shear is Vu = 8 kips in leeward column.

 Nu 
Vc 2 1 +
= f ′b d
 2000 A  c w
 g 
 ( 34.9 + 50 ) ×1000 
= 2 1 +  5000 ×12 ×11.5 (assume a concrete cover of 2.5 in.)
 2000 ×12 ×14 
= 24.4 kips

Vu 8 V
= = 10.7 kips < c = 12.2 kips
φ 0.75 2
∴ Stirrups are not required. Use minimum amount of shear reinforcement.
6-17
Chapter 7
7-1 A cantilever beam 8 ft long and 18 in wide supports its own dead load plus a
concentrated load located 6 in from the end of the beam and 4.5 in away from the
vertical axis of the beam. The concentrated load is 15 kips dead load and 20 kips live
load. Design reinforcement for flexure, shear, and torsion. Use f y = 60,000 psi for all
steel and f’ c = 3750 psi.
Design for moment:
Since wide sections are desirable for torsion, estimate that α = =0.8, so d 18
= in / 0.8 22.5 in .
Therefore, the dead load due to the weight of the beam is:
(22.5 in + 2.5 in) × 18 in
= DL = × 0.15 k/ft 3 0.469 k/ft
144 in 2 /ft 2
So, the moment demand due to factored loads is:
0.469 k/ft × ( 8 ft )
2
M u = 1.2 × + (1.2 × 15 k + 1.6 × 20 k ) × 7.5 ft = 393 k-ft = 4720 k-in

2
Select ρ and corresponding R-factor, assuming the desirable strain diagram shown in Fig. 5-27b,
which leads to φ = 0.9 .
β f ' 0.85 × 3,750 psi
ρ=≅ 1 c = 0.0133 Note: β 1 = 0.85 for f’ c = 3,750 psi
4 fy 4 × 60,000 psi
ρ fy 0.0133 × 60,000 psi
ω
= = = 0.213
f 'c 3,750 psi
=R ω f 'c (1 − 0.59ω=) 0.213 × 3.75 ksi × (1 − 0.59 × 0.213)
= 0.698 ksi
Now select h with b = 18 in:

2 Mu 4720 k-in
bd
= = ≅ 7500 in 3
φ R 0.9 × 0.698 ksi
Since the width of the beam is given as 18 in, we can directly solve for a reasonable d value.
Mu 4720 k-in
= d = = 20.4 in ≅ 21.5 in
φ bR 0.9 × 18 in × 0.698 ksi
h= d + 2.5 in =24 in
b = 18 in
Finally, determine A s required for resisting this applied moment by first going back and
recalculating the weight of the beam with the final selected dimensions:
bh k 18 in × 24 in k k
DL ≅ × 0.15 = × 0.15 = 0.45
144 in 2 /ft 2 ft 3 144 in 2 /ft 2 ft 3 ft
So
= M u 393 = k-ft 4720 k-in
Calculate the required area of steel, assuming jd = 0.9d :
Mu 4720 k-in
As =≅ = 4.52 in 2
 a  0.9 × 60 ksi × ( 0.9 × 21.5 in )
φ fy  d − 
 2
7-1
As f y 4.52 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 4.73 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 3.75 ksi × 18 in
Mu 4720 k-in
= As = = 4.57 in 2
 a  4.73 in 
φ f y  d −  0.9 × 60 ksi ×  21.5 in -
 2  2 
No further iterations are necessary, since the estimated lever arm was very reasonable. Use
b = 18 in, h = 24 in, and A s = 4.57 in2. Bars will be selected later.
Use ACI-08 Eq. (10-3) to check that the reinforcement provided is more than the minimum
required.
For f’ c = 3,750 psi, 3 f=
'c 184 ≤ 200 so use 200 psi
200 200 psi
As ,min= bw d= = 1.29 in 2 ≤ 4.57 in 2
× 18 in × 21.5 in OK
fy 60,000 psi
Also, calculate the strain in the extreme layer of tension steel to verify that assuming φ = 0.9 is
valid.
As f y 4.57 in 2 × 60 ksi
= a = = 4.78 in
0.85 f 'c b 0.85 × 3.75 ksi × 18 in
a 4.78 in
=c = = 5.62 in
β1 0.85
d -c 21.5 in - 5.62 in
εt = × ε cu = × 0.003= 0.0085 ≥ 0.005 OK
c 5.62 in
Now design for torsion and shear:

At d = 21.5 in away from the face, the factored torsion is:
4.5 in
Tu = (1.2 × 15 k + 1.6 × 20 k ) × = 18.8 k-ft
12 in/ft
At d = 21.5 in away from the face, the factored shear is:
21.5
Vu = 1.2 × 15 k + 1.2 × (8 ft − ft) × 0.45 k/ft + 1.6 × 20 k = 53.4 k
12
Should torsion be considered in this design?

Acp =18 in × 24 in = 432 in 2
P
=cp (18 in + 24 in) ×=
2 84 in
From Eq. (7-18b):
(
 432 in 2 ) 
2
 Acp 2 
Tth = φλ f 'c 
 Pcp  = 0.75 × 1.0 × 3,750 psi ×   ≅ 102,000 lb-in = 8.5 k-ft
 84 in 
   
7-2
Since Tu ≥ Tth , torsion must be considered. Also, since we are dealing with a statically determinate
system, we have a case of equilibrium torsion, in which the full factored torsion must be sustained
by our beam. Therefore, the design torsion cannot be reduced.
Check whether the section dimensions are sufficient to withstand the combined stresses due to
shear and torsion.
From Eq. (7-33):
2 2
 Vu   Tu Ph   V 
  + 2 
≤ φ  c + 8 f 'c 
 bw d   1.7 Aoh   bw d 
Assuming #4 stirrups,
Ph = 2 × ( 24 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 2 × 0.25 in + 18 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 2 × 0.25 in ) = 70 in
Aoh
= ( 24 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 2 × 0.25 in ) × (18 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 2 × 0.25 =
in ) 297 in 2
2
2    2 3,750 psi × 18 in × 21.5 in 
 53.4 k   18.8 k-ft ⋅ 70 in 
  + ≤ 0.75 ×  + 8 3,750 psi 
 
( 
)
2
 18 in × 21.5 in  2 18 in × 21.5 in
 1.7 × 297 in   
0.174 ksi ≤ 0.459 ksi
The section is sufficiently large.
Now determine the area of stirrups required to resist V u :

= Vc 2 f 'c b=wd 2 3,750 psi × 18 in × 21.5= in 47.4 k
Vu 53.4 k
Vs = − Vc = − 47.4 k = 23.8 k
φ 0.75
Av Vs 23.8 k in 2
= = = 0.018
s f yt d 60 ksi × 21.5 in in
Determine the additional area of stirrups required to resist T u :

Tu 18.8 k-ft
=Tn = = 25.1 k-ft
0.75 0.75
From Eq. (7-24), using Ao = 0.85 Aoh :

At Tn 25.1 k-ft × 12 in/ft in 2
= ≥ = 0.0099
s 2 Ao f yt cot θ 2 × 0.85 × 297 in 2 × 60 ksi × cot 45 in ( )
So, evaluate the total required area of stirrups:
in 2 in 2 in 2
For strength: 0.018 + 2 × 0.0099 =0.0378
in in in
50bw 50 × 18 in in 2
Minimum required: = = 0.015
f yt 60,000 psi in
The strength requirement governs here.
7-3
Now determine stirrup size and spacing:
 12 in

smax ≤  Ph / 8 = 70 / 8 = 8.75 in
d / 2 = 10.75 in (for shear)

2 × 0.11 in 2
If we select #3 stirrups, s ≤ =5.82 in
in 2
0.0378
in
2 × 0.20 in 2
in 2
0.0378
in
Although it is a tight spacing, select to use closed #3 stirrups at 5 in spacing.
Determine the need for longitudinal reinforcement resisting torsion:

 A   f yt  2  in 2 
For strength:
= Al  t  Ph  =
  cot θ  0.00990 × 1.0 × 1.0 0.693 in 2
 × 70 in =
 s   f yl   in 
5 f 'c Acp At f yt
Minimum required: =
Al ,min − Ph
f yl s f yl
At in 2 25bw in 2 in 2
Since = 0.022 ≥ = 0.0075 , we must use 0.022
s in f yt in in
5 3,750 psi × 432 in 2 in 2
=Al ,min − 0.022
= × 70 in × 1.0 0.66 in 2
60 ksi in
Use Al = 0.693 in 2
Longitudinal bars are required in the corner of each stirrup. Also, longitudinal bars must be spaced
no more than 12 in apart around the perimeter of the section, so a bar is needed in the middle of
each face. So 8 bars are required.
Area / bar 0.693

= = in 2 / 8 bars 0.0866 in 2 /bar
Select #3 bars along bottom and sides of the cantilevered section.
The reinforcement required along the top of the beam for resisting moment and torsion is:
= As 4.56 in 2 + 3 × 0.0866
= in 2 4.82 in 2
Select 5#8 bars along the top of the beam such that As = 5 × 1.0 in 2 =
5 Ab = 5 in 2 ≥ 4.82 in 2 .
7-4
7-2 Explain why the torsion in the edge beam A-B in Fig. 7-21c is called “equilibrium
torsion,” while the torsion in the edge beam A1-B1 in Fig. 7-30 is called “compatibility
torsion.”
If the edge beam A-B in Fig. 7-21c did not resist torsion, the canopy would rotate,
uninhibited, about the axis A-B and hang down from that axis since it cannot remain in the
horizontal position without the resistance to torsion provided by this beam. Essentially, the
torsional resistance of the beam A-B is required for equilibrium of the canopy element.
On the contrary, if beam A1-B1 in Fig. 7-30 did not resist torsion, the beam would rotate
only slightly before the floor’s weight and superimposed loads would be redistributed to other
elements, thereby satisfying equilibrium through the redundancy of the system. The torsion in A1-
B1 only arises from the need to maintain compatibility of deformations between the ends of the
joists and the twisting of the edge beam.
7-3 The two parts of this problem refer to the floor plan shown in Fig. P7-3. Assume that
the entire floor system is constructed with normal-weight concrete that has a
compressive strength, f’ c = 4,500 psi. Also, assume that the longitudinal steel has a
yield strength of f y = 60 ksi and that the transverse steel has a yield strength of
f yt = 40 ksi.
a) Design the spandrel beam between columns A1 and B1 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
strength, minimum reinforcement area, and reinforcement spacing are
satisfied.
Step 1: Determine M u , V u , and T u :

2
× 150 3 = 225
144 in ft ft
ft 2
If we assume that the slab dimensions given in the figure are measured center to center of the
beams, we need to account for half the width of the beam in addition the span length given when
calculating loads. Therefore the dead weight from slab, per foot of beam, is:
× 150 3 = 488
12 in ft ft
ft
lb lb
6.5 ft × 20 2 = 130
ft ft
To simplify the design, we will not reduce the live load. Therefore, the live load per foot of beam:
lb lb
6.5 ft × 50 2 = 325
ft ft
So, using
= wu 1.2 DL + 1.6 LL , the factored load is, per foot of beam:
= n 30
= ft -16 in 28.67 ft
7-5
With that, we can determine the design moments using ACI Moment Coefficients:
1.53 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft )
2
w 2
At column A-1: Mu = − u n = − −78.6 k-ft
=
16 16
wu  n 2 1.53 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft )
2
At midspan: = Mu = = 89.8 k-ft

14 14
1.53 k/ft × ( 26.17 ft )
2
w 2
At column B-1: Mu = − u n = − −105 k-ft
=
10 10
Note that  n is taken as the average of the adjoining clear spans for calculating the negative
moment at column B-1.
The design shear at d away from the supports is:

At midspan:
(1.6wL )  n (1.6 × 0.325 k/ft ) 28.67 ft
= Vu = = 1.86 k
8 8
At column A-1:
wu  n d  wu  n 
Vu =− − Vu , midspan 
2  n  2 
2
1.53 k/ft × 28.67 ft 21.5 in  1.53 k/ft × 28.67 ft 
= Vu − × = − 1.86k  19.4k
2 28.67 ft  2 
2
At column B-1:
w d  w 
Vu =1.15 × u n −  1.15 × u n − Vu , midspan 
2  n  2 
2
1.53 k/ft × 28.67 ft 21.5 in  1.53 k/ft × 28.67 ft 
Vu = 1.15 × − × 1.15 × − 1.86k 
2 28.67 ft  2 
2
Vu = 22.3k
Note that  n is taken as the clear span length of the exterior span when calculating the shear
acting on the exterior face of the first interior support. Do not reduce this value to the  n
used for calculating the negative moment at column B-1.
To calculate the design torsion, we first have to determine the moment and shear that the slab is
applying to the edge of the beam.
wu = 1.2 × ( 0.075 k/ft + 0.020 k/ft ) + 1.6 × ( 0.050 k/ft ) = 0.194 k/ft
= n 12
= ft -12 in 11 ft
0.194 k/ft × (11 ft )
2
w 2
Mu = − u n = − =−0.978 k-ft
24 24
wu  n 0.194 k/ft × 11 ft
Vu = = − =1.07 k
2 2
Therefore, the torsion applied to our beam by the slab is:
6 in
=t 0.978 k-ft + 1.07 k × = 1.51 k-ft/ft
12 in/ft
7-6
And thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
t (  n − 2d ) 1.51 k-ft/ft × ( 28.67 ft − 2 × 21.5 in )
= Tu = = 18.9 k-ft
2 2
Step 2: Determining the area of longitudinal steel required for flexure.

Mu 78.6 k-ft × 12 in/ft
At column A-1: = R = = 189 psi
φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
Refer to Table A-3, but note that there are no R-Factors listed which are lower than
roughly R = 190 psi, since R = 190 psi roughly corresponds to the minimum reinforcement
ratio. Therefore, A s,min = 0.87 in2 controls at column A-1.
Mu 89.8 k-ft × 12 in/ft
At midspan: = R = = 216 psi
φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
Refer to Table A-3. For f’ c = 4,500 psi, and R = 216 psi, ρ = 0.0037 . So, at
midspan, As = ρ bd = 0.0037 × 12 in × 21.5 in = 0.95 in 2 .
Mu 105 k-ft × 12 in/ft
At column B-1: = R = = 252 psi
φ bd 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )
2 2
column B-1, As = ρ bd = 0.0044 × 12 in × 21.5 in =1.14 in 2 .
Step 3: Determine whether torsion must be considered in the design of this beam. Begin by
determining the dimensions of the beam section active in torsion, and calculate the threshold
torsion.
height of beam below slab = 18 in
f ≤ , where  f is the length of flange active in torsion.
 4h f = 24 in
Therefore,
Acp = 24 in × 12 in + 6 in × 18 in = 396 in 2
Pcp = 24 in + 12 in + 18 in + 18 in + 6 in + 30 in = 108 in
(
 396 in 2 ) 
2
 Acp 2 
Tth = φλ f 'c   = 0.75 × 1.0 × 4,500 psi ×   ≅ 73,000 lb-in = 6.09 k-ft
 Pcp  108 in 
   
Since Tu ≥ Tth , torsion must be considered in this design.
Step 4: Since the torsion resisted by this edge beam is not required to maintain equilibrium of the
structure, we have a case of compatibility torsion. Therefore we can likely reduce our T u to the
following:
 Acp 2 
Tu ,comp= φ 4λ f 'c  = 0.75 × 4 × 1.0 × 4,500 psi 
(
 396 in 2 2 )
 292,000 lb-in= 24.4 k-ft
=
 Pcp   108 in 
   
Unfortunately, since Tu ≤ Tu ,comp , we cannot reduce our design torsion. Since our design torsion is
not being reduced, no redistribution of design moments is required in the adjoining slab.
7-7
Step 5: Determine whether the section is large enough to resist the combined actions of shear and
torsion. First assume that a closed #4 stirrup will be used in the web of this beam.
Aoh ( 24 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 in ) × (12 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 =
= in ) 174 in 2
Ph = 2 × ( 24 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 in + 12 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 in ) = 58 in
From Eq. (7-33):
2 2
 Vu   Tu Ph   V 
  + 2 
≤ φ  c + 8 f 'c 
 bw d   1.7 Aoh   bw d 
2
2    2 4,500 psi × 12 in × 21.5 in 
 22.1 k   18.9 k-ft × 58 in 
  + ≤ 0.75 ×  + 8 4,500 psi 
 
( 
)
2
 12 in × 21.5 in  2 12 in × 21.5 in
 1.7 × 174 in   
0.270 ksi ≤ 0.503 ksi
Step 6: Determine the area of stirrups required to resist V u :

=Vc 2 f 'c b=wd 2 4,500 psi × 12 in × 21.5= in 34.6 k
Vu 22.1 k
Vs = − Vc = − 34.6 k < 0 k
φ 0.75
Step 7: Determine the area of stirrups required to resist T u :

T 18.9 k-ft
Tn ≥ u= = 25.2 k-ft
0.75 0.75
= ≥ = 0.0256
s 2 Ao f yt cot θ 2 × 0.85 × 174 in × 40 ksi × cot 45
2 
( )
in
Step 8: Evaluate the total required area of stirrups, and select spacing:
in 2 in 2
For strength: 2 × 0.0256 0.0512
=
in in
0.75 4500 × bw 50.31 psi × 12 in in 2
f yt 40,000 psi in

 12 in

smax ≤  Ph / 8 = 58 in / 8 = 7.25 in
d / 2 = 10.75 in (for shear)

2 × 0.11 in 2
in 2
0.0512
in
2 × 0.2 in 2
If we select #4 stirrups, s ≤ 7.8 in
=
in 2
0.0512
in
7-8
Select closed #4 stirrups at 7 in spacing at the ends of the beam. It is also possible that stirrups are
not required along the full length of this beam. For torsion, determine where Tu ≤ Tth / φ . By
similar triangles, this occurs at 107.5 in away from the face of the column. However, torsional
reinforcement must be continued for (d += bt ) (21.5 in + 12 =
in) 33.5 in past this theoretical point.
Therefore, no torsional reinforcement is required beyond 141in away from the face of the column.
Since Vu ≤ φVc / 2 at this point, no shear reinforcement is required beyond this point either.
Final design of transverse reinforcement:

Using closed #4 stirrups,
One stirrup at 3.5 in from either column face, followed by 20 stirrups spaced at 7 in.
Step 9: Finalize the design of the longitudinal reinforcement:

 A   f yt  2  in 2  2
For strength:
= Al  t  Ph  =
  cot θ  0.0256 × × 1.0 0.990 in 2
 × 58 in=
 s   f yl   in  3
5 f 'c Acp At f yt
Minimum required: =
Al ,min − Ph
f yl s f yl
A  in 2 25bw in 2 in 2
Since  t  = 0 ≤ = 0.0075 , we must use 0.0075
 s ,min in f yt in in
5 4,500 psi × 396 in 2 in 2 2
=Al ,min − 0.0075
= × 58 in × 1.92 in 2
60 ksi in 3
Use Al = 1.92 in 2
each vertical face. So 6 bars are required.
Area / bar 1.92

= = in 2 / 6 bars 0.32 in 2 / bar
-At column A-1, use #6 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam.
(
As top reinforcement, As / bar ≥ 0.87 in 2 + 2 × 0.32= )
in 2 / 3 1.51=
in 2 / 3 0.50 in 2 , so specify 3 #7
bars along the top of the section.
-At midspan, use #6 bars in the top corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam. As
(
bottom reinforcement, As / bar ≥ 0.95 in 2 + 2 × 0.32= )
in 2 / 3 1.59=in 2 / 3 0.53 in 2 , so specify 3
#7 bars along the bottom of the section.
-At column B-1, use #6 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam.
(
in 2 / 3 1.78=
in 2 / 3 0.59 in 2 , so specify 3 #7
7-9
b) Design the spandrel beam between columns A1 and A2 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check that all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
satisfied.

Dead weight from spandrel beam, per foot of beam:
12 in × 24 in lb
× 150 lb 3 = 300
144 in 2
ft ft
ft 2
Superimposed dead load, per foot of spandrel beam:
1 ft × 20 lb 2 = 20 lb/ft
ft
1 ft × 50 lb 2 = 50 lb/ft
ft
Dead weight from joist, applied as a point load at midspan:
12 in × 18 in
× 150 lb 3 × 14.5 ft = 3.26 k
144 in 2
2
ft
ft
Dead weight from slab, applied as a point load at midspan:
6 in × 12 ft
× 150 lb 3 × 14.5 ft = 13.1 k
12 in ft
ft
Superimposed dead load, applied as a point load at midspan:
12 ft × 14.5 ft × 20 lb 2 = 3.48 k
ft
Since the live load is not reduced, the live load per foot of beam is:
12 ft × 14.5 ft × 50 lb 2 = 8.7 k
ft
So, using
= wu 1.2 DL + 1.6 LL , the factored load is:
wu = 1.2 × ( 0.300 k/ft + 0.02 k/ft ) + 1.6 × ( 0.05 k/ft ) = 0.464 k/ft , per foot of beam
wu , po int = 1.2 × ( 3.26 k + 13.1 k + 3.48 k ) + 1.6 × ( 8.7 k ) = 37.7 k , applied as a point load
= n 24
= ft -16 in 22.67 ft
With that, we can determine the design moments, but structural analysis software must be used
since the ACI Moment Coefficients cannot be applied when not all loads are distributed. Input the
structural model and applied loads using the appropriate pattern loading for the live loads.
At column A-1: M u = −102 k-ft
At midspan: M u = 128 k-ft
At column A-2: M u = −139 k-ft

At column A-1:
wu (  n − 2d ) wu , po int 0.464 k/ft × ( 22.67 ft − 2 × 21.5 in ) 37.7 k
=Vu + = + = 23.3 k
2 2 2 2
At midspan: Vu = 0 k
At column A-2: Vu =1.15 × Vu , A−1 =26.8 k
7-10
To calculate the design torsion, we first have to determine the moment and shear that the joist is
applying to the edge of the spandrel beam.
= n 30
= ft -12 in 29 ft
2.6 k/ft × ( 29 ft )
2
w 2
Mu =− u n = − −91.1 k-ft
=
24 24
=Vu w=
u , po int 37.7 k
Thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
6 in 6 in
Tu = M u + Vu × 91.1 k-ft + 37.7 k ×
= 110 k-ft
=
12 in/ft 12 in/ft

φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
column A-1, As = ρ bd = 0.0042 × 12 in × 21.5 in =1.08 in 2 .
φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
midspan, As = ρ bd = 0.0054 × 12 in × 21.5 in =1.39 in 2 .
φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
torsion.
 4h f = 24 in
Therefore,
Acp = 24 in × 12 in + 6 in × 18 in = 396 in 2
(
 396 in 2 ) 
2
 Acp 2 
Tth = φλ f 'c 
 Pcp  = 0.75 × 1.0 × 4,500 psi ×   = 73,000 lb-in = 6.09 k-ft
 108 in 
   
7-11
following:
 Acp 2 
Tu ,comp= φ 4λ f 'c  = 0.75 × 4 × 1.0 × 4,500 psi 
( )
 396 in 2 2 
 292,000 lb-in= 24.4 k-ft
=
 Pcp   108 in 
   
Since Tu ≥ Tu ,comp , we can reduce our design torsion to 24.4 k-ft. Since our design torsion for the
spandrel beam is being reduced, it is necessary to redistribute the design moments for the joist that
frames into the spandrel beam. See chapter 7 for further discussion of why this is required.
Aoh ( 24 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 in ) × (12 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 =
= in ) 174 in 2
From Eq. (7-33):
2 2
 Vu   Tu Ph   V 
  + 2 
≤ φ  c + 8 f 'c 
b d
 w   1.7 Aoh  b
 w d 
2
2    2 4,500 psi × 12 in × 21.5 in 
 25.6 k   24.4 k-ft × 58 in 
   + ≤ 0.75 ×  + 8 4,500 psi 
 
( )
2
 12 in × 21.5 in  2 12 in × 21.5 in
 1.7 × 174 in   
0.344 ksi ≤ 0.503 ksi

At column A-1: Vs = 0 k
V 25.6 k
At column A-2: Vs = u − Vc = − 34.6 k < 0 k
φ 0.75

Tu 24.4 k-ft
Tn ≥ = = 32.5 k-ft
0.75 0.75
= ≥ = 0.0330
2 
( )
in
in 2 in 2
For strength: 2 × 0.0330 =0.066
in in
0.75 f c' × bw 50.3 psi × 12 in in 2
f yt 40,000 psi in
7-12
 12 in

smax ≤  Ph / 8 = 58 in / 8 = 7.25 in
d / 2 = 10.75 in (for shear)

2 × 0.2 in 2
in 2
0.066
in
2 × 0.31 in 2
in 2
0.066
in
Select closed #4 stirrups at 6.0 in spacing at the ends of the beam. While in some cases it is
possible that stirrups are not required along the full length of the beam, the torsion in this case is
constant along the length of the beam, as is the shear. Therefore, closed #4 stirrups are required
along the full length of the beam.

 A   f yt  2  in 2  2
For strength:
= Al  t  Ph  =  cot θ  0.0330 × × 1.0 1.28 in 2
 × 58 in=
 s   f yl   in  3
5 f 'c Acp At f yt
Minimum required: =
Al ,min − Ph
f yl s f yl
A  in 25bw
2
in 2 in 2
Since  t = 0.0330 in ≥ f= 0.0075 in , we must use 0.0330 in
 s ,min yt
5 4,500 psi × 396 in 2 in 2 2

=Al ,min − 0.0330
= × 58 in × 0.94 in 2
60 ksi in 3
Use Al = 1.28 in 2
Area / bar 1.28

= = in 2 / 6 bars 0.21 in 2 / bar
(
in 2 / 3 1.50=
in 2 / 3 0.50 in 2 , so specify 3 #7
(
in 2 / 3 1.81=
in 2 / 3 0.60 in 2 , so specify 3 #8
bars along the bottom of the section.
(
in 2 / 3 1.92=
in 2 / 3 0.64 in 2 , so specify 3 #8
7-13
7-4 The two parts of this problem refer to the floor plan shown in Fig. P7-3. Assume that
the entire floor system is constructed with sand light-weight concrete that has a
compressive strength, f’ c = 4,000 psi. Also assume that the longitudinal steel has a
yield strength of f y = 60 ksi and that the transverse steel has a yield strength of
f yt = 60 ksi.
a) Design the spandrel beam between columns A1 and B1 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
satisfied.
Note that this problem is very similar to the previous problem. One noticeable change is the use of
lightweight concrete, which will affect the dead weight used in the calculation of the design loads.
Although no guidance is given on the density of the sand-lightweight concrete used in this
problem, any reasonable assumption would be acceptable. Here a density of 120 lb/ft 3 is assumed.

2
× 120 3 = 180
144 in ft ft
ft 2
× 120 3 = 390
12 in ft ft
ft
lb lb
6.5 ft × 20 2 = 130
ft ft
lb lb
6.5 ft × 50 2 = 325
ft ft
So, using
= wu 1.2 DL + 1.6 LL , the factored load is, per foot of beam:
= n 30
= ft -16 in 28.67 ft
With that, we can determine the design moments using ACI Moment Coefficients:
1.36 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft )
2
w 2
At column A-1: Mu =
− u n = − −69.9 k-ft
=
16 16
wu  n 2 1.36 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft )
2
At midspan: Mu =
= = 79.8 k-ft
14 14
1.36 k/ft × ( 26.17 ft )
2
w 2
At column B-1: Mu =
− u n = − −93.1 k-ft
=
10 10
7-14
wu (  n − 2d ) 1.36 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft − 2 × 21.5 in )
At column A-1:= Vu = = 17.1 k
2 2
At midspan:
(1.6wL )  n (1.6 × 0.325 k/ft ) 28.67 ft
= Vu = = 1.86 k
8 8
w (  − 2d )
At column B-1: Vu = 1.15 u n
2
1.36 k/ft × ( 28.67 ft − 2 × 21.5 in )
= Vu 1.15
= 19.6 k
2
To calculate the design torsion, we first have to determine the moment and shear that the slab is
wu = 1.2 × ( 0.060 k/ft + 0.020 k/ft ) + 1.6 × ( 0.050 k/ft ) = 0.176 k/ft
= n 12
= ft -12 in 11 ft
0.176 k/ft × (11 ft )
2
w 2
Mu = − u n = − =−0.887 k-ft
24 24
wu  n 0.176 k/ft × 11 ft
Vu = = − =0.968 k
2 2
Therefore, the torsion applied to our beam by the slab is:
6 in
t= 0.887 k-ft + 0.968 k × = 1.37 k-ft/ft
12 in/ft
And thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
t (  n − 2d ) 1.37 k-ft/ft × ( 28.67 ft − 2 × 21.5 in )
= Tu = = 17.2 k-ft
2 2

Mu 69.9 k-ft × 12 in/ft
φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
Refer to Table A-3, but note that there are no R-Factors listed which are lower than
roughly R = 190 psi, since R = 190 psi roughly corresponds to the minimum reinforcement
ratio. Therefore, A s,min = 0.86 in2 controls at column A-1.
Mu 79.8 k-ft × 12 in/ft
φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
midspan, As = ρ bd = 0.0033 × 12 in × 21.5 in = 0.86 in 2 .
Mu 93.1 k-ft × 12 in/ft
At column B-1: = R = = 224 psi
φ bd 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )
2 2
column B-1, As = ρ bd = 0.0039 × 12 in × 21.5 in =1.01 in 2 .
7-15
torsion.
height of beam below slab = 18 in
 4h f = 24 in
Therefore,
Acp = 24 in × 12 in + 6 in × 18 in = 396 in 2
(
 396 in 2 ) 
2
 Acp 2 
Tth = φλ f 'c 
 Pcp  = 0.75 × 0.85 × 4,000 psi ×   = 58,500 lb-in = 4.88 k-ft
 108 in 
   
following:
 Acp 2 
Tu ,comp= φ 4λ f 'c  = 0.75 × 4 × 0.85 × 4,000 psi 
(
 396 in 2 2  )
 234,000 lb-in= 19.5 k-ft
=
 Pcp   108 in 
   
Unfortunately, since Tu ≤ Tu ,comp , we cannot reduce our design torsion. Since our design torsion is
not being reduced, no redistribution of design moments is required in the adjoining slab.
Aoh ( 24 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 in ) × (12 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 =
= in ) 174 in 2
From Eq. (7-33):
2 2
 Vu   Tu Ph   V 
  + 2 
≤ φ  c + 8 f 'c 
b d
 w   1.7 Aoh  b
 w d 
2
2    2 4,000 psi × 12 in × 21.5 in 
 19.6 k   17.2 k-ft × 58 in 
   + ≤ 0.75 ×  + 8 4,000 psi 
 
( 
)
2
 12 in × 21.5 in  2 12 in × 21.5 in
 1.7 × 174 in   
0.245 ksi ≤ 0.474 ksi

Vu 19.6 k
Vs = − Vc = − 32.6 k = 0 k
φ 0.75
7-16
T 17.2 k-ft
Tn ≥ u= = 22.9 k-ft
0.75 0.75
= ≥ = 0.0155
2 
( )
in
in 2 in 2
For strength: 2 × 0.0155 = 0.0310
in in
50bw 50 × 12 in in 2
f yt 60,000 psi in
 12 in

smax ≤  Ph / 8 = 58 in / 8 = 7.25 in
d / 2 = 10.75 in (for shear)

2 × 0.11 in 2
in 2
0.0310
in
2 × 0.2 in 2
=
in 2
0.0310
in
Select closed #3 stirrups at 7 in spacing at the ends of the beam. It is also possible that stirrups are
not required along the full length of this beam. For torsion, determine where Tu ≤ Tth / φ . By
similar triangles, this occurs at 129 in away from the face of the column. However, torsional
reinforcement must be continued for (d += bt ) (21.5 in + 12 =
in) 33.5 in past this theoretical point.
Therefore, no torsional reinforcement is required beyond 163in away from the face of the column.
Since Vu ≤ φVc / 2 at this point, no shear reinforcement is required beyond this point either.
Final design of transverse reinforcement:

Using closed #3 stirrups,
One stirrup at 3.5 in from either column face, followed by 23 stirrups spaced at 7 in.
7-17
 A   f yt  2  in 2 
For strength:
= Al  t  Ph  =
  cot θ  0.0155

1.0 × 1.0 0.899 in 2
 × 58 in ×=
 s   f yl   in 
5 f 'c × Acp At f yt
Minimum required:=Al ,min − Ph
f yl s f yl
A  in 2 25bw in 2 in 2
Since  t  = 0 ≤ = 0.0050 , we must use 0.0050
5 4,000 psi × 396 in 2 in 2
=Al ,min − 0.0050
= × 58 in × 1.0 1.80 in 2
60 ksi in
Use Al = 1.80 in 2
Area / bar 1.80

= = in 2 / 6 bars 0.30 in 2 / bar
(
in 2 / 3 1.46=
in 2 / 3 0.49 in 2 , so specify 3 #7
(
in 2 / 3 1.46=in 2 / 3 0.49 in 2 , so specify 3
#7 bars along the bottom of the section.
-At column B-1, use #5 bars in the bottom corners and halfway up the vertical face of the beam.
(
in 2 / 3 1.61=
in 2 / 3 0.54 in 2 , so specify 3 #7
7-18
b) Design the spandrel beam between columns A1 and A2 for bending, shear,
and torsion. Check that all of the appropriate ACI Code requirements for
satisfied.

Again, assume the density of the concrete is 120 lb/ft 3 .
2
× 120 3 = 240
144 in ft ft
ft 2
Superimposed dead load, per foot of spandrel beam:
1 ft × 20 lb 2 = 20 lb/ft
ft
1 ft × 50 lb 2 = 50 lb/ft
ft
Dead weight from joist, applied as a point load at midspan:
12 in × 18 in lb
2
× 120 3 × 14.5 ft = 2.61 k
144 in 2 ft
ft
Dead weight from slab, applied as a point load at midspan:
6 in × 12 ft lb
× 120 3 × 14.5 ft = 10.4 k
12 in ft
ft
Superimposed dead load, applied as a point load at midspan:
lb
12 ft × 14.5 ft × 20 2 = 3.48 k
ft
lb
12 ft × 14.5 ft × 50 2 = 8.7 k
ft
So, using
= wu 1.2 DL + 1.6 LL , the factored load is: Comment [R1]: Stopped checking here.
wu = 1.2 × ( 0.240 k/ft + 0.02 k/ft ) + 1.6 × ( 50 k/ft ) = 0.392 k/ft , per foot of beam
wu , po int = 1.2 × ( 2.61 k + 10.4 k + 3.48 k ) + 1.6 × ( 8.7 k ) = 33.7 k , applied as a point load
=  n 24
= ft -16 in 22.67 ft
With that, we can determine the design moments, but structural analysis software must be used
since the ACI Moment Coefficients cannot be applied when not all loads are distributed.
At column A-1: M u = −90.4 k-ft
At midspan: M u = 114 k-ft
At column B-1: M u = −123 k-ft
At column A-1:
wu (  n − 2d ) wu , po int 0.392 k/ft × ( 22.67 ft − 2 × 21.5 in ) 33.7 k
=Vu + = + = 20.6 k
2 2 2 2
At midspan: Vu = 0 k
At column B-1: Vu =1.15 × Vu , A−1 =23.7 k
7-19
To calculate the design torsion, we first have to determine the moment and shear that the beam is
= n 30
= ft -12 in 29 ft
2.33 k/ft × ( 29 ft )
2
w 2
Mu =− u n = − −81.6 k-ft
=
24 24
=Vu w=
u , po int 33.7 k
Thus our design torsion, at d away from the ends of our beam, is:
6 in 6 in
Tu = M u + Vu × 81.6 k-ft + 33.7 k ×
= 98.5 k-ft
=
12 in/ft 12 in/ft

Mu 90.4 k-ft × 12 in/ft
φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
column A-1, As = ρ bd = 0.0037 × 12 in × 21.5 in = 0.95 in 2 .
φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
midspan, As = ρ bd = 0.0048 × 12 in × 21.5 in =1.24 in 2 .
φ bd 2 0.9 × 12 in × ( 21.5 in )2
torsion.
 4h f = 24 in
Therefore,
Acp = 24 in × 12 in + 6 in × 18 in = 396 in 2
(
 396 in 2 ) 
2
 Acp 2 
Tth = φλ f 'c 
 Pcp  = 0.75 × 0.85 × 4,000 psi ×   = 58,500 lb-in = 4.88 k-ft
 108 in 
   
7-20
following:
 Acp 2 
Tu ,comp= φ 4λ f 'c  = 0.75 × 4 × 0.85 × 4,000 psi × 
(
 396 in 2 2 )
 234,000 lb-in= 19.5 k-ft
=
 Pcp   108 in 
   
Since Tu ≥ Tu ,comp , we can reduce our design torsion to 19.5 k-ft. Since our design torsion for the
spandrel beam is being reduced, it is necessary to redistribute the design moments for the joist that
frames into the spandrel beam. See chapter 7 for further discussion of why this is required.
Aoh ( 24 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 in ) × (12 in − 2 × 1.5 in − 0.5 =
= in ) 174 in 2
From Eq. (7-33):
2 2
 Vu   Tu Ph   V 
  + 2 
≤ φ  c + 8 f 'c 
b d
 w   1.7 Aoh  b
 w d 
2
2    2 4,000 psi × 12 in × 21.5 in 
 23.7 k   19.5 k-ft × 58 in 
   + ≤ 0.75 ×  + 8 4,000 psi 
 
( )
2
 12 in × 21.5 in  2 12 in × 21.5 in
 1.7 × 174 in   
0.279 ksi ≤ 0.474 ksi

At column A-1: Vs = 0 k
V 23.7 k
At column A-2: Vs = u − Vc = − 32.6 k = 0 k
φ 0.75

T 19.5 k-ft
Tn ≥ u= = 26.0 k-ft
0.75 0.75
= ≥ = 0.0176
2 
( )
in
in 2 in 2
For strength: 2 × 0.0176 =0.0352
in in
50bw 50 × 12 in in 2
f yt 60,000 psi in
7-21
 12 in

smax ≤  Ph / 8 = 58 in / 8 = 7.25 in
d / 2 = 10.75 in (for shear)

2 ⋅ 0.11 in 2
in 2
0.035
in
2 ⋅ 0.2 in 2
=
in 2
0.035
in
Select closed #3 stirrups at 6 in spacing at the ends of the beam. While in some cases it is possible
that stirrups are not required along the full length of the beam, the torsion in this case is constant
along the length of the beam, as is the shear. Therefore, closed #3 stirrups are required along the
full length of the beam.

 A   f yt  2  in 2 
For strength:
= Al  t  Ph  =
  cot θ  0.0176 1.0 × 1.0 1.02 in 2
 × 58 in ×=
 s   f yl   in 
5 f 'c × Acp At f yt
Minimum required:=Al ,min − Ph
f yl s f yl
A  in 2 25bw in 2 in 2
Since  t = 0.0176 ≥ = 0.0050 , we must use 0.0176
5 4,000 psi × 396 in 2 in 2
=Al ,min − 0.0176
= × 58 in × 1.0 1.07 in 2
60 ksi in
Use Al = 1.07 in 2
Area / bar 1.07

= = in 2 / 6 bars 0.18 in 2 / bar
(
in 2 / 3 1.31=
in 2 / 3 0.437 in 2 , so specify 3
#6 bars along the top of the section.
(
in 2 / 3 1.60=
in 2 / 3 0.53 in 2 , so specify 3 #7
bars along the bottom of the section.
(
As top reinforcement, As / bar ≥ 1.34 in 2 + 2 × 0.18 in
= 2
) in 2 / 3 0.57 in 2 , so specify 3 #7
/ 3 1.7=
7-22
Chapter 8
8-1 Figure P8-1 shows a cantilever beam with b = 12 in. containing three No. 7 bars that
are anchored in the column by standard 90° hooks. f c′ = 5000 psi (normal-weight)
and f y = 60000 psi . If the steel is stressed to f y at the face of the column, can these
bars:
(a) be anchored by hooks into the column? The clear cover to the side of the
hook is 2 ¾ in. The clear cover to the bar extension beyond the bend is 2 in.
The joint is enclosed by ties at 6 in. o.c.
Except for the side cover of 2 ¾ in., a clear cover of 2 in. is assumed throughout the beam
and joint. See Fig. S8-1 below.
18 in. 48 in.
3 #7
2 in. (clear cover) 7.5 in. 2 in. (clear cover) 2 in.
6 in. 18 in.
#3, double legs
Side cover = 2¾ in. for columns and 2 in. for beams;

Beam width = 12 in.
Fig. S8-1
1. Check if a 90° standard hook can be used

• Length of the hook tail including the bend:
12db + 3db + 0.5db = 15.5db = 15.5 × 0.875 in. = 13.6 in.
• Available vertical room for the hook tail:
in. 14 in. > 13.6 in. , OK.
18 in. − 2 × 2 =
2. Required development length of 90° standard hooks:

• Basic development length of 90° standard hooks:
0.02ψ e f y 0.02 × 1 × 60000
= hb = db × 0.875
= 14.8 in.
λ f c′ 1 × 5000
Note: Coating factor ψ e = 1 for uncoated reinforcement (assumed)
Lightweight-aggregate-concrete factor λ = 1 for normal-weight
concrete
8-1
• Applicable factors:
ACI Code Section 12.5.3(a) applies (factor of 0.7) because:
bar size smaller than bar No. 11

side cover: 2 3/4 in. ≥ 2 1/2 in.
 tail cover: 2 in. ≥ 2 in.

ACI Code Section 12.5.3(b) does not apply because:
tie spacing: 6 in. > 3db = 2.6 in.
ACI Code Section 12.5.3(d) does not apply because f y = 60000 psi
∴  dh =  hb × 0.7 = 14.8 in. × 0.7 = 10.4 in.
• Minimum development length
 dh , min = max(8db ,6 in.) = 7 in. < 10.4 in. , OK.
max(8 × 0.875 in., 6 in.) =
3. Available horizontal room for 90° standard hook:

18 in. − 2 in. = 16 in. > 10.4 in. , OK.
Conclusion: The bars can be anchored in the column by using 90˚ standard hook.
(b) be developed in the beam? The bar ends 2 in. from the end of the beam. The
beam has No. 3 double-leg stirrups at 7.5 in.
1. Available room in the beam for straight anchorage:

48 in. − 2 in. =
46 in.
2. Required development length of straight anchorage conforming to ACI Code Section

12.2.2.:
• Determine which formulas to use in the Table 8-1
 12 in. − 2 × 2 in. − 3 × 0.875 in.
Clear spacing: = 2.7 in. ≥ 2db= 1.75 in.
2

Clear cover: 2 in. ≥ db = 0.875 in.
Bar #7


ψ eψ t f y 1.3 × 1 × 60000
∴ = hb db
= = 48.3 in. > 46 in. , NG.
× 0.875
20λ f c′ 20 × 1 × 5000
Note: Bar-location factor ψ t = 1.3 is used because the bars are top
reinforcement with a depth of fresh concrete below:
18 in. − 2 in. − 0.875 in.= 15.1 in. > 12 in.
∴Per ACI Code Section 12.2.2, the bars cannot be developed in the beam by
using straight anchorage. This problem can be solved by reducing the bar size.
However, ACI Code Section 12.2.3 allows another method to calculate the
development length which is likely to yield a shorter development length. Let try
this.
3. Required development length of straight bars conforming to ACI Code Section

12.2.3.
• Bar-size factor ψ s = 1 for #7 bars
8-2
• Bar-spacing factor cb
One-half center-to-center spacing of the bars:
12 in. − 2 × 2 in. − 0.875 in.
0.5 × 1.78 in.
=
2
Smallest distance from beam surface to centers of bars:
0.875 in.
2 in. + = 2.44 in.
2
=∴ cb min(1.78
= in., 2.44 in.) 1.78 in.
• Transverse reinforcement index
40 Atr 40 × ( 2 × 0.11 in. )
2
K tr
=
= = 0.39 in.
sn 7.5 in. × 3
• Required development length per ACI Code Section 12.2.3
3 f y ψ tψ eψ s 3 × 60000 1.3 × 1 × 1
=d = db = × 0.875 29.2 in.<46 in.
40λ f c′ cb + K tr 40 × 1 × 5000 1.78 + 0.39
db 0.875
c + K tr
(Note that b = 2.48 < 2.5,OK. )
db
∴Per ACI Code 12.2.3, the bars can be developed in the beam by using straight
anchorage.
8-2 Give two reasons why the tension development length is longer than the
compression development length.
1. A bar stressed in compression transfers some of its force to the concrete by bearing
on the end of the bars.
2. A bar stressed in tension transfers its tensile stress into concrete. As a result the
concrete is cracked and “in-and-out” bond stresses exist. In such a case there are
localized bond stresses which are several times greater the average bond stress. A bar
stressed in compression transfers its stress into concrete which is compressed and
hence un-cracked. There are no “in-and-out” bond stresses in such a case.
8-3 Why do bar spacing and cover to the surface of the bar affect bond strength?
The lugs on deformed bars transfer forces to the concrete. The radial component of these
lug forces causes a tensile stress in an annulus of concrete around the bar. The thicker the
wall of this annulus the lower the tensile stresses are in it. The thickness of the wall is
governed by the minimum distance to the surface of the concrete or to the next bar. Thus,
the larger the cover and bar spacing are, the larger the bond stresses can be developed.
8-3
8-4 A simply supported rectangular beam with b = 14 in. and d = 17.5 in. and No. 3
minimum stirrups spans 14 ft and supports a total factored uniform load of 6.5
kips/ft, including its own dead load. It is built of 3000 psi concrete and contains 2
No. 10 Grade 60 bars which extend 5 in. past the centers of the supports at each end
and No. 3 minimum stirrups. Does this beam satisfy ACI Section 12.11.3? If not,
what is the largest size bars which can be used?
Mn
The question essentially asks to check if  d ≤ +  a at the support.
Vu
1. Calculation of  d . The required development length will be computed based on ACI
Code Section 12.2.3 since it shall yield a smaller development length than Section
12.2.2 shall.
• Bar-location factor ψ t = 1 for bottom bars
• Coating factor ψ e = 1 for uncoated reinforcement (assumed)
• Bar-size factor ψ s = 1 for #10 bars
• Lightweight-aggregate-concrete factor λ = 1 for normal-weight concrete
• Bar-spacing factor = cb min  2.5 in.,0.5 × (14 in. − 2 × 2.5 in.=
) 2.5 in.
• Transverse reinforcement index K tr . In order to compute K tr , a stirrup spacing
needs to be determined. Since minimum shear reinforcement is used, the stirrup
spacing (for stirrups No.3, Grade 40, 2 legs) is:
Av f y 0.22 in.2 × 40000 psi
=s = = 12.6 in.
50bw 50 psi × 14 in.
(Note that 0.75
= f c′ 41.1 psi < 50 psi, use 50 psi )
The maximum stirrup spacing is limited by d / 2 , or 8.8 in. Therefore, #3 bars
with a spacing of 8 in. are used for shear reinforcement.
40 Atr 40 × ( 2 × 0.11 in. )
2
K tr =
= = 0.55 in.
sn 8× 2
3 f y ψ tψ eψ s 3 × 60000 1× 1× 1
=∴ d = db = × 1.27 43.4 in.
40λ f c′ cb + K tr 40 × 1 × 3000 2.5 + 0.55
db 1.27
c + K tr
(Note that b = 2.4 < 2.5,OK. )
db
Mn
2. Calculation of + a .
Vu
=a =
As f y ( 2 × 1.27 in. ) × 60000
2
=
psi
4.3 in.
0.85 f c′b 0.85 × 3000 psi × 14 in.
M n= As f y ( d − a / 2 )= 2.54 in.2 × 60 ksi × (17.5 in. − 4.3 in./2 )= 2340 k-in.
6.5 k/ft × 14 ft
=Vu = 45.5 kips
2
8-4
Mn 2340 k-in.
∴ = + a + 5 in.=56.4 in.
Vu 45.5 kips
M
∴Since  d ≤ n +  a , the use of 2 #10 bars satisfies ACI Code Section 12.11.3.
Vu
8-5 Why do ACI Section 12.10.3 and 12.12.3 require that bars extend d past their cut-
off points?
Inclined cracking due to shear increases the tension in the flexural reinforcement at all
points except the points of maximum moments. As a result, the tensile force in the
flexural reinforcement computed from the moment at a given section actually exists at a
point about 0.75d to d from that point in the direction of decreasing moment.
8-6 Why does ACI Section 12.10.2 define “points within the span where adjacent
reinforcement terminates” as critical sections for development of reinforcement in
flexural members?
If flexural reinforcement is cut off according to the moment diagram, the flexural cut-off
point is the point in the beam where the remaining steel not cut off is just adequate for the
moment if stressed to f y . Due to the effect of shear, this point actually occurs about
d farther away and hence this point is critical.
8-5
8-7 A rectangular beam with cross section b = 14 in., h = 24 in., and d = 21.7 in.
supports a total factored load of 3.9 kips/ft, including its own dead load. The beam is
simply supported with a 22-ft span. It is reinforced with 6 No. 6 Grade 60 bars, two
of which are cut off between midspan and the support and four of which extend 12
in. past the centers of the supports. f c′ = 4000 psi . The beam has No. 3 stirrups
satisfying ACI Section 11.5.4 and 11.5.5.3.
CL
h = 24 in. d =21.7 in.

cut-off point
4 bars #6 6 bars #6
12 in. 11 ft.
ℓd = 28.5 in. ℓd = 28.5 in.

øMn = 238 k-ft.
øMn = 163 k-ft.
M = 236 k-ft.
factored moment
diagram M
M = 163 k-ft.
flexural
cut-off point
cut-off point
12 in. 37 in. 21.7 in.
Fig. S8-2
wx
(a) ( x)
Plot to scale the factored moment diagram. M= ( x −  ) where x is the
2
distance from the support and  is the span.
3.9 × 11 ft
Maximum moment at the midspan: M ( x = / 2 ) = ( 22 ft − 11 ft ) =236 k-ft
2
The factored moment diagram is shown in Fig. S8-2.
(b) Plot a resisting moment diagram and locate the cut-off point for the two cut-
off bars.
1. Moment capacity of beam sections with 6 #6 bars
= a =
As f y ( 6 × 0.44 in.2 ) × 60000 psi
= 3.3 in.
0.85 f c′b 0.85 × 4000 psi × 14 in.
M n (6 #6) = ( 6 0.44 in.2 ) × 60 ksi × ( 21.7 in. − 3.3/ 2 in.) =
As f y ( d − a / 2 ) =× 3180 k-in.
a 3.3 in.
c
= = = 3.9 in. (Note that β1 = 0.85 for f c′ = 4000 psi )
β1 0.85
8-6
d −c 21.7 in. − 3.9 in.
εt
= ε=cm × 0.003 φ 0.9
= 0.014 > 0.005, ∴=
c 3.9 in.
φ M n (6 #6) = 0.9 × 3180 k-in. = 2860 k-in.=238 k-ft.
2. Moment capacity of beam sections with 4 #6 bars
=a =
As f y ( 4 × 0.44 in. ) × 60000
2
=
psi
2.2 in.
0.85 f c′b 0.85 × 4000 psi × 14 in.
M n (4 #6) = ( 4 0.44 in.2 ) × 60 ksi × ( 21.7 in. − 2.2 / 2 in.) =
As f y ( d − a / 2 ) =× 2180 k-in.
a 2.2 in.
c
= = = 2.6 in. (Note that β1 = 0.85 for f c′ = 4000 psi )
β1 0.85
d −c 21.7 in. − 2.6 in.
εt
= ε=cm × 0.003
= 0.022 > 0.005, ∴=φ 0.9
c 2.6 in.
φ M n (4 #6) = 0.9 × 2180 k-in. = 1960 k-in.=163 k-ft.
3. Development length for straight bars. ACI Code Section 12.2.2 will be used to
determine the development length.
• Minimum clear spacing between bars:
14 in. − 2 × 2.3 in. − 5 × 0.75 in.
= 1.1 in. > d=
b 0.75 in.
5
• Since the shear reinforcement is provided such that ACI Code Sections 11.5.4
and 11.5.5.3 will be satisfied, shear reinforcement is not less than the minimum
code requirement.
• Bars used are #6
ψ eψ t f y 1 × 1 × 60000
= ∴ d = db = × 0.75 28.5 in.
25λ f c′ 25 × 1 × 4000
4. Locate the cut-off point of the 2 #6 bars (see Fig. S8-2.)

• Determine the flexural cut-off point of the 2 #6 bars. This point is the intersection
of the factored moment diagram and the line of moment capacity φ M n (4 #6) ,
i.e.:
M ( x) = φ M n (4 #6)
3.9 × x
⇒ [ 22 − x ] =
163
2
⇒= x 4.89= ft 58.7 in.
• Extend the flexural cut-off point a distance d toward the left support to take into
account the shear effect. The distance from the left support to the cut-off point is
x = 58.7 in. − 21.7 in. = 37 in.
The resisting moment diagram is shown in Fig. S8-2.
8-7
8-8 Why does ACI Code Section 12.10.5 require extra stirrups at bar cut-off points in
some cases?
A severe discontinuity in longitudinal bar stresses exists in the region of a cut-off point in
a zone of flexural tension. This causes a reduction in the inclined cracking load in that
region. To compensate, more stirrups are required.
The beam shown in Fig. P8-9 is built of 4000 psi normal-weight concrete and Grade 60 steel.
The effective depth d = 18.6 in . The beam supports a total factored uniform load of 5.25
kips/ft, including its own dead load. The frame is not part of the lateral load-resisting
system for the building. Use Figs. A-1 to A-4 to select cut-off points in Problems 8-9 to 8-11.
8-9 Select cut-off points for span A-B based on the following requirements:
(a) Extend all positive moments bars into the columns before cutting them off.
1. Development length for bottom # 6 and #7 bars

From the effective depth of 18.6 in, assume a concrete cover of 2.4 in. to centers of the
bars.
• Clear spacing:
12 in. − 2 × 2.4 in. − 0.875 in. − 2 × 0.75 in.
= 1.6 in. > db of both bars #6 and #7
3
• Shear reinforcement:
Av 0.22 in.2 A  50b 50 × 12
= = 0.028 in.2 /in. >  v  = w = 0.015 in.2 /in.
=
s 8 in.  s min f yt 40000
(Note that 0.75
= f c′ 47.4 psi < 50 psi, use 50 psi )
∴The development length is computed following Case 1

ψ ψ fy 1 × 1 × 60000
 d ( #6, bottom
= ) e t= db 0.75 28.5 in.
×=
25λ f c′ 25 × 1 × 4000
ψ eψ t f y 1 × 1 × 60000
 d ( #7, bottom
= ) = db × 0.875
= 41.5 in.
20λ f c′ 20 × 1 × 4000
2. Determine the cut-off point of bars conforming to reinforcement continuity
• Since all bottom bars are extended into the columns, the requirement of at least
As (mid)
to be anchored into the columns is automatically satisfied.
4
• Since the beams are not part of the lateral resisting system, neither full
anchorage to the external column A nor reinforcement continuity throughout
the column B is required. Instead, extend all the bottom bars past the faces of
the columns to both ends a minimum length of 6 in.
3. Determine the cut-off point of bars conforming to structural integrity. The ACI Code
does not stipulate a structural integrity requirement for longitudinal reinforcement of
interior beams which are not part of the lateral load resisting system; however, it does
require that the shear reinforcement must be closed stirrups. Therefore, all U-stirrups
must be changed into closed stirrups to satisfy this requirement.
8-8
Mn
4. Check if  d ≤ +  a at the positive moment point of inflection near end A
Vu
=a =
As f y ( 2.08 in.2 ) × 60000 psi
= 3.06 in.
0.85 f c′bw 0.85 × 4000 psi × 12 in.
M n ( 2 #6 and 2 #7 )= As f y ( d − a / 2 )= 2.08 in.2 × 60 ksi × (18.6 in. − 3.06 in./2 )= 2130 k-in.
From Fig. A-2, the positive moment point of inflection closest to end A is
0.1= n 2= ft 24 in.
5.25 k/ft × 20 ft
= Vu − 5.25k/ft
= × 2 ft 42 kips
2
max(d ,12db ) = 18.6 in.
 a = 18.6 in.
< actual bar embedment past the PI = 36 in. + 6 in. = 42 in.
Mn 2130 k-in.
∴ = + a + 18.6 in.=69.3 in. >  d ( #7, bottom
= ) 41.5 in., OK
Vu 42 kips
M
5. Check if  d ≤ n +  a at the positive moment point of inflection near end B
Vu
Everything remains the same as for end A, except the point of inflection.
From Fig. A-2, the positive moment point of inflection closest to end B is
M
0.104 n = 2.08 ft. Because the change is not significant,  d ≤ n +  a is
Vu
ensured.
(b) Extend all negative moment bars past the negative moment point of
inflection before cutting them off.
1. Development length for # 6 and #7 top bars

Note that the clear spacing of top #7 bars is:
12 in. − 2 × 2.4 in. − 4 × 0.875 in.
= 0.93 in. > db of bars #7
4
∴The development length is computed following Case 1, with ψ t = 1.3 for top bars.
ψ eψ t f y 1 × 1.3 × 60000
 d ( #6,=
top ) = db 0.75 37.0 in.
×=
25λ f c′ 25 × 1 × 4000
ψ eψ t f y 1 × 1.3 × 60000
 d ( #7, top
= ) = db × 0.875
= 54.0 in.
20λ f c′ 20 × 1 × 4000
2. Determine the cut-off point conforming to reinforcement continuity for negative

reinforcement near column A
• Since all reinforcement is required to extend past the point of inflection, the
A (face)
requirement of greater than s to extend past the point of inflection is
3
automatically satisfied.
• All reinforcement has to extend past the inflection point a length:
8-9
≥ d =18.6 in.

≥ 12db = 9 in. = 18.6 in.
≥  /16 = 16 in.
 n
• Negative moment point of inflection from face of column A is

0.164 n = 3.28 ft = 39.4 in.
• Total length from face of column A to the reinforcement cut-off point is:
39.4 in. + 18.6 in.=58 in. >  d (#6, top) =
37.0 in.
• The requirement of structural integrity is exactly the same as that of
reinforcement integrity. Note that all shear reinforcement was changed from U-
stirrups to closed stirrups.
3. Determine the cut-off point conforming to reinforcement continuity for negative

reinforcement near column B
• Since all reinforcement is required to extend past the point of inflection, the
A (face)
requirement of greater than s to extend past the point of inflection is
3
automatically satisfy.
• All reinforcement has to extend past the inflection point a length:
≥ d = 18.6 in.

≥ 12db= 10.5 in.= 18.6 in.
≥  /16 = 16 in.
 n
• Negative moment point of inflection from face of column B is
0.24 n = 4.8 ft = 57.6 in.
• Total length from face of column B to the reinforcement cut-off point is:
57.6 in. + 18.6 in.=76.2 in. >  d (#7, top) = 54 in. Choose 78 in.
(c) Check the anchorage of the negative moment bars at A and modify the bar
size if necessary.
Reinforcement continuity and structural integrity require that all negative moment
reinforcement be fully anchored into column A. Note that the development length of
straight #6 bars is 37.1 in., exceeding the available column width of 18 in. A hook
anchorage must then be used.
• Basic development length for a standard 90º hook for #6 bars:

0.02ψ e f y 0.02 × 1 × 60000
=
 hb = db × 0.75 14.2 in.
=
λ f c′ 1 × 4000
• Applicable factors. The problem does not give sufficient information to decide
if reduction factors per ACI Code Section 12.5.3 shall apply. To be
conservative, assume that no reduction of  hb will be made.
∴  dh =  hb = 14.2 in.
• Minimum development length
 dh , min = max(8db ,6 in.) =
max(8 × 0.75 in., 6 in.) =6 in. < 14.2 in. , OK.
• Available horizontal room for the 90º standard hook:
8-10
18 in. − 2.4 in. = 15.6 in. > 14.2 in., OK
Extend the hook past the column face and to the other side of the column.
See Fig. S8-3 for reinforcement details.
58 in. 78 in.
4 #6 5 #7
12 in.
A B
(2 #6) + (2 #7)
6 in. 6 in.
240 in.
18 in. 18 in.
Fig. S8-3
8-10 Repeat Problem 8-9(a) and (b) for span B-C
(a) Extend all positive moment bars into the columns before cutting them off.
1. Similar to Problem 8-9(a), extend all the bottom bars past the faces of the columns to
both ends a minimum length of 6 in.
M
2. Check if  d ≤ n +  a at the positive moment point of inflection near end B
Vu
M n ( 2 #6 and 2 #7 ) = 2130 k-in. from Problem 8-9(a)
From Fig. A-1, the positive moment point of inflection closest to end B is
0.146 n = 3.07 ft = 36.8 in.
5.25 k/ft × 21 ft
=Vu − 5.25k/ft ×=
3.07 ft 39 kips
2
max(d ,12db ) = 18.6 in.
 a = 18.6 in.
< actual bar embedment past the PI = 36.8 in. + 6 in. = 42.8 in.
Mn 2130 k-in.
∴ = + a + 18.6 in.=73.2 in. >  d ( #7, bottom
= ) 41.5 in., OK
Vu 39 kips
(b) Extend all negative moment bars past the negative moment point of
inflection before cutting them off.
1. Similar to Problem 8-9(b), extend all negative reinforcement past the negative
moment point of inflection a length of 18.6 in.
2. Negative moment point of inflection from face of column B and C is
0.24 n = 5.04 ft = 60.5 in.
8-11
3. Total length from face of column B to the reinforcement cut-off point is
60.5 in. + 18.6 in.=79.1 in. >  d (#7, top) =
54 in.
78 in. 78 in.
5 #7 5 #7
12 in.
B C
(2 #6) + (2 #7)
6 in. 6 in.
252 in.
18 in. 18 in.
Fig. S8-4
8-11 Select cut-off points for span A-B based on the following requirements:
(a) Extend all negative moment bars at A past the negative moment point of
inflection.
Similar to Problem 8-9(b)
(b) Cut off the two No. 6 positive moment bars when no longer needed at each
end. Extend the remaining bars into the columns.
1. Cut-off point for 2 #7 bars:

Similar to Problem 8-9(a), extend 2 #7 bars past the column faces a minimum
length of 6 in.
2. Cut-off points for 2 #6 bars:

• Ratio of remaining reinforcement area after cutting off the 2 #6 bars:
2 × 0.6 in.2
= 0.58
2 × 0.6 in.2 + 2 × 0.44 in.2
• The flexural cut-off point of 2 #6 bars located at x from the supports where
Moment at x
at x 0.23
= 0.58 . This occurs= =  n 4.6 ft.=55.2 in. from A
Maximum moment
and
= x 0.24
=  n 4.8 ft.=57.6 in. from B. Use x = 55.2 in. for both ends .
• To consider the shear effect, extend 2 #6 bars a distance d past the flexural cut-
off point. The distance from the column face to the cut-off point is
55.2 in. − 18.6 in.=36.6 in. Use 36 in.
8-12
• Check if 2 #6 bars are properly anchored. Distance from midspan to the cut-off
point of 2 #6 bars is 120 in. − 36 in. = 84 in. >  d ( #6, bottom ) = 28.5 in. , OK.
• Check if 2 #7 bars are properly anchored. Distance from the cut-off point of 2 #6
bars to cut-off point of 2 #7 bars is
6 in. + 36 in. = 42 in. >  d ( #7, bottom ) = 41.5 in. , OK.
Mn
3. Check if  d ≤ +  a at end positive moment point of inflection
Vu
M
Since shear is larger at end B, let check  d ≤ n +  a at end B only. From Fig.
Vu
A-2, the positive moment point of inflection closest to end B is
0.104
=  n 2.08= ft. 25 in. < 36 in.
Calculate the moment capacity for 2 #7 bars
=a =
As f y (1.2 in.2 ) × 60000 psi
= 1.76 in.
0.85 f c′bw 0.85 × 4000 psi × 12 in.
M n ( 2 #7 )= As f y ( d − a / 2 )= 1.2 in.2 × 60 ksi × (18.6 in. − 1.76 in./2 )= 1280 k-in.
Vu = 49.5 kips (see Problem 8-9(a))
 a = 18.6 in. (see Problem 8-9(a))
M 1280 k-in.
∴ n += a in. 44.5 in. >  d ( #7, bottom
+ 18.6= = ) 41.5 in., OK
Vu 49.5 kips
4. Check if extra stirrups are need at the cut-off points

• Exterior end:
5.25 k/ft × 20 ft
= Vu − 5.25k/ft
= × 3 ft 36.8 kips
2
2 2  0.22 × 40000 × 18.6 
φ (Vc + Vs ) = × 0.75 ×  2 4000 × 12 × 18.6 +  /1000 = 24.4 kips
3 3  8 
2
φ (Vc + Vs ) < Vu , ∴ extra stirrups are required.
3
Use No.3, closed stirrups, Grade 40.
d 18.6
= s = = 5.5 in. , use s = 5 in.
8β b 8 × 0.875
2.08
These stirrups are placed over a length of 0.75d = 14 in.
∴ Use 4 No.3, closed stirrups, Grade 40 with a spacing of 5 in. starting from the
cut-off point of #6 bars towards midspan.
• Exterior end. It can be easily seen that extra stirrups are required at the cut-off point.
Also use 4 No.3, closed stirrups, Grade 40 with a spacing of 5 in. starting from the
cut-off point of #6 bars towards midspan.
(c) Cut off two of the negative moment bars at B when no longer needed.
Extend the remaining bars past the point of inflection.
8-13
1. Cut-off points for the remaining 3 #7 bars:
These bars need to be extended past the negative point of flexure. Problem 8-9(b)
shows that the required length is 76.2 in. Use 78 in. as before.
2. Cut-off points for 2 #7 bars:
• Ratio of remaining reinforcement area after cutting off the 2 #7 bars is 3/5 = 0.6
Moment at x
• 2 #7 bars can be cut off at the location x where = 0.6 . This
Maximum moment
occurs=at x 0.08
=  n 1.6 ft.=19.2 in. from B
• To consider the shear effect, extend 2 #7 bars a distance d past the flexural cut-
off point away from B. The distance from the face of column B to the cut-off point is
19.2 in.+18.6 in.=37.8 in.<  d ( #7, top ) = 54 in. , NG. One can use 54 in. However, to
simplify construction, one may consider to extend all the bars a distance of 78 in. as
in Item 1.
58 in. 78 in.
4 #3 @ 5 in. (extra)
4 #6 4 #3 @ 5 in.(extra) 5 #7
12 in.
A B
2 #7 2 #6
6 in. Cut-off points for 6 in.
bars #6
240 in.
18 in. 18 in.
Fig. S8-5
8-14
Chapter 9
9-1 Explain the differences in appearance of flexural cracks, shear cracks, and torsional
cracks.
Flexural cracks are approximately vertical cracks extending from the tensile face of the member
to the level of the zero-strain axis (neutral axis).
Shear cracks are inclined to the axis of the element. Most often these cracks start at a flexural
crack on t he tensile face of the member and extend diagonally through the member toward the
point of maximum moment.
Torsional cracks spiral around the member and for pure torsion are roughly 45 deg. on all faces.
For combined torsion and shear, the cracks tend to be pronounced on the face where the direct
shear stress and the shear stresses due to torsion add, and less pronounced (or even absent) on the
opposite face, where the stresses counteract.
9-2 Why is it necessary to limit the width of cracks?
Cracks are of concern for three main reasons:

• appearance: wide cracks are unsightly and sometimes lead to a concern by owners and
occupants;
• leakage of air or fluids through the crack: crack control is important in the design of liquid-
retaining structures;
• corrosion of reinforcement: traditionally corrosion of reinforcement has been related to crack
width, but more recent studies suggest that the factors governing the eventual development of
corrosion are independent of the crack width, although the period of time required for corrosion
to start is a function of crack width.
9-1
9-3 Does the beam shown in Fig. P9-3 satisfy the ACI Code crack control provisions for
interior exposure? f y = 60 ksi .
 40,000   40,000 
ACI Code Eq. (10-4)= : s 15   − 2.5cc ≤ 12  
 fs   fs 
using cc =1.5 in. + (3 / 8) in. = 1.875 in.
f s 2 f=
= 2 × 60,000 psi=40,000 psi , as permitted by the ACI Code Section 10.6.4
3 y 3
find the limit for the spacing of bars closest to the tension face,
 40,000   40,000 
s =15 ×   − 2.5 × 1.875 =10.3 in.< 12   =12 in. OK.
 40,000   40,000 
 
( )
1 
12 −  2 × 1.5 + 3 + (1.128 )  
  8 2 
From Fig. P9-3, bar spacing =
= 2.37 in. < 10.3 in.
3
Thus, the beam satisfies the crack control provision for interior exposure.
Note: 1. The value for f s can be also calculated as the stress in the reinforcement closest to the
tension face at service load based on the unfactored moment.
2. In ACI Code 2008, the former distinction between interior and exterior exposure has
been eliminated.
9-4 Compute the maximum spacing of No. 5 bars in a one-way slab with 1 in. of clear
cover that will satisfy the ACI Code crack-control provisions. f y = 60 ksi .
 40,000   40,000 
ACI Code Eq. (10-4) =: s 15   − 2.5cc ≤ 12  
 fs   fs 
using cc = 1.0 in..
f s 2 f=
= 2 × 60,000 psi=40,000 psi , as permitted by the ACI Code Section 10.6.4
3 y 3
find the limit for the spacing of bars closest to the tension face,
 40,000   40,000 
s =15 ×   − 2.5 × 1.0 =12.5 in.> 12   =12 in.
 40,000   40,000 
Thus, the maximum spacing for the No. 5 bars that satisfies the ACI Code crack-control
provisions is 12 in.
9-2
9-5 and 9-6 For the cross sections shown in Figs. P9-5 and P9-6, compute
(a) the gross moment of inertia, I g ;
(b) the location of the neutral axis of the cracked section and I cr ; and
(c) I eff for M a = 0.6φ M n .
The beams have a 1.5 in. of clear cover and No. 3 stirrups. The concrete strength is 4000 psi.
16 × 243
(a) I g
9-5 = = 18432 in.4 (ignoring the effect of reinforcement for simplicity)
12
(b) The distance from the extreme tension edge of the section to the centroid of the lowest

( ) 1
( )

layer of steel is 1.5 in.+ 3 in.+ 8 in.  = 2.38 in. Assuming that the spacing between the
 8 2 8 
centers of the layers is 2 in. find,
centroid of steel at
( 4 × 0.79 ) × 2.38 + ( 2 × 0.79 ) × 4.38
= 3.05 in. above bottom and d = 20.95 in.
4.74
Es 29 × 106 psi
n
= = = 8.04
Ec 57000 4000 psi
Transformed area of steel = 8.04 × ( 6 × 0.79 ) =
38.11 in.2
Compute location of neutral axis
Let depth of neutral axis be c and sum moments about the neutral axis to zero.
Part Area, in.2 y , in. Ay ,in.3

Compression
16c c 2 8c 2
zone
Tension steel 38.11 ( c − 20.95) 38.11c − 798.4
2
Ay = 8c + 38.11c − 798.4 = 0 and c = 7.89 in.
Thus, the neutral axis is 7.89 in. below the top of the beam
Compute I cr
Part Area, in.2 y , in. I own Ay 2 ,in.4

Compression
126.2 3.94 654.9 1959.1
zone
Tension steel 38.11 -13.06 − 6500
I cr = 9114 in.4
(c) First calculate φ M n for the beam:
A f
s y 4.74 × 60000
α β=
= c = and c 5.23
= 5.23 in.= = 6.15 in.
1 ' 0.85 × 4000 × 16 0.85
0.85 f b
c
9-3
 d −c  20.95 − 6.15 
ε=  ε =  × 0.003= 0.00722 > 0.002 O.K.
s  c  cu  6.15 
and clearly ε > 0.005 ⇒ φ =0.90
t
 5.23 
4.74 × 60000 ×  20.95 − 
 a  2 
M
= A f  d −=  = 5214 kips-in.
n s y 2 1000
and φ M n =0.9 × 5214 =4693 kips-in.
Thus,
= M a 0.6= φ M n 2816 kips-in.
M cr
=
fr I g
=
( 7.5 × )
4000 psi × 18432 in.4
= 728.6 kips-in.
yt lbs
12 in. × 1000
kips
So, using Eq. (9-10a) find
 M cr 
3
  M 3   728.6 
3
  728.6 3 
I eff 
= 
 Ig + 1− 
cr 
 I cr 
=  18432 + 1 −  =  9114 9274 in.
4
 Ma    Ma  
   2816    2816  
9-4
9-6 (a)
Part Area, in.2 ytop , in. Aytop I own , in.4 Ay 2 ,in.4

Web 288 12 3456 13824 2592
Flanges 144 3 432 432 5184
Σ =432 Σ =3888 Ig = 22032 in.4
3888
ytop
= = 9 in. =ybtm 15 in.
432
I g = 22032 in.4
Es 29 × 106 psi
n
(b) = = = 8.04
Ec 57000 4000 psi
25.4 in.2
d =24 in. − 2.5 in. =21.5 in.
Assume that the neutral axis is less than 6 in.
Compute location of neutral axis.

Compression
36c c 2 18c 2
zone
nAs 25.4 ( c − 21.5) 25.4c − 546
Ay = 18c 2 + 25.4c − 546 = 0 and c = 4.85 in.
Thus, the neutral axis is 4.85 in. below the top of the beam (i.e. the compression zone is
rectangular).
Compute I cr

Compression
174.6 2.42 342 1022.5
zone
nAs 25.4 -16.65 − 7041
I cr = 8405 in.4
(c) First calculate φ M n for the beam:
A f
s y 3.16 × 60000
a β=
= c = = 1.55 in.= and c 1.55= 1.82 in.
1 ' 0.85 × 4000 × 36 0.85
0.85 f b
c
Clearly, the steel is yielding and it is a tension-controlled section (φ = 0.90 ) .
9-5
 1.55 
3.16 × 60000 ×  21.5 − 
 a  2 
M
= A f  d −=  = 3930 kips-in.
n s y 2 1000
and φ M n =0.9 × 3930 =3537 kips-in.
Thus,
= M a 0.6= φ M n 2122 kips-in.
M cr
=
fr I g
=
( 7.5 × )
4000 psi × 22032 in.4
= 697 kips-in.
yt lbs
15 in. × 1000
kips
So, using Eq. (9-10a) find
 M cr 
3
  M 3   697 
3
  697 3 
=I eff  
 Ig + 1 − 
cr

 I cr 
=  22032 + 1 −  =  8405 8888 in.
4
 Ma    Ma  
   2122    2122  
9-7 Why are deflections limited in design?
Deflections are limited for several reasons.
1. Deflections greater than  250 of the span are visible and may be unsightly.
2. Excessive deflections may cause cracking of partitions, malfunctioning of doors and windows
and similar damage to non-structural elements.
3. Excessive deflections may interfere with the use of the structure, particularly if the structure
supports machinery that must be carefully aligned.
4. Ponding of water on deflected roofs may overload the roofs.
5. Very large deflections may damage structural members and change the load path.
9-6
9-8 A simply supported beam with the cross section shown in Fig. P9-5 has a span of 25
ft and supports an unfactored dead load of 1.5 kips/ft, including its own self-weight plus an
unfactored live load of 1.5 kips/ft. The concrete strength is 4500 psi. Compute
(a) the immediate dead load deflection.
(b) the immediate dead-plus-live load deflection
(c) the deflection occurring after partitions are installed. Assume that the partitions are
installed two months after shoring for the beam is removed and assume that 20
percent of the live load is sustained.
(a) From question 9-5 we found: I g = 18432 in.4 , M cr = 728.6 kips-in.

Es 29 × 106 psi
n
= = = 7.58
Ec 57000 4500 psi
35.93 in.2

Compression
16c c 2 8c 2
zone
Tension steel 35.93 ( c − 20.95) 35.93c − 752.7
2
Ay = 8c + 35.93c − 752.7 = 0 and c = 7.71 in.
Compute I cr

Compression
123.4 3.85 611 1829
zone
Tension steel 35.93 -13.24 − 6298
I cr = 8738 in.4
Unfactored dead load moment:

= M DL
1.5 ( kip ft ) × 252 ft 2
= 117.2
( )
kips-ft 1406 kips-in.
=
8
Thus, M a > M cr → cracked section and need to calculate I eff
 M cr 
3
  M 3   728.6 
3
  728.6 3 
=Ie   g I + 1 − 
cr
= I
 cr   18432 +  1−  =  8738 10087 in.
4
M
 a   M   1406    1406  
  a  
This is a simply supported beam with distributed loading, so using deflection Case 1 from Fig. 9-
13, the immediate dead load deflection can be calculated as:
5 1406 × 1000 × ( 25 × 12 )
2 2
5 M pos 
∆ iD = = × = 0.342 in.
48 EI 48 3.824 × 106 × 10087
9-7
(b) Unfactored dead plus live load moment:
=M D+ L
3.0 ( kip ft ) × 252 ft 2
=
( )
 in. 
× 12   2812 kips-in.
8  ft 
 728.6 
3
  728.6 3  4
=Ie   18432 + 1 −  =   8738 8907 in.
 2812    2812  
So using again the deflection Case 1 from Fig. 9-13, the immediate dead-plus-live-load deflection
can be calculated as:
5 2812 × 1000 × ( 25 × 12 )
2
∆ iD+L = × =0.774 in.

48 3.824 × 106 × 8907
(c) The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed can be calculated from Eq. (9-14):
∆ = ∆ iL + λ ( t0 , ∞ ) ∆ iD + λ∞ ∆ iLS
The immediate dead load deflection, ∆ iD , was found from part (a) to be 0.342 in. However, after
the live load has been applied and the beam has cracked, the deflection due to dead load will be
increased by an amount equal to the ratio of the I e values used in part (a) and (b). Thus the
immediate dead load deflection on the structure which has been loaded to D+L will be calculated
and used in Eq. (9-14).
10087
iD 0.342 ×
∆= =0.387 in.
8907
The immediate live load deflection, ∆ iL , is found as:

∆ iL = ∆ i,L+D − ∆ iD = 0.774 in. − 0.387 in. = 0.387 in.
Twenty five percent of this results from sustained live loads, ∆ iLS = 0.20 × 0.387 in.= 0.077 in.
ξ 2.0
λ∞
Since the beam has no compression reinforcement,= = '
= 2.0
1 + 50 ρ 1 + 0
and for partitions installed 2 months after the shoring is removed,
2.0 − 0.9
=ξ 0.9 and λ = ( to , ∞ ) = 1.1
1+ 0
The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed is found as:
=∆ 0.387 + 1.1 × 0.387 + 2.0 × 0.077
= 0.967 in.
9-8
9-9 Repeat Problem 9-8 for a beam having the same dimensions and tension
reinforcement, but with two No. 8 bars as compression reinforcement.
Es 29 × 106 psi
n
(a)= = = 7.58
Ec 57000 4500 psi
Transformed area of tension steel = nAs= 7.58 × ( 6 × 0.79 )= 35.93 in.2
Transformed area of compression steel = ( n − 1) A=
s
'
( 7.58 − 1) × ( 2 × 0.79=) 10.40 in.2
As discussed
= in Problem 9-5, d 20.95
= in. and assume that d ' 2.5 in.

Compression
16c c 2 8c 2
zone
Compression
steel
10.40 ( c − 2.5) 10.40c − 26
Tension steel 35.93 ( c − 20.95) 35.93c − 752.7
2
ΣAy = 8c + 46.33c − 778.7 = 0 and c = 7.39 in.
Compute I cr

Compression
118.2 3.69 538 1609
zone
( n − 1) A's 10.40 4.89 − 249
nAs 35.93 -13.56 − 6607
I cr = 9003 in.4
Thus, from question 9-5=

we found: I g 18432
= in.4 , M cr 728.6 kips-in.
and the new Icr with the addition of the compression reinforcement was found Icr = 9003 in.4
Unfactored dead load moment:

= M DL = 117.2
( )
1.5 ( kip ft ) × 252 ft 2
kips-ft 1406 kips-in.>M cr
=
8
 M cr 
3
  M 3   728.6 
3
  728.6 3 
=Ie   g I + 1 − 
cr
= I
 cr   18432 +  1−  =  9003 10315 in.
4
M
 a  M
  a    1406    1406  
 
= psi 3.824 × 106 psi
E 57000 4500=
9-9
This is a simply supported beam with distributed loading, so using deflection Case 1 from Fig. 9-
13, the immediate dead load deflection can be calculated as:
5 1406 × 1000 × ( 25 × 12 )
2 2
5 M pos 
∆ iD = = × = 0.334 in.
48 EI 48 3.824 × 106 × 10315
(b) Unfactored dead plus live load moment:
=M D+ L
3.0 ( kip ft ) × 252 ft 2
=
( )
 in. 
× 12   2812 kips-in.
8  ft 
 728.6 
3
  728.6 3  4
=Ie   18432 + 1 −  =   9003 9167 in.
 2812    2812  
So using again the deflection Case 1 from Fig. 9-13, the immediate dead-plus-live-load deflection
can be calculated as:
5 2812 × 1000 × ( 25 × 12 )
2
∆ iD+L = × =0.752 in.

48 3.824 × 106 × 9167
(c) The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed can be calculated from Eq. (9-14):
∆ = ∆ iL + λ ( t0 , ∞ ) ∆ iD + λ∞ ∆ iLS
10315
iD 0.334 ×
∆= =0.376 in.
9167

∆ iL = ∆ i,L+D − ∆ iD = 0.752 in. − 0.376 in. = 0.376 in.
2 × 0.79
For the compression reinforcement,
= ρ' = 0.0047
16 × 20.95
ξ 2.0
Thus,
= λ∞
= '
= 1.62
1 + 50 ρ 1 + 50 × 0.0047
2.0 − 0.9
= ξ 0.9 and= λ ( to , ∞ ) = 0.89
1 + 50 × 0.0047
=∆ 0.376 + 0.89 × 0.376 + 1.62 × 0.075 = 0.83 in.
Note that the addition of compression reinforcement reduced the deflection occurring after the
partitions are installed from approximately 0.97 in. to 0.8 in.
9-10
9-10 The beam shown in Fig. P9-10 is made of 4000-psi concrete and supports unfactored
dead and live loads of 1 kip/ft and 1.1 kips/ft. Compute
(a) the immediate dead-load deflection.
(a) Compute I g for the T-section (ignore the effect of the reinforcement for simplicity):
Assume flange width = effective flange width from ACI Code Section 8.12.2. = 72 in.
Es 29 × 106 psi
n
= = = 8.04
Ec 57000 4000 psi

Web 240 10 2400 8000 4234
Flanges 360 3 1080 1080 2822
A = 600 Ay = 3480 Ig = 16136 in.4
3480
ytop
= ybtm 14.2 in.
= 5.8 in. =
600
Compute I cr at the left end:
The positive-moment reinforcement is not developed for compression at the support and will
therefore be neglected. The section is a rectangular section, with 3 No. 7 ba rs , d ≈ 17.5 in. ,and
the following properties:
=As 1.80
= in.2 , nAs 14.47 in.2
1.80
=ρ = 0.0086,=n ρ 0.069
12 × 17.5
Using Eq. (9-3): k = 2 ρ n + ( ρ n ) − ρ n = 0.309 and c = kd = 5.41 in.

2

Compression
64.9 2.71 158 477
zone
nAs 14.47 ( 5.41 − 17.5) =
−12.1 − 2119
I cr = 2754 in.4
Compute I cr at the right end:
=As 3.16
= in.2 , nAs 25.41 in.2
3.16
=ρ = 0.0150,=n ρ 0.121
12 × 17.5
9-11
Using Eq. (9-3): k = 2 ρ n + ( ρ n ) − ρ n = 0.386 and c = kd = 6.75 in.
2

Compression
81 3.37 307.5 920
zone
nAs 25.41 ( 6.75 − 17.5) =
−10.75 − 2936
I cr = 4163 in.4
Compute I cr at the midspan:
=As 2.18
= in.2 , nAs 17.53 in.2
Assuming that c is less than 6 in.

Compression
72c c 2 36c 2
zone
nAs 17.53 ( c − 17.5) 17.53c − 307
ΣAy= 36c 2 + 17.53c − 307= 0 and c= 2.7 in.

Compression
194 1.35 118 354
zone
nAs 17.53 ( 2.7 − 17.5) =
−14.8 − 3840
I cr = 4312 in.4
The moment at the end and the midspan can be calculated using the ACI Moment Coefficients
Unfactored dead load moments
w 2n 1
=− × 1 × ( 22.67 ) =−32.1 kips-ft
2
Negative moment at left end = −
16 16
w 2n 1
× 1 × ( 22.67 ) = 36.7 kips-ft
2
Positive moment at midspan = =
14 14
w 2 1
Negative moment at right end = − n =− × 1 × ( 22.67 ) =−51.4 kips-ft
2
10 10
Cracking moments
= f r 7.5
= 4000 psi 474 psi
474 × 16136
Ends: M cr = 110 kips-ft
=
5.8 × 12,000
9-12
474 × 16136
Midspan:
= M cr = 45 kips-ft
14.2 × 12,000
Compute the average effective moment of inertia

for both ends and the midspan, M a < M cr and thus the sections are uncracked under dead loads
and I eff= I=
g 16136 in.4
Compute immediate dead-load deflection

This is an exterior beam span with a column as the exterior support. Therefore, the deflection can
be calculated using row 3 of Table 9-2, which requires a combination of Cases 2 and 8 from Fig.
9-13.
For deflection Case= 2: ∆

w 4
=
(
1 × 1000
12 )
× ( 24 × 12 )
4
=0.0533 in. (down)

(
185 EI 185 × 3.6 × 106 × 16136 )
For deflection Case 8:
M 2 ( −32.1× 12000 ) × ( 24 × 12 )2
= ∆ = = − 0.0343 in. (up)
16 EI ( )
16 × 3.6 × 106 × 16136
Thus, ∆
= iD 0.0533 − 0.0343
= 0.019 in.
(b) the immediate dead-plus-live load deflection.
Unfactored dead plus live-load moments
w 2n 1
− × (1 + 1.1) × ( 22.67 ) =
2
Negative moment at left end = − = −67.4 kips-ft
16 16
w 2n 1
× (1 + 1.1) × ( 22.67 ) = 77.1 kips-ft
2
Positive moment at midspan = =
14 14
w 2 1
− × (1 + 1.1) × ( 22.67 ) =
2
Negative moment at right end = − n = −107.9 kips-ft
10 10
Compute the average effective moment of inertia
left end: M a < M cr ⇒ I e = I g = 16136 in.4
 45 
3
  45 3  4
midspan: M a >= M cr ⇒ I e   16136 + 1 −  =   4312 6663 in.
 77.1    77.1  
right end: M a < M cr ⇒ I e = I g = 16136 in.4
Thus, the weighted average value of I eff using Eq. (9-11a) is:
I e ( avg ) = 0.70 × 6663 + 0.30 × 16136 = 9505 in.4
Immediate plus live-load deflection
Using the same procedure as in part (a),
9-13
for deflection Case=
2: ∆
w 4
=
( 2.1×100012) × ( 24 ×12) 4
=0.190 in. (down)

185 EI (
185 × 3.6 × 106 × 9505 )
for deflection Case 8:
M 2 ( −67.4 × 12000 ) × ( 24 × 12 )2
= ∆ = = − 0.122 in. (up)
16 EI ( )
16 × 3.6 × 106 × 9505
Thus, ∆ iD+L= 0.190 − 0.122= 0.068 in.
(c) the deflection occurring after partitions are installed. Assume that the
partitions are installed four months after the shoring is removed and assumed that 10
percent of the live load is sustained.
The deflection occurring after the partitions are installed can be calculated from Eq. (9-14):
∆ = ∆ iL + λ ( t0 , ∞ ) ∆ iD + λ∞ ∆ iLS
16136
iD 0.019 ×
∆= =0.032 in.
9505

∆ iL = ∆ i,L+D − ∆ iD = 0.068 in. − 0.032 in. = 0.036 in.
The beam has no compression reinforcement at the midspan; hence ρ ' = 0

ξ 2.0
Thus,=λ∞ = '
= 2.0
1 + 50 ρ 1 + 0
2.0 − 1.09
=ξ 1.09 and λ= ( to , ∞ ) = 0.91
1+ 0
=∆ 0.036 + 0.91 × 0.032 + 2.0 × 0.0036 = 0.072 in.
.
9-14
Chapter 10
10-1 A five-span one-way slab is supported on 12-in.-wide beam with center-to-center

spacing of 16 ft. The slab carries a superimposed dead load of 10 psf and a live load of 100
psf. Using f c' 4000
= = psi and f y 60,000 psi ,desing the slab. Draw a cross section showing
the reinforcement. Use Fig. A-5 to locate the bar cut-off points.
slab design strip
Plan
16 ft. 12 in.
 n =− 15 ft.
=
in.
12
ft
Estimate slab thickness
Assume partitions are not sensitive to deflections. Will require recheck if sensitivity is
established later.
Table A-9:
n
End bay: Min
= h = 15 × 12 = 7.50 in.
24 24
n 15 × 12
Interior bay: Min
= h = = 6.43 in.
28 28
Note that slab thickness was chosen on the basis of deflection control, since flexure and shear
probably won’t govern the design (this will be checked later).
Try h = 7.0 in. (this may need to be checked for deflections in the end span).
Assuming a cover of 0.75 in. and No. 4 bars as the slab reinforcement,
d= (
7.0 − 0.75 + 0.5 =
2 ) 6.0 in.
Compute factored loads
Considering a 1-ft wide strip of slab:

7.0
Slab self weight: wDs = × 150 = 87.5 psf
12
Superimposed dead load: wDi = 10 psf
10-1
Total dead load: wD = 87.5 + 10= 97.5 psf
Live load: wL = 100 psf
Factored load: wu = 1.2 × 97.5 + 1.6 × 100 = 277 psf
Load per foot along design strip = 277 lb/ft
Note that wL < 3wD and we can use the ACI Moment coefficients for the calculation of the
positive and the negative moments.
Thickness for flexure
The maximum value for M u is at the first interior support since  n = 15 ft. throughout. Using the
appropriate moment coefficient from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
w  2 277 × (15.0 )
2
M u =u n =
10 10
(
× 1
1000 )= 6.2 kips-ft ft
For a reinforcing ratio of ρ = 0.01 , which is a reasonable upper limit for a slab, the reinforcing
index can be found from Eq. (5-20),
0.01 × 60000
= ω = 0.15
4000
From Eq. (5-21) calculate the flexural resistance factor, R.
R= 0.15 × 4000 × (1 − 0.59 × 0.15 )= 547 psi
Using this value of R, the required value of bd 2 can be determined using Eq. (5-22), assuming
that φ = 0.9 (will check it later).
6.2
bd 2 ≥ 151 in.3
× 12,000 =
0.9 × 547
151
For
= b 12 in.,
= d = 3.55 in.
12
i.e., min d to keep ρ < 0.01 is d = 3.55 in. Actual=
d 6 in.∴ ρ will be less than 0.01 (O.K. for
flexure).
Thickness for shear
The max shear Vu is at the exterior face of the first interior support. Using the appropriate shear
coefficient from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
 15
Vu = 1.15wu n = 1.15 × 277 × = 2390 lbs/ft
2 2
(
Vc 0.75 2 f c' bw=
φ= ) (
d 0.75 2 × 4000 × 12 ×= )
6 6830 lbs/ft ∴ ok for shear
So, use a 7 in. slab.
Flexural reinforcement
Max M u = 6.2 kips-ft/ft

 a 
Assuming that  d − ≈ 0.95d  and ε s ≥ ε y , find the required reinforcement for a 1-ft wide strip
 2 
of slab.
10-2
M u × 12,000 6.2 × 12,000
As ≈ = = 0.24 in.2 /ft
 a  0.90 × 60,000 × ( 0.95 × 6.0 )
φ fy  d − 
 2
Iterate to find the depth of the compression stress block and recompute the value of the required
reinforcement:
As f y 0.24 × 60000
=a = = 0.35 in., c 0.35
= = 0.41 in.
'
0.85 f c b 0.85 × 4000 × 12 0.85
Since the depth to the neutral axis, c, is less than 3 8 of d , clearly the section is tension
(
controlled ∴ ε s ≥ ε y ,φ = )
0.9 , and
6.2 × 12,000
=As ,red ≈ 0.24 in.2 /ft
 0.35 
0.90 × 60,000 ×  6 −
 2 
The minimum reinforcement required by ACI Code Section 10.5.4, is
As=
,min 0.0018=bh 0.0018 × 12= × 7 0.15 in.2 /ft
The maximum spacing of the bars is, by ACI Code Section 7.6.5,
3h = 21 in.
smax =  
 18 in 
0.2 in.2
So use No. 4 bars at 9 in. → As =
ft 9 in.
( )
× 12 in. = 0.27 in.2
ft
Temperature and shrinkage steel as required by ACI Code Section 7.6.5,

5h = 35 in.
= As ,min 0.0018
= bh 0.15 in.2 /ft and smax =  
 18 in 
0.2 in.2
So provide No. 4 bars at 16 in. → As =
ft 16 in.
( )
× 12 in. = 0.15 in.2
ft
The flexural reinforcement for the supports and the midspan for all the spans is calculated in the
following table.
10-3
Calculation of reinforcement required in the slab.
1.  n ( ft.) 15.0 15.0
2. wu  n 2 62.3 62.3 62.3 62.3 62.3 62.3
3. Moment Coef. 1 24 1 14 1 10 1 11 1 16 1 11 1 16
4. M u ( kips-ft/ft ) 2.6 4.5 6.2 5.7 3.9 5.7 3.9
5. (
As reqd. in.2 /ft ) 0.01 0.17 0.24 0.15 0.22 0.15
6. (
As ,min in.2 /ft ) 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
#4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @
7. Reinforcement
16 in. 9 in. 9 in. 16 in. 9 in. 16 in.
8. (
As provided in.2 /ft ) 0.15 0.27 0.27 0.15 0.27 0.15
Fig. S10-1.1 shows a cross-section of the slab showing the reinforcement. The bar cut-off points
were located using Fig. A-5(c).
Fig. S10-1.1 Slab reinforcement detailing.
10-4
10-2 A four-span one-way slab is supported on 12-in.-wide beams with center-to-center
spacing of 14, 16, 16, and 14 ft. The slab carries a superimposed dead load of 20 psf and a
live load of 150 psf. Design the = slab, using f c' 3500
= psi and f y 60,000 psi . Select bar
cut-off points using Fig. A-5 and draw a cross-section showing the reinforcement.
slab design strip
Plan
Short span clear length:  n =− 14 ft. 12 in. =13 ft.

in.
12
ft
Long span clear length:  n =− 16 ft. 12 in. =15 ft.
in.
12
ft
Average clear span length for first interior=
(13 ft. + 15 ft.)
support:  n ,avg = 14 ft.
2
Estimate slab thickness
Assume partitions are not sensitive to deflections. Will require recheck if sensitivity is
established later.
Table A-9:
n
End bay: Min
= h = 13 × 12 = 6.50 in.
24 24
n 15 × 12
Interior bay: Min
= h = = 6.43 in.
28 28
Note that slab thickness is chosen on basis of deflection control, since flexure and shear probably
won’t govern the design (will be checked later).
Try h = 6.5 in.
Assuming acover of 0.75 in. and No. 4 bars as the slab reinforcement,
d= (
6.5 − 0.75 + 0.5 =
2 )
5.5 in.
10-5
Compute factored loads
Considering a 1-ft wide strip of slab:

6.5
Slab self weight: wDs = × 150 = 81.25 psf
12
Superimposed dead load: wDi = 20 psf
Total dead load: wD= 81.25 + 20= 101.25 psf
Live load: wL = 150 psf
Factored load: wu = 1.2 × 101.25 + 1.6 × 150 = 361.5 psf
Load per foot along design strip = 362 lb/ft
Note that wL < 3wD and we can use the ACI Moment coefficients for the calculation of the
positive and the negative moments (ACI Code Section 8.3.3).
Thickness for flexure
The maximum moment will occur at either:

(1) exterior face of the first interior support, or
(2) face of the middle support
For negative moments at the face of an interior support, ACI Code Section 8.0 defines  n as the
average of the clear spans of the two adjacent spans. Using the appropriate moment coefficient
from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
w  2 361.5 × (14.0 )
2
(1) M u =u n =
10 10
(
× 1
1000) 7.1 kips-ft ft
=
wu  2n 361.5 × (15.0 )
2
(2) M u = =
11 11
(
× 1 )
1000
=7.4 kips-ft ft
For a reinforcing ratio of ρ = 0.01 , which is a reasonable upper limit for a slab, the reinforcing
index can be found from Eq. (5-20),
0.01 × 60000
= ω = 0.171
3500
R 0.171 × 3500 × (1 − 0.59 × 0.171=
= ) 538 psi
7.4
bd 2 ≥ 183 in.3
× 12,000 =
0.9 × 538
183
For
= b 12 in.,
= d = 3.9 in.
12
i.e., min d to keep ρ < 0.01 is d = 3.9 in. Actual
= d 5.5 in.∴ ρ will be less than 0.01 (O.K. for
flexure).
10-6
Thickness for shear
The max shear Vu will occur in one of the two locations discussed for the maximum moments.
Using the appropriate shear coefficient from ACI Code Section 8.3.3,
 13
(1) Vu = 1.15wu n = 1.15 × 362 × = 2710 lbs/ft
2 2
n 15
(2) Vu = 1.0 wu = 1.0 × 362 × = 2720 lbs/ft
2 2
(
Vc 0.75 2 f c' bw=
φ= ) (
d 0.75 2 × 3500 × 12 × 5.5 )
= 5860 lbs/ft ∴ ok for shear
Flexural reinforcement
Max M u = 7.4 kips-ft/ft

 a 
Assuming that  d − ≈ 0.95d  and ε s ≥ ε y , find the required reinforcement for a 1-ft wide strip
 2 
of slab.
M u × 12,000 7.4 × 12,000
As ≈ = = 0.31 in.2 /ft
 a  0.90 × 60,000 × ( 0.95 × 5.5 )
φ fy  d − 
 2 
reinforcement:
As f y 0.31 × 60000
=a = = 0.52 in., c 0.52
= = 0.61 in.
'
0.85 f c b 0.85 × 3500 × 12 0.85
(
0.9 , and
7.4 × 12,000
=As ,red ≈ 0.31 in.2 /ft
 0.52 
0.90 × 60,000 ×  5.5 −
 2 
The minimum reinforcement required by ACI Code Section 10.5.4, is
As ,min
= 0.0018= bh 0.0018 × 12 × 6.5= 0.14 in.2 /ft
The maximum spacing of the bars is, by ACI Code Section 7.6.5,
3h = 19.5 in.
smax =  
 18 in 
0.2 in.2
So use No. 4 bars at 7.5 in. → As =
ft 7.5 in.
( )
× 12 in. = 0.32 in.2
ft
Temperature and shrinkage steel as required by ACI Code Section 7.6.5,
10-7
5h = 27.5 in.
= As ,min 0.0018
= bh 0.14 in.2 /ft and smax =  
 18 in 
2
So provide No. 4 bars at 16 in. → As =
ft
0.2 in.
16 in.
(
× 12 in. = 0.15 in.2
ft )
The flexural reinforcement for the supports and the midspan for all the spans is calculated in the
following table.
Calculation of reinforcement required in the slab.
1. n 13.0 13.0 14.0 15.0 15.0 15.0
2. wu  n 2 ( kips-ft ) 61.1 61.1 70.8 81.3 81.3 81.3
3. Moment Coef. 1 24 1 14 1 10 1 11 1 16 1 11 1 16
4. M u ( kips-ft/ft ) 2.5 4.4 7.1 6.4 5.1 7.4 5.1
5. (
As reqd. in.2 /ft ) 0.10 0.18 0.3 0.21 0.31 0.21
6. (
As ,min in.2 /ft ) 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14 0.14
#4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @ #4 @
7. Reinforcement
16 in. 12 in. 7.5 in. 12 in. 7.5 in. 12 in.
8. (
As provided in.2 /ft ) 0.15 0.20 0.32 0.20 0.32 0.20
Fig. S10-2.1 shows a cross-section of the slab showing the reinforcement. The bar cut-off points
were located using Fig. A-5(c).
Fig. S10-2.1 Slab reinforcement detailing.
10-8
10-3 A three span continuous beam supports 6-in.-thick one-way slabs that span 20 ft
center-to-center of beams. The beams have clear spans, face-to-face of 16-in.-square
columns, of 27, 30, and 27 ft. The floor supports ceiling, ductwork, and lighting fixtures
weighing a total of 8 psf, ceramic floor tile weighting 16 psf, partitions equivalent to a
uniform deal load of 20 psf, and a live load of 100 psf. Design the beam, using f c' = 4500 psi .
Use f y = 60,000 psi for flexural reinforcement and f yt = 40,000 psi for shear reinforcement.
Calculate cut-off points, extending all reinforcement past points of inflection. Draw an
elevation view of the beam and enough cross-sections to summarize the design.
1. Compute the trial factored load on the beam
(a) Dead load
6 in.
slab self-weight: 150 pcf × 75 psf
=
12 in.
ft.
ceiling, tile, partitions: 8 psf + 16 psf + 20 psf = 44 psf
The beam size is not known at this stage, so it must be estimated for preliminary design purposes.
Once the size of the beam has been established, the factored load will be corrected and then used
in subsequent calculations. The beam size will be estimated in step 2.
(b) Live Load
The ASCE/SEI 7-05 recommendations allow live-load reductions based on tributary area
multiplied by a live-load element factor, Κ LL =
2 , to convert the tributary area to an influence
area.
• Positive moment at span AB and negative moment at exterior support, A.
405 ft.2
AT ≅ 15 ft. × 27 ft. =
 15   15 
L=Lo  0.25 + =100 ×  0.25 + =100 × 0.777 =77.7 psf > 0.5 × 100 psf
 K LL AT   2 × 405 
 
10-9
Note that L shall not be less than 0.50 Lo for members supporting one floor (O.K.)
• Negative moment at interior support, B.
AT ≅ 15 ft. × ( 27 + 30 ) ft. =
855 ft.2
 15   15 
• L=Lo  0.25 + =100 ×  0.25 + =100 × 0.613 =61.3 psf > 0.5 × 100 psf (O.K.)
 K LL AT   2 × 855 
 
Positive moment at span BC.

450 ft.2
AT ≅ 15 ft. × 30 ft. =
 15   15 
L =Lo  0.25 +  =100 ×  0.25 +  =100 × 0.75 =75.0 psf > 0.5 × 100 psf (O.K.)
 K LL AT   2 × 450 
 
The size of the beam will be chosen on the basis of negative moment at the first interior support.
For this location, the factored load on the beam, not including the beam stem below the slab, is:
wu = 1.2 × ( 75 + 44 ) + 1.6 × 61.3 = 241 psf
The tributary width for the beam is 15 ft and the factored load from the slab per foot of beam is
241 psf × 15
= = 3.6 kips
ft. 3,615 lbs
ft ft
Two approximate methods can be used to estimate the weight of the beam stem:
(a) the factored dead load of the stem is taken as 12 to 20 percent of the other factored loads
on the beam. This gives 0.43 to 0.72 kip/ft.
(b) the overall depth of beam h is taken to be 1/18 to 1/12 of the larger span,  , and bw is
taken to be 0.5h . This gives the overall h as 20 to 30 in., with the stem extending 14 to 24 in.
below the slab, and gives bw as 10 to 15 in. The factored load of such sizes ranges from 0.17 to
0.45 kip/ft.
As a first trial, assume the factored weight of the stem to be 0.50 kip/ft. Then,
total trial load per foot = 3.6 + 0.5 = 4.1 kip/ft
2. Estimate the size of the beam stem
(a) Calculate the minimum depth based on deflections.
ACI Table 9.5(a) (Table A-9) gives the minimum depths, unless deflections are checked. For
partitions flexible enough to undergo some deflection, minimum depth for beam BC is
 16 in.
hmin = , where  = the span center-to-center of supports =27 ft + =28.3 ft
18.5 12 in.
ft
28.3 × 12
Thus,
= hmin = 18.4 in.
18.5
10-10
(b) Determine the minimum depth based on the negative moment at the exterior face of the
first interior support.
The beam fits the requirements in ACI Code Section 8.3.3 and can use the moment and shear
coefficients. For the support at B,
wu  2n 4.1 × ( 28.5 )
2
Mu =
= = 333 kips-ft
10 10
27 ft + 30 ft
where  n = 28.5 ft (the average of the two adjacent spans).
=
2
Using the procedure developed in Chapter 5 for the design of singly reinforced beam sections, the
reinforcement ratio that will result in a tension-controlled section can be estimated from
Eq. (5-18) as,
β1 f c' 0.825 × 4.5
ρ ( initial ) ≅ = = 0.0155
4 fy 4 × 60
For this reinforcement ratio, use Eq. (5-20), to find the reinforcing index,
0.0155 × 60
= ω = 0.207
4.5
=R 0.207 × 4500 × (1 − 0.59 × 0.207= ) 818 psi
333
bd 2 ≥ × 12,000 =5430 in.3
0.9 × 818
Since columns are 16 in., try a 14 or 16 in. wide stem. Let’s try b = 14 in.
5428
Then,= d = 19.7 in. → = d 21.5 in.
14
With one layer of steel at supports, h ≅ 21.5 + 2.5 =24 in. (O.K. for deflections).
So, try a 14-in. wide-by-24-in. beam.
(c) Check the shear capacity of the beam
Maximum shear is at the exterior face at support B,

1.15 × wu  n 1.15 × 4.1 × 27
= Vu ,max = = 63.6 kips
2 2
From ACI Code Section 11.2.1.1,
(
Vc = 2λ f c' bw d = 2 × 1 × 4500 × 14 × 21.5 × 1
1000 )
= 40.4 kips
ACI Code Section 11.4.7.9 sets the maximum nominal Vs is
(
Vs =8 f c' bw d =8 × 4500 × 14 × 21.5 × 1
1000 )
=162 kips
Thus, φVn = 0.75 × ( 40.4 + 161) = 151 kips (O.K. for shear)
10-11
(d) Summary
b = 14 in.
Use : h = 24 in. (18 in. below slab )
d = 21.5 in.,assuming one layer of steel
3. Compute the dead load of the stem, and recompute the total load per foot.
18 × 14
Weight per foot of the stem below slab =
0.15 × = 0.26 kip/ft
144
Corrected total factored load for 1st internal support moment: = 3.6 + 1.2 × ( 0.26 ) = 3.9 kip/ft
Since this is less that the 4.1 kip/ft used earlier to estimate the beam size, the section chosen will
be adequate.
Factored Total dead load:

(
wD = 1.2 × 119 × 15 × 1
1000 )
+ 0.26 = 2.5 kips/ft
Factored total loads:
(a) Positive moment at span AB and negative moment at exterior support, A.

(
wu = 2.5 + 1.6 × 77.7 × 15 × 1
1000 )
= 4.4 kips/ft
(b) Negative moment at interior support, B.
(
wu = 2.5 + 1.6 × 61.3 × 15 × 1
1000 )
= 4.0 kips/ft
(c) Positive moment at span BC.
(
wu = 2.5 + 1.6 × 75.0 × 15 × 1
1000 )
= 4.3 kips/ft
4. Calculate the beam flange width for positive-moment regions
From ACI Code Section 8.12.2,
 0.25 n ( based on the shorter span for simplicity ) = 0.25 × ( 27 × 12 ) in. = 81 in. 
 
be ≤  bw + 2 ( 8 × 6 ) = 14 + 2 ( 8 × 6 ) = 110 in. 

 (15 × 12 ) 180
= in. 

Therefore, the effective flange width is 81 in. and shown in Fig. S10-3.1
Fig. S10-3.1 Beam cross-section
10-12
5. Can we use the ACI Code Moment Coefficients?
• Ratio of successive spans = 30 ft. / 27 ft. = 1.11<1.20 O.K. ;

Live load/ft 0.1 × 15
• = = 0.6 < 3.0 O.K. ;
Dead load/ft 2.5
• There are more than two spans;
• The loads are uniformly distributed.
Thus, we can use the ACI Code Moment Coefficients
6. Compute the beam moments
 n , ft. 27.0 27.0 28.5 30.0

wu , kip/ft. 4.4 4.4 4.0 4.3
wu  2n , kips-ft 3210 3210 3250 3870
Cm −1 1 − 1 and − 1 1
16 14 10 11 16
M u = Cm wu  2n , kips-ft -200 230 -325 242
7. Design the flexural reinforcement
(a) Max negative moment (first interior support)
Max M u_,max = 325 kips-ft

Because the beam acts as a rectangular beam with compression in the web, we can assume that
 a 
 d − 2 ≈ 0.90d  .For ε s ≥ ε y and φ =0.9 , the required reinforcement for that section is,
 
M u × 12,000 325 × 12,000
As ≈= = 3.73 in.2
 a  0.90 × 60,000 × ( 0.90 × 21.5 )
φ fy  d − 
 2
reinforcement:
As f y 3.73 × 60000
=a = = 4.18 in., c 4.18
= = 5.07 in.
'
0.85 f c b 0.85 × 4500 × 14 0.825
10-13
(
0.9 , and
325 × 12,000
=As ,red = 3.72 in.2
 4.18 
0.90 × 60,000 ×  21.5 −
 2 
The other negative moment sections have a lower design moment, so it will be conservative to
A
use the ratio of s obtained here to quickly determine the area of tension steel required at
Mu
those other locations. That ratio is
As 3.72 in.2
= = 0.0114 in.2 /kips-ft
M u 325 kips-ft
( ) (eq. A)
(b) Max positive moment
Max M u+,max = 242 kips-ft
Because the beam acts as a T-shape beam with compression in the top flange, assume that the
 a 
6 in. , use  d − ≈ 0.95d  .For ε s ≥ ε y and φ =0.9 ,
compression zone is rectangular, i.e. a < h f =
 2 
the required reinforcement that section is,
M u × 12,000 242 × 12,000

As ≈= = 2.63 in.2
 a  0.90 × 60,000 × ( 0.95 × 21.5 )
φ fy  d − 
 2
reinforcement:
As f y 2.63 × 60000
=a = = 0.51 in., c 0.51
= = 0.62 in.
'
0.85 f c be 0.85 × 4500 × 81 0.825
(
Cleary the section is tension controlled ∴ ε s ≥ ε y ,φ = )
0.9 , and doing one iteration for the
2
negative moment section results in As = 2.53 in.
The other positive moment section has a lower design moment, so it will be conservative to use
A
the ratio of s obtained here to quickly determine the area of tension steel required at those
Mu
other locations. That ratio is
As 2.53 in.2
= = 0.0104 in.2 /kips-ft
M u 242 kips-ft
( ) (eq. B)
10-14
(c) Calculate the minimum reinforcement
3 f c' 200bw d
From ACI Code Section=
10.5.1, As ,min bw d and ≥ .
fy fy
For 4500 psi concrete, 3 f c' = 201 psi , thus
3 4500
As ,min
= 14 × 21.5=1.0 in.2
60,000
(d) Calculate the area of steel and select the bars.
The remaining calculations are done in the following table.
M u , kips-ft -200 230 -325 242

As coef. Eq. A and B 0.0114 0.0104 0.0114 0.0104
As ( red .) ,in.2 2.28 2.39 3.70 2.52
As > As.min Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 No. 8 and 3 No. 7 and
Bars selected 4 No. 7 4 No. 7
4 No. 7 2 No.6
As provided, in.2 2.40 2.40 3.98 2.68
bw ( 14 in.) > bmin
= − Yes − Yes
Note that in the negative moment regions some of the bars can be placed in the slab besides the
beam and it is not necessary to check whether they will fit into the web width.
8. Check the distribution of the reinforcement
(a) Positive moment region
From ACI Code Section 10.6.4, the maximum bar spacing is

 40,000   40,000 
= s 15   − 2.5cc ≤ 12   , where
 fs   fs 
fs =2 f = 40,000 psi and cc = 1.5 in. cover + 0.375 in. stirrups =
1.875 in.
3 y
Thus, s =15 − 2.5 × 1.875 =10.3 in. ≤ 12 in.
10-15
14 −  2 × (1.5 + 0.375 ) + 7 
=Bar spacing =  8  3.1 in. <10.3 in. OK.
3
It was also clear that the bar spacing is smaller than 10.3 in., since there are four bars and
bw = 14 in.
(b) Negative moment region
ACI Code Section 10.6.6 says “part” of the negative moment steel shall be distributed over a
width equal to the smaller of the effective flange width (81 in.) and  n 10 = 34.2 in. At the
interior supports, there are 6 top bars. Place the two No. 8 bars at the corners of the stirrups, two
No. 7 bars over the beam web, and the other two No. 7 bars in the slab. Within a width of 34.2
in. we must place six bars. These cannot be further apart than 10.3 in. (as calculated in part a).
We shall arbitrarily place two bars at 5 in. outside the web of the beam.
ACI Code Section 10.6.6 requires “some” longitudinal reinforcement in the slab outside this
band. We shall assume that the shrinkage and temperature steel in the slab will satisfy this
requirement.
9. Design the shear reinforcement
The shear force diagrams are calculated in the following table and shown at the bottom of the
table. The shear coefficients for the supports are from ACI Code Section 8.3.3 and the coefficient
fro the midspan of the beam is based on Eq. (6-26).
 n ,ft 27 30
wu , kips/ft 4.4 4.3
wLu , kips/ft 1.9 1.8
Cv at support
1.0 0.125 1.15 1.0 0.125 1.0
and midpsan
wu  n 2 59.4 59.4 64.5 64.5
wLu  n 51.3 54
Vu , kips 59.4 6.4 68.3 64.5 6.7 64.5
Vn = Vu φ 79.2 8.5 91.1 86.0 8.9 86.0
10-16
(a) Exterior end of beam AB
Because the beam is supported by a column, the critical section is located at d away from the face
of the support.
Equation for Vu φ : Vu φ ( kips ) =

−5.24 x ( ft ) + 79.2
 21.5 in. 
Vu φ ( @ d from A ) = −5.24 ×   + 79.2 =69.8 kips
 12 in. 
 ft 
Vc = 2 × 1 × 4500 × 14 × 21.5 × 1 (
1000 ) V
= 40.4 kips , c = 20.2 kips
2
Vu Vc
Because = 69.8 kips exceeds = 20.2 kips , stirrups are required.
φ 2
Try No. 3 Grade 40 stirrups double-leg stirrups with a 90o hook Av = ( 0.22 in.2
2 × 0.11 = )
Vu
• Max spacing: − Vc ≤ 4 f c' bw d and from ACI Code Section 11.4.5.1,
φ
d 
 = 10.75 in. 
smax ≤ 2 → 10.75 in.
 
 24 in. 
• To satisfy the minimum stirrup requirement in ACI Code Section 11.4.6.3, the stirrup spacing
must be,
Av f yt 0.22 × 40,000
smax ≤ = = 12.6 in.
50bw 50 × 14
Note that 0.75 4500 = 50.3 psi > 50 psi, so use 50 psi in ACI Code Eq. (11-13) .
Thus, use 10.5 in. as maximum stirrup spacing.
The spacing required to support the shear force at the support is,
•
( 0.22 × 40 ) × 21.5
=s = 6.45 in.-say 6 in. on centers
69.8 − 40.4
V 0.22 × 40 × 21.5
We can change the stirrup spacing to 10.5 in. = when u = + 40.4 58.4 kips
ϕ 10.5
This occurs at about 4 ft from face of support A.
V V
We can stop the stirrups when u = c ⇒ x = 11.3 ft from face of support A.
ϕ 2
Place the first stirrup at 3 in. from support A, then 9 stirrups at 6 in. and 9 stirrups at 10.5 in.
10-17
(b) Interior end of beam AB

−6.12 x ( ft ) + 91.1
 21.5 in.  V
Vu φ ( @ d from B ) = −6.12 ×   + 91.1 =
80.1 kips > c ,stirrups required
 12 in.  2
 ft 
The spacing required to at this point is,
( 0.22 × 40 ) × 21.5
= s = 4.8 in.-say 4.5 in. on centers
80.1 − 40.4
V
Change the stirrup spacing to 10.5 in. when u = 58.4 kips .
ϕ
This occurs at 5.3 ft from face of support B.
We can stop the stirrups at 11.6 ft from face of support B.
Place the first stirrup at 2 in. from support B, then 15 stirrups at 4.5 in. and 9 stirrups at 10.5 in.
(c) Ends of beam BC

−5.14 x ( ft ) + 86.0
 21.5 in.  V
Vu φ ( @ d from C ) = −5.14 ×   + 86 =76.8 kips > c ,stirrups required
 12 in.  2
 ft 
The spacing required to at this point is,
( 0.22 × 40 ) × 21.5
= s = 5.2 in.-say 5.0 in. on centers
76.8 − 40.4
V
Change the stirrup spacing to 10.5 in. when u = 58.4 kips .
ϕ
This occurs at 5.4 ft from face of support.
We can stop the stirrups at 12.8 ft from face of support.
Place the first stirrup at 2.5 in. from support B, then 14 stirrups at 4.5 in. and 9 stirrups at 10.5 in.
10. Bar cutoffs
d = 21.5 in.
(a) Detailing requirements: 12db = 12 in. for No. 8 bar
n
= 20.25 in. for 27 ft span, 22.5 in. for 30 ft span
16
 
Thus, d exceeds 12db and n for AB span, while n governs for span BC.
16 16
The bottom and top bars have clear spacing and cover of at least db and are enclosed by at least
minimum stirrups. Therefore, this is Case 1 in Table 8-1 (ACI Code Section 12.2.2).
10-18
33.5 in. for No. 6 
f yψ tψ e 60,000 × 1.0 × 1.0 × db  
=d = db = 44.7 db → 39.1 in. for No. 7 
20λ f c '
20 × 1 4500 44.7 in. for No. 8
 
(b) Cutoffs for bottom steel
Span AB
4 No. 7-Extend 2 full length into each support, cut off the other two at the positive moment point
of inflection so that extra stirrups are not required.
Exterior end: From Fig. A-2, inflection point at ( 0.10 × 27 × 12 ) =32.4 in. from face of column.
Rule 3-a - Extend d = 21.5 in. past the flexural cutoff point, i.e. 32.4 in.-21.5 in = 10.9 in. from
face of column at A. Say 10 in.
Rule 4-a - Distance from midspan to cutoff point greater than  d .
Rule 1-b - This is an interior beam with open stirrups. Since this is a discontinuous end use 90
deg. standard hooks on 2 No. 7 bars.
Rule 4-d – At the inflection point, the remaining steel is two No. 7, As = 1.2 in.2 Thus,
1.2 × 60
=a = 1.57 in.
0.85 × 4.5 × 12
 1.57 
M n = 1.2 × 60 ×  21.5 −  =1490 kip-in=124 kip-ft
 2 
The shear at 32.4 in. from the exterior end is,
 32.4 
Vu = −5.24 ×   + 79.2 = 65 kips
 12 
 a = 21.5 in.
M 1490
Thus, n +  a= + 21.5= 44.4 in.
Vu 65
This exceeds  d - therefore, OK.
Interior end: From Fig. A-2, inflection point at ( 0.104 × 27 × 12 ) =

33.7 in. from face of column
Rule 3-a - Extend bars to 33.7 in.- 21.5 in. = 12.2 in. from face of column. Use 10 in. to match
other end.
Rule 4-a - Satisfied
Rule 1-b - This is an interior beam with open stirrups. Rule 1-b applies. Lap splice 2#7 bars from
the exterior span with 2 No. 7 bars from the interior span with a Class A tension lap splice
=1.0 × 39.1 in. =3 ft - 2 in.
Rule 4-d
M n = 1490 kip-in=124 kip-ft
 33.7 
Vu = −6.12 ×   + 91.1 =
73.9 kips
 12 
 a = 21.5 in.
M 1490
Thus, n +  a= + 21.5= 41.7 in.
Vu 73.9
10-19
Span BC
2 No. 8 and 3 No. 7 at midspan – Extend 2 No. 7 into supports. Cutoff 2 No. 8 and 1 No. 7 bars at
the positive moment point of inflection so that extra stirrups are not required. Inflection point at
( 0.146 × 30 × 12 ) =
52.6 in. from face of column
n
Rule 3-a - Extend = 22.5 in. past the flexural cutoff point, i.e. 52.6 in.-22.5 in. = 30.1 in.
16
from face of column. Say 30 in.
Rule 4-a - Satisfied.
Rule 1-b – Lap splice 2#7 bars 3 ft - 2 in at support
Rule 4-d
M n = 2650 kip-in=221 kip-ft
 52.6 
Vu = −5.14 ×   + 86 =
63.5 kips
 12 
 a = 21.5 in.
M 2650
Thus, n +  = a + 21.5= 63.3 in.
Vu 63.5
Cutoffs for top steel

Span AB, exterior end, 4 No. 7
0.02 × 1.0 × 60,000
Use standard=
hook,  dh = × ( 0.75 ) 13.4 in.
1.0 × 4500
Set tail cover = 2 in., then  dh =0.7 × 13.4 =9.4 in. . This is OK in a 16 in. column.
Negative moment point of inflection at ( 0.164 × 27 × 12 ) =
53.1 in.
Rule 3-b - Extend d to 53.1+21.5 = 74.6 in. Cutoff at 75 in. = 6 ft-3 in. from face of column.
Rule 4-b - Since 75 in. > 39.1 in. Rule 2 is satisfied.
Span AB, interior end, 2 No. 8 and 4 No. 7 bars

Point of inflection at ( 0.24 × 27 × 12 ) =
77.8 in.
Rule 3-b - Extend d to 77.8+21.5 = 99.3 in. Say 8 ft.-4 in. from face of column
Rule 4-b – Since 100 in. > 44.7 in. Rule 2 is satisfied.
Span BC, 2 No. 8 and 4 No. 7 bars

Negative moment point of inflection at ( 0.24 × 30 × 12 ) =86.4 in.
Rule 3-b – Extend to 108.9 in. Say 9 ft- 1 in, from face of column
Rule 4-b – OK
Since all cutoffs are past points of inflection, they are not in zones of flexural tension, therefore
extra stirrups are not needed.
Provide 2 No. 4 top bars as stirrup support, lab splice with negative moment steel.
10-20
Fig. S10-3.2 Beam reinforcing detailing.
10-21
10-4 Repeat Problem 10-3, but cut off up to 50 percent of the negative- and positive-
moment bars in each span where they are no longer required.
Bat cutoff for positive moment steel in AB span
Flexural reinforcement: 4#7 bars
Extend two bars full length and into each support, cutoff the other two where they no longer
required ( 50% of M u ) .
From Fig. A-2, flexural cutoff point is at 0.21 n = 0.21 × ( 27 × 12 ) = 68 in. from exterior end
(support A), and 0.22 n = 0.22 × ( 27 × 12 ) = 71 in. from interior end (support B).
Rule 3-a: Extend d = 21.5 in. past the flexural cutoff point
68 in. − 21.5 in. =46.5 in. from exterior end
49.5 in. from interior end
71 in. − 21.5 in. =
Rule 4-a: Distance between midspan to cutoff point =

46.5 115.5 
=13.5 × 12 in. −   in. =  in.
49.5  112.5 
115.5
 d for #7
= bar 39.1 in. <   in.
112.5
Bar cutoff for negative moment steel
Flexural reinforcement: 2#8 and 4#7 bars
AB span, interior end

From Fig. A-2, flexural cutoff point is at 0.104 n= 0.104 × ( 27 × 12 )= 34 in.
Rule 3-b: Extend d = 21.5 in. past the flexural cutoff point
34 in.+ 21.5 in. = 55.5 in.
Rule 4-b:  d for #7 top bar = 39.1 in.< 55.5 in.
Therefore, use 55.5 in. for cutoff point.
BC span
From Fig. A-1, flexural cutoff point is at 0.1 n = 0.1 × ( 30 × 12 ) = 36 in.
Rule 3-b: Extend d = 22.5 in. past the flexural cutoff point
36 in.+ 22.5 in. = 58.5 in.
Rule 4-b:  d for #7 top bar = 39.1 in.< 58.5 in.
Therefore, use 58.5 in. for cutoff point.
10-5 Explain the reason for the two live-load patterns specified in ACI Section 8.11.2
Live load patterns are arranged to maximize the moments and shears in beams and columns at
various sections due to gravity loading.
10-22
Chapter 11
11-1 The column shown in Fig. P11-1 is made of 4000 psi concrete and Grade-60 steel.
a) Compute the theoretical capacity of the column for pure axial load.
First compute the gross area of the section, and the area of steel in the column.
Ag = 18 in × 18 in = 324 in 2
Ast =6 Ab = 6 × 1.0 in 2 = 6 in 2
Now we can compute the theoretical capacity of the column.
( )
Po = 0.85 f 'c ( Ag − Ast ) + f y A st = 0.85 × 4 ksi × 324 in 2 − 6 in 2 + 60 ksi × 6 in 2 = 1440 k
b) Compute the maximum permissible φ Pn for the column.
φ Pn ,max = 0.80φ Po = 0.80 × 0.65 × 1440 k = 749 k

Note that the factors 0.80 and 0.65 would change to 0.85 and 0.75 for spiral columns.
11-2 Why does a spiral improve the behavior of a column?
As any column is loaded, and thus shortened, the concrete will expand laterally. When this
expansion occurs, transverse reinforcement is engaged and will tend to react against any further
expansion of the concrete within the core. This results in a state of tri-axial compression within the
core of the column, which significantly improves both strength and ductility.
The circular spiral is much more effective than tied reinforcement at confining this
expansion for two reasons. First, spirals are often spaced more closely together than tied stirrups,
so the confinement is more uniformly applied to the core. Second, the confinement stresses are
transformed directly into hoop stresses in the spiral, which is a much more efficient mechanism for
reacting to the core’s expansion than the straight legs of tied stirrups can provide (see section 11-2).
11-3 Compute the balanced axial load and moment capacity of the column shown in
Fig. P11-1. Use f’ c = 4000 psi and f y = 60,000 psi.
Assume bending around an axis parallel to the two layers of steel. To calculate the
balanced point of the interaction diagram, set the extreme compression fiber strain to ε c = 0.003 and
to ε y f=
the extreme steel tensile strain = y / E 60 ksi / 29,000
= ksi 0.00207 .
Begin by calculating the depth of the compression zone:
εc
=c ×d
ε c −ε y
0.003  1.128 in 
=c × 18 in − 1.5 in − 0.375 in − 
0.003 − ( −0.00207 )  2 
c = 9.21 in
a= β1c = 0.85 × 9.21 in = 7.83 in
Now calculate the strain and stress in each layer of steel:
ε s1 = 0.00207
f s1 = 60 ksi
Fig. S11-3
11-1
c−d' 9.21 in − (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 1.128 in / 2 )
ε=
s2 × ε=
c × 0.003
= 0.00221
c 9.21 in
 60 ksi
f s 2 = smaller of 
 Eε s 2= 29,000 ksi × 0.00221= 64.1 ksi
Calculate the force in the concrete and in each layer of steel:

Cc =0.85 f 'c ab =0.85 × 4 ksi × 7.83 in × 18 in = 479 k
Fs1 = As1 f s1 = 3 in 2 × −60 ksi = −180 k
Fs 2 = As 2 ( f s 2 − 0.85 f 'c ) = 3 in 2 × ( 60 ksi − 0.85 × 4 ksi ) = 170 k
Now we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment at the balanced point:
Pn = Cc + Fs 2 + Fs1 = 479 k + 170 k − 180 k = 469 k
h a h  h 
M=n Cc  −  + Fs1  − d  + Fs 2  − d ' 
 2 2   2   2 
 18 in 7.83 in   in
18   18 in 
M n =479 k ×  −  − 180 k ×  − 15.56 in  + 170 k ×  − 2.44 in 
 2 2   2   2 
=M n 4730
= k-in 394 k-ft
And, since ε s1 = ε y , the section is compression controlled, and φ = 0.65 .

φ Pn =0.65 × 469 k =305 k
φMn = 0.65 × 394 k-ft =
256 k-ft
11-4 For the column shown in Fig. P11-4, use a strain-compatibility solution to compute
five points on the interaction diagram corresponding to points 1 to 5 in Fig. 11-22.
Plot the interaction diagram. Use f’ c = 5000 psi and f y = 60,000 psi.
Begin by calculating the depth and area of each layer of steel, and other constants.
d1 =18 in − 1.5 in − 0.375 in − 1.128 in / 2 =15.56 in
A1 = 3 × 1.0 in 2 =
3 Ab = 3.0 in 2
d 2 h=
= / 2 18 in=
/ 2 9.0 in A2 = 2 × 1.0 in 2 =
2 Ab = 2.0 in 2
d3 =
1.5 in + 0.375 in + 1.128 in / 2 =
2.44 in A3 = 3 × 1.0 in 2 =
3 Ab = 3.0 in 2
Ag =hb =
18 in × 18 in =324 in 2 Ast = 8 × 1.0 in 2 =
8 Ab = 8.0 in 2
β1 = 0.80
Point 1: Pure Axial Load:

Po = 0.85 f 'c ( Ag − Ast ) + f y Ast = 0.85 × 5 ksi × (324 in 2 − 8 in 2 ) + 60 ksi × 8 in 2 = 1830 k
Note that this 0.85 is k 3 , not β 1 .
Since the column is compression controlled, φ = 0.65 .
φ Pn = 0.65 × 1830 k = 1190 k
φ Pn ,max = 0.80 × 0.65 × 1830 k = 949 k
φ M n =0.65 × 0 k-ft =0 k-ft
11-2
Point 2: Zero tension on one face:
c= h= 18 in
a =β1c =0.80 × 18 in = 14.4 in

c − d1 18 in − 15.56 in
ε=s1 × ε=
c × 0.003
= 0.00041
c 18 in
 60 ksi
f s1 = smaller of 
 Eε s1= 29,000 ksi × 0.00041= 11.9 ksi
c − d2 18 in − 9 in
ε=
s2 × ε=
c × 0.003
= 0.00150
c 18 in
 60 ksi
 Eε s 2= 29,000 ksi × 0.00150= 43.5 ksi
c − d3 18 in − 2.44 in
ε=s3 × ε=
c × 0.003
= 0.00259
c 18 in
 60 ksi
 Eε s 3= 29,000 ksi × 0.00259= 75.1 ksi

Cc = 0.85 f 'c ab = 0.85 × 5 ksi × 14.4 in × 18 in =1100 k
Fs1 = As1 ( f s1 − 0.85 f 'c ) = 3 in 2 × (11.9 ksi − 0.85 × 5 ksi ) = 23.0 k
Fs 2 = As 2 ( f s 2 − 0.85 f 'c ) = 2 in 2 × ( 43.5 ksi − 0.85 × 5 ksi ) = 78.5 k
and, since d3 ≥ a ,
Fs 3 =As 3 f s 3 =3 in 2 × 60 ksi =180 k
Now we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment:

Pn =Cc + Fs1 + Fs 2 + Fs 3 =1100 k + 23.0 k + 78.5 k + 180 k =1380 k
h a h  h  h 
M n = Cc  −  + Fs1  − d1  + Fs 2  − d 2  + Fs1  − d3 
2 2 2  2  2 
 14.4 in 
M n = 1100 k ×  9 in −  + 23.0 k × ( 9 in − 15.56 in ) + 78.5 k × ( 9 in − 9 in ) + 180 k × ( 9 in − 2.44 in )
 2 
= M n 3010 = k-in 251 k-ft
And, since ε s1 is in compression, the section is compression controlled, and φ = 0.65 .
φ Pn = 0.65 × 1380 k = 897 k
φMn = 0.65 × 251 k-ft = 163 k-ft
11-3
Point 3: Balanced Point:
εc 0.003
= c d1
×= × 15.56=
in 9.21 in
ε c −ε y 0.003 − ( −0.00207 )
β1c =
a= 0.80 × 9.21 in =
7.37 in

c−d 9.21 in − 15.56 in
ε s1 = 1 × ε c = × 0.003 =−0.00207
c 9.21 in
 −60 ksi
 Eε s1 = 29,000 ksi × −0.00207 = −60 ksi
c − d2 9.21 in − 9 in
ε=
s2 × ε=
c × 0.003
= 0.00007
c 9.21 in
 60 ksi
 Eε s 2= 29,000 ksi × 0.00007= 1.98 ksi
c − d3 9.21 in − 2.44 in
ε=s3 × ε=
c × 0.003
= 0.00221
c 9.21 in
 60 ksi
 Eε s 3= 29,000 ksi × 0.00221= 64.1 ksi

Cc = 0.85 f 'c ab = 0.85 × 5 ksi × 7.37 in × 18 in = 564 k
Fs1 = As1 f s1 = 3 in 2 × −60 ksi = −180 k
and, since d 2 ≥ a ,
Fs 2 = 2 in 2 × 1.98 ksi =
As 2 f s 2 = 3.96 k
Fs 3 = As 3 ( f s 3 − 0.85 f 'c ) = 3 in 2 × ( 60 ksi − 0.85 × 5 ksi ) = 167 k
Now we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment at the balanced point.
Pn =Cc + Fs1 + Fs 2 + Fs 3 =564 k − 180 k + 3.96 k + 167 k =555 k
h a h  h  h 
M n = Cc  −  + Fs1  − d1  + Fs 2  − d 2  + Fs1  − d3 
2 2 2  2  2 
 7.37 in 
M n = 564 k ×  9 in −  − 180 k × ( 9 in − 15.56 in ) + 3.96 k × ( 9 in − 9 in ) + 167 k × ( 9 in − 2.44 in )
 2 
=M n 5280
= k-in 440 k-ft
And, since ε s1 = ε y , the section is compression controlled, and φ = 0.65 .

φ Pn =0.65 × 546 k =355 k
φMn = 0.65 × 440 k-ft =
286 k-ft
11-4
Point 4: Tension control limit
εc 0.003
= c d1
×= × 15.56=
in 5.84 in
ε c −ε s1 0.003 − ( −0.005 )
β1c =
a= 0.80 × 5.84 in =
4.67 in

c−d 5.84 in − 15.56 in
ε s1 = 1 × ε c = × 0.003 =−0.00500
c 5.84 in
 −60 ksi
 Eε s1 = 29,000 ksi × −0.00500 = −145 ksi
c − d2 5.84 in − 9 in
ε s2 = × εc = × 0.003 = −0.00162
c 5.84 in
 −60 ksi
 Eε s 2 = 29,000 ksi × −0.00162 = −47.1 ksi
c − d3 5.84 in − 2.44 in
ε=
s3 × ε=
c × 0.003
= 0.00175
c 5.84 in
 60 ksi
 Eε s 2= 29,000 ksi × 0.00175= 50.8 ksi

Cc = 0.85 f 'c ab = 0.85 × 5 ksi × 4.67 in × 18 in = 357 k
Fs1 = As1 f s1 = 3 in 2 × −60 ksi = −180 k
Fs 2 = 2 in 2 − 47.1 ksi =
As 2 f s 2 = −94.2 k
Fs 3 = As 3 ( f s 3 − 0.85 f 'c ) = 3 in 2 × ( 50.8 ksi − 0.85 × 5 ksi ) = 140 k
Now we can calculate the nominal axial load and moment at the balanced point.
Pn =Cc + Fs1 + Fs 2 + Fs 3 =357 k − 180 k − 94.2 k + 140 k =223 k
h a h  h  h 
M n = Cc  −  + Fs1  − d1  + Fs 2  − d 2  + Fs1  − d3 
2 2 2  2  2 
 4.67 in 
M n = 357 k ×  9 in −  − 180 k × ( 9 in − 15.56 in ) − 94.2 k × ( 9 in − 9 in ) + 140 k × ( 9 in − 2.44 in )
 2 
= M n 4480= k-in 373 k-ft
And, since ε s1 = 0.005 , the section is tension controlled, and φ = 0.9 .

φ Pn = 0.9 × 223 k = 201 k
φMn = 0.9 × 373 k-ft = 336 k-ft
11-5
Point 5: Pure Tension
Pn = Ast f y = 8in 2 × −60 ksi = −480 k
M n = 0 k-ft
And, since the section is in pure tension, it is tension controlled, and φ = 0.9 .
φ Pn = 0.9 × −480 k = −432 k
φMn = 0.9 × 0 k-ft =0 k-ft
2000
1500
Axial Load (kip)
1000
500
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
Moment (k-ft)
-500
Fig. S11-4
11-5 Write a program or develop a spreadsheet to solve for points on an interaction

diagram for rectangular columns with up to 6 layers of steel.
No solution is given, since any number of programs or spreadsheets could work depending
on the selected hardware/software platform.
11-6
11-6 Use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to compute the maximum moment, M u ,
that can be supported by the column shown in Fig. P11-1 if (Use f’ c = 5000 psi and
f y = 60 ksi):
(a) P u = 583 kips.
Calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams:

Ast 6 × 1.0 in 2
ρ=g = = 0.0185
Ag 18 in × 18 in
d − d ' (18 in − 1.5 in − 0.375 in − 1.128 in / 2 ) − (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 1.128 in / 2 )
=γ = = 0.729
h 18 in
φ Pn Pu 583 k
= = = 1.80 ksi
bh bh 18 in × 18 in
Now go to the interaction diagrams:

φMn
From A-7a: = 0.46 ksi for γ = 0.60
bh 2
φMn
From A-7b: = 0.50 ksi for γ = 0.75
bh 2
φM
By interpolation for γ = 0.729 , 2n = 0.49 ksi
bh
Finally, we can compute the maximum moment carried by this section:

M u =φ M n =0.49bh 2 =0.49 × 18 in × (18 in ) = 2860 k-in = 238 k-ft
2
(b) P u = 130 kips.

Ast 6 × 1.0 in 2
ρ=g = = 0.0185
Ag 18 in × 18 in
=γ = = 0.729
h 18 in
φ Pn Pu 130 k
= = = 0.40 ksi

φMn
From A-7a: = 0.48 ksi for γ = 0.60
bh 2
φMn
From A-7b: = 0.55 ksi for γ = 0.75
bh 2
φM
bh

M u =φ M n =0.54bh 2 =0.54 × 18 in × (18 in ) =3150 k-in = 262 k-ft
2
11-7
(c) e = 4 in.

Ast 6 × 1.0 in 2
ρ=g = = 0.0185
Ag 18 in × 18 in
=γ = = 0.729
h 18 in
e 4 in
= = 0.222 ksi
h 18 in

φMn
From A-7a: = 0.42 ksi for γ = 0.60
bh 2
φMn
From A-7b: = 0.44 ksi for γ = 0.75
bh 2
φM
bh

M u =φ M n =0.44bh 2 =0.44 × 18 in × (18 in ) = 2570 k-in = 214 k-ft
2
11-7 Use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to select tied-column cross sections to
support the loads given in the accompanying list. In each case, use f’ c = 4000 psi and
f y = 60,000 psi. Design ties. Calculate the required splice lengths, assuming that the
bars extending up from the column below are the same diameter as in the column you
have designed, and draw a typical cross section of the column, showing the bars and
ties.
(a) P u = 390 kips, M u = 220 k-ft, square column with bars in two faces.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, assume ρ g = 0.02 .
Pu 390 k
Ag ,trial ≥ = 188 in 2 =
= 13.7 in × 13.7 in
0.40 ( f 'c + f y ρ g ) 0.40 × ( 4 ksi + 60 ksi × 0.02 )
So try a 14 in square column, assuming #3 stirrups and #8 bars.
Then calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
14 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.5 in )
γ = 0.66
14 in
φ Pn Pu 390 k
= = = 1.99 ksi
φ M n M u 220 k-ft × 12 in/ft
= = = 0.962 ksi
14 in × (14 in )
2
bh 2 bh 2
From A-6a and A-6b, the section would require ρ g  0.04 , so a larger section is required.
11-8
Therefore we will try a square column with 18 in sides. Re-calculate the parameters required to use
the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select an appropriate reinforcement ratio:
18 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.5 in )
γ = 0.736
18 in
φ Pn Pu 390 k
= = = 1.20 ksi
= = = 0.453 ksi
18 in × (18 in )
2
bh 2 bh 2
From A-6a: ρ g = 0.021 ksi for γ = 0.60
From A-6b: ρ g = 0.016 ksi for γ = 0.75
By interpolation for γ = 0.736 , ρ g = 0.017 ksi
Finally, we can compute the area of steel required to reinforce this section:
As , required = 0.017bh = 0.017 × 18 in × 18 in = 5.51 in 2
Now select the bars:

8#8 bars = 6.32 in 2 fits in an 18 in section
2
10 #7 bars = 6.00 in fits in an 18 in section
2
14 #6 bars = 6.16 in fits in an 18 in section
Select #7 bars, placing 5 along the top and bottom faces.
As indicated on the interaction diagrams, f s ≥ 0.5 f y in the extreme tensile layer of steel. Therefore,
Class B tension splices are required. From Table A-13, the splice length must be 54 in.
As transverse reinforcement we are permitted to use #3 bars since the longitudinal bars are not
larger than #10s. Now select the vertical spacing of the ties:
 16d b = 16 × 0.875 in = 14 in

s ≤  48dbt = 48 × 0.375 in = 18 in

= min(b, h) min(18
= in,18 in) 18 in
Select #3 stirrups spaced at 14 in o.c.
Fig. S11-7a
11-9
(b) P u = 710 kips, M u = 50 k-ft, square column with bars in four faces.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, set ρ g = 0.02 :
Pu 710 k
Ag ,trial ≥ = 341 in 2 =
= 18.5 in × 18.5 in
0.40 ( f 'c + f y ρ g ) 0.40 × ( 4 ksi + 60 ksi × 0.02 )
So try a 20 in square column, assuming #3 stirrups and #8 bars.
20 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.5 in )
γ = 0.76
20 in
φ Pn Pu 710 k
= = = 1.78 ksi
= = = 0.075 ksi
bh 2 bh 2 20 in × ( 20 in )2
From A-9a and A-9b, the section would require ρ g  0.01 , so a smaller section would be
desirable. Try a square column with 18 in sides.
Re-calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
18 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.5 in )
γ = 0.736
18 in
φ Pn Pu 710k
= = = 2.19 ksi
= = = 0.103 ksi
bh 2 bh 2 18 in × (18 in )2

12 #6 bars = 5.28 in 2 fits in an 18 in section
Select #6 bars, placing 4 along each face.
From the interaction diagrams, the extreme tensile layer of steel is under compression. Therefore,
from A-13, a splice of length 0.83 × 23 in = 19.1 in ≈ 20 in is required.
11-10
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected #3 bars since the longitudinal bars are not larger
than #10 bars. Now select the vertical spacing of the ties:
 16d b =
16 × 0.75 in = 12 in

s ≤  48dbt = 48 × 0.375 in = 18 in

= in,18 in) 18 in
Select #3 stirrups spaced at 12 in o.c.
Fig. S11-7b
(c) P u = 130 kips, M u = 240 k-ft, square column with bars in four faces.
Pu 130 k
Ag ,trial ≥ = 62.5 in 2 =
= 7.9 in × 7.9 in
0.40 ( f 'c + f y ρ g ) 0.40 × ( 4 ksi + 60 ksi × 0.02 )
However, since the moment is relatively high, try a 16 in square column, assuming #3
stirrups and #8 bars.
16 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.5 in )
γ = 0.70
16 in
φ Pn Pu 130 k
= = = 0.51 ksi
= = = 0.70 ksi
bh 2 bh 2 16 in × (16in ) in 2
From A-9a and A-9b, the section would require ρ g  0.04 , so a larger section is required.
Try a square column with 18 in sides.
Re-calculate the parameters required to use the interaction diagrams, and reference them to select
18 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.5 in )
γ = 0.736
18 in
11-11
φ Pn Pu 130 k
= = = 0.40 ksi
φMn M u 240 k-ft × 12 in/ft
= = = 0.49 ksi
18 in × (18 in )
2
bh 2 bh 2

8#8 bars = 6.32 in 2 fits in an 18 in section
Select #8 bars, placing 3 along the each face.
From the interaction diagrams, f s ≥ 0.5 f y in the extreme tensile layer of steel. Therefore, Class B
tension splices are required. From Fig. A-13, the splice length must be 62 in.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected #3 bars since the longitudinal bars are not larger
than #10 bars. Now select the vertical spacing of the ties:
 16d b =
16 × 1.00 in = 16 in

s ≤  48dbt = 48 × 0.375 in = 18 in

= in,18 in) 18 in
So we must use #3 stirrups spaced at 16 in o.c.
Fig. S11-7c
11-12
11-8 Use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to select spiral-column cross sections to
support the loads given in the accompanying list. In each case, use f’ c = 5000 psi and
f y = 60,000 psi. Design spirals. Calculate the required splice lengths, and draw a
typical cross section of the column, showing the bars and spiral.
(a) P u = 600 kips, M u = 65 k-ft.
First estimate the size of the section required. For the first iteration, set ρ g = 0.02 .
Pu 600 k
Ag ,trial ≥ = 194 in 2 =
= 15.7 in dia.
0.50 ( f 'c + f y ρ g ) 0.50 × ( 5 ksi + 60 ksi × 0.02 )
Try a 16 in diameter column, assuming #3 spiral and #8 bars.
16 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.5 in )
γ = 0.703
16 in
φ Pn Pu 600 k
= = = 2.99 ksi
Ag Ag 201 in 2
= = = 0.243 ksi
hAg hAg 16 in × 201 in 2
(16 in =
)
2
d2
= 0.013 × π × = 0.013 × π ×
As , required 2.61 in 2
4 4

6 #6 bars = 2.64 in 2
Select #6 bars, spaced evenly around the column.
From the interaction diagrams, the extreme tensile layer of steel is under compression. Therefore,
from A-13, a splice of length 0.75 × 23 in = 17.3 in ≈ 18 in is required.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected a #3 spiral since the longitudinal bars are not larger
than #10 bars. Now select the pitch of the spiral:
 3 in

π × ( 0.375 in ) × 60 ksi
2
s≤ π d sp 2 f yt
=  0.45 D f '  A / A − 1 0.45 × 13 in × 5 ksi ×  201 in 2 / 134 in 2 − 1 1.81 in
=
 c c  g ch   
Use a 16 in diameter column reinforced with 6 #6 bars. Use 18 in lap splices, and #3
spirals with a pitch of 1.75 in as transverse reinforcement.
11-13
(b) P u = 500 kips, M u = 150 k-ft.
Pu 500 k
Ag ,trial ≥ = 161 in 2 =
= 14.3 in dia.
0.50 ( f 'c + f y ρ g ) 0.50 × ( 5 ksi + 60 ksi × 0.02 )
Since there is also a moment applied, try an 18 in diameter column, assuming #3 spiral and
#8 bars.
18 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.5 in )
γ = 0.736
18 in
φ Pn Pu 500 k
= = = 1.97 ksi
Ag Ag 254 in 2
= = = 0.394 ksi
(18 in =
)
2
d2
= 0.013 × π × = 0.013 × π ×
As , required 3.31 in 2
4 4

8#6 bars = 3.52 in 2
6 #7 bars = 3.6 in 2
Select #6 bars, spaced evenly around the column.
From the interaction diagrams, the extreme tensile layer of steel is in tension, but only requires a
Class A splice as long as not all of the bars are spliced at the same location. Since, in reality, it is
likely that all bars will be spliced in the same plane, specify a Class B splice regardless. Therefore,
from A-13, a splice of length 33 in is required.
As transverse reinforcement, we have selected a #3 spiral since the longitudinal bars are not larger
than #10 bars. Now select the pitch of the spiral:
 3 in

π × ( 0.375 in ) × 60 ksi
2
s≤ π d sp f yt
2
= =
 0.45 D f '  A / A − 1 0.45 1.81 in
 c c  g ch  × 15 in × 5 ksi ×  254 in 2 / 177 in 2 − 1
Use an 18 in diameter column reinforced with 8 #6 bars. Use 33 in lap splices, and #3 spirals with
a pitch of 1.75 in as transverse reinforcement.
11-14
11-9 Why are tension splices required in some columns?
Even when columns are subjected to axial loads, reinforcing bars can still often be stressed
in tension when moments are concurrently applied to the section. When this is the case, tension
splices (either Class A or Class B) are required for those bars expected to be resisting tension.
However, since it is most practical from a construction standpoint to use the same length of lap
splices on all bars within a section, all splices should be specified as tension splices when some of
the bars are expected to be in tension.
11-10 Select a cross section and reinforcement to supports P u = 450 kips, M ux = 100 k-ft,
and M uy = 130 k-ft. Use f’ c = 4000 psi and f y = 60,000 psi.
Although the strain compatibility method (shown in example 11-5) is the most
theoretically correct method for designing columns for biaxial loading, it is seldom used in design.
Here we will use two more common methods for designing a column, the equivalent eccentricity
method and the Bresler reciprocal load method. Any method outlined in section 11-7 is
appropriate for the solution to this problem.
Equivalent eccentricity method:

First select the dimensions of the trial section, assuming ρ = 0.015 :
Pu 450 k
Ag ,trial ≥ = 230 in 2 =
= 15.2 in by 15.2 in
0.40 ( f 'c + f y ρ g ) 0.40 × ( 4 ksi + 60 ksi × 0.015 )
Since biaxial moments are also applied to the section, select an 18 in square section.
18 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.56 in )
γ = 0.73
18 in
Now compute e x , e y , and e ox .

M uy 130 k-ft × 12 in/ft
=ex = = 3.47 in
Pu 450 k
M ux 100 k-ft × 12 in/ft
=ey = = 2.67 in
Pu 450 k
ex e y
Since our trial section is square, ≥
x y
Pu 450 k
= = 0.347 < 0.4
f 'c Ag 4 ksi × (18 in )2
 Pu   f y + 40,000 psi 
α=
 0.5 + × 
 f 'c Ag   100,000 psi 

 450 k   60,000 psi + 40,000 psi 
α=  0.5 + × = 0.847
 ( )  
2
4 ksi × 18 in 100,000 psi 
 
α ey  x 0.847 × 2.67 in × 18 in
eox = ex + = 3.47 in + 5.73 in
=
y 18 in
11-15
Therefore, we can design our column for:
Pu = 450 k , and
M oy = Pu eox =450 k × 5.73 in =2580 k-in =215 k-ft
Now use the interaction diagrams in Appendix A to determine ρ g .
φ Pn Pu 450 k
= = = 1.39 ksi
Ag Ag 324 in 2
φMn Mu 2580 k-in
= = = 0.442 ksi
Since=γ 0.73 ≈ 0.75 we can use Fig A-9b without interpolating for this design.
So use ρ g = 0.023
Finally, we can compute the area of steel required to reinforce this section, and select the bars:
Ast =ρ g Ag =0.023 × 324 in 2 =7.45 in 2
Select 8 #9 bars, with 3 bars along each face. Select ties and splice lengths as appropriate.
We can check this solution using the Bresler reciprocal load method. Remember that we have an
18 in square column reinforced with 8 #9 bars.
Ast 8 in 2
ρ=
g = = 0.247
Ag 324 in 2
18 in − 2 × (1.5 in + 0.375 in + 0.56 in )
γ = 0.73
18 in
Compute φ Pnx , the factored load capacity corresponding to ex and ρ g .
M uy 130 k-ft × 12 in/ft ex 3.47 in
ex
= = = 3.47 in , and = = 0.193 .
Pu 450 k x 18 in
φP
From Fig. A-9b, nx = 1.9 ksi
bh
Therefore φ Pnx = 616 k
Compute φ Pny , the factored load capacity corresponding to ey and ρ g .
M ux 100 k-ft × 12 in/ft e 2.67 in
ey
= = = 2.67 in , =
and x = 0.148 .
Pu 450 k x 18 in
φP
From Fig. A-9b, nx = 2.2 ksi
bh
Therefore φ Pny = 713 k
From equ. 11-7 calculate Pno :
Pno = ( k3 f 'c ) ( Ag − Ast ) + f y Ast = ( 0.85 × 4 ksi ) ( 324 in 2 − 8 in 2 ) + 60 ksi × 8 in 2 = 1560 k
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
> = + − = + −
Pu φ Pn φ Pnx φ Pny φ Pno 616 k 713 k 0.65 × 1560 k
Pu ≤ 490 k , so our section is sufficient for the loading defined here.
11-16
Chapter 12
12-1 A hinged end column 18-ft tall supports unfactored loads of 100 kips dead load and
60 kips live load. These loads are applied at an eccentricity of 2 in. at bottom and 4
in. at the top. Both eccentricities are on the same side of the centerline of the
column. Design a tied column with f c′ = 4000 psi and f y = 60,000 psi.
Factored loads and moments
Pu = 1.2 × 100 kips +1.6 × 60 kips =

216 kips
=M 1 216 kips × 2 in. = 432 k-in. = 36 k-ft
=M 2 216 kips × 4 in. = 864 k-in. = 72 k-ft
M 1 / M 2 = +0.5 (Note that the column is bent in single curvature)
Estimate column size

Assume ρ g = 0.015
Pu 216 kips
Ag (trial ) =
= = 110 in.2
0.4 ( f c′ + f y ρ g ) 0.4 × ( 4 ksi + 60 ksi × 0.015 )
Choose a column cross section of 12 in. x 12 in.
Check if the column is slender

k  u 1.0 × (18 × 12) in.
= = 60
r (0.3 × 12 in.)
M 
34 − 12  1  = 34 − 12 × 0.5 = 28
 M2 
ku M 
= 60 > 34 − 12  1  = 28
r  M2 
The column is quite slender, increase column size to 16 in. x 16 in.
Are moments greater than the minimum?

M 2,min = Pu (0.6 + 0.03h) =216 kips × ( 0.6 in. + 0.03 × 16 in.)= 233 k-in. < M 2
∴ use M 2
Compute EI
0.4 Ec I g
EI =
1 + βd
= 3605 × 103 psi
Ec 57,000 4000
=
(=
16 in.)
4
=Ig 5460 in.4

12
factored dead load 1.2 × 100 kips
=βd = = 0.56
all factored load 216 kips
12-1
0.4 × ( 3605 × 103 psi ) × 5460 in.4
EI
= = 5.05 × 109 lb-in.2
1 + 0.56
Magnified moment
M c = δ ns M 2
Cm
δ ns
= ≥ 1.0
P
1− u
φ Pc
M1
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4 = 0.6 + 0.4 × 0.5 = 0.8
M2
π 2 EI π 2 ( 5.05 × 109 lb-in.2 )
= Pc
= = 1076 × 103 lb =1067 kips
( k  ) 1.0 × (18 × 12 ) in.2
2 2
0.8
= δ ns = 1.096
216 kips
1−
0.75 × 1076 kips
Mc =
1096 × 72 k-ft =78.9 k-ft
Select reinforcement
Assume # 8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement, # 3 bars for the ties, and a clear concrete
cover of 1.5 in.
16 in. − 2 × 1.5 in. − 2 × 0.375 in. − 1 in.
= γ = 0.70
16 in.
φ Pn Pu 216 kips
= = = 0.84 ksi
bh bh (16 in.) 2
φ M n M c 78.9 k-ft × 12
= = = 0.23 ksi
(16 in.)
3
bh 2 bh 2
Assume E-type reinforcement
Fig.A-6a yields ρ g  0.01 for γ = 0.60
Fig.A-6b yields ρ g  0.01 for γ = 0.75
∴Use ρ g ( min ) = 0.01
=Ast 0.01
= Ag 2.56 in.2
Use 6 bars # 6 ( Ast = 2.64 in.2 ) for the column of 16 in. × 16 in.
Note that required values of ρ g is much smaller than minimum value of 0.01. A revised
column size, say 14 in. × 14 in., shall be more efficient.
12-2
12-2 Repeat Problem 12-1, but with the top eccentricity to the right of the centerline and
the bottom eccentricity to the left.

Pu = 216 kips
M 2 = 72 k-ft
M 1 = −36 k-ft
M 1 / M 2 = −0.5 (Note that the column is bent in double curvature)

Assume ρ g = 0.015
Ag = 110 in.2

k  u 1.0 × (18 × 12) in.
= = 51.4
r (0.3 × 14 in.)
M 
34 − 12  1 = 34 − 12 × (−0.5)= 40
 M2 
ku M 
= 51.4 > 34 − 12  1  = 40
r  M2 
The column is slender.
M 2,min = Pu (0.6 + 0.03h) =216 kips × ( 0.6 in. + 0.03 × 14 in.)= 220 k-in. < M 2
∴ use M 2
Compute EI
0.4 Ec I g
EI =
1 + βd
Ec 3605 × 103 psi
=
(=
14 in.)
4
=Ig 3210 in.4

12
β d = 0.56
0.4 × ( 3605 × 103 psi ) × 3210 in.4
EI
= = 2.97 × 109 lb-in.2
1 + 0.56
Magnified moment
M c = δ ns M 2
Cm
δ ns
= ≥ 1.0
Pu
1−
φ Pc
12-3
M1
Cm= 0.6 + 0.4 = 0.6 + 0.4 × (−0.5)= 0.4
M2
π 2 EIπ 2 ( 2.97 × 109 lb-in.2 )
P=
cr = = 628 × 103 lb =628 kips
( k  ) 1.0 × (18 × 12 ) in.2
2 2
0.4
δ ns = =< 0.74 1, use δ ns = 1
216 kips
1−
0.75 × 628 kips
Mc =
1 × 72 k-ft =72 k-ft
Assume # 8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement, # 3 bars for ties, and a clear concrete
cover of 1.5 in.
14 in. − 2 × 1.5 in. − 2 × 0.375 in. − 1 in.
= γ = 0.66
14 in.
φ PnPu 216 kips

= = = 1.10 ksi
bh bh (14 in.) 2
φMn
=
Mc
=
( 72 × 12 ) k-in.
= 0.315 ksi
(14 in.)
2 3
bh bh 2
Assume R-type reinforcement
Fig.A-9a =yields ρ g 0.011
= for γ 0.60
yields ρ g 0.010
Fig.A-9a= = for γ 0.75
=For γ 0.66,
= interpolate, ρ g 0.011
=Ast 0.011
= Ag 2.16 in.2
Use 4 bars # 7 ( Ast = 2.4 in.2 ) for the column of 14 in. × 14 in.
12-4
12-3 Figure P12-3 shows an exterior column in a multistory frame. The dimensions are
center-to-center of the joints. The beams are 12 in. wide by 18 in. in over-all depth.
The floor slab is 6 in. thick. The building includes a service core which resists the
majority of the lateral loads. Use f c′ = 5000 psi and f y = 60,000 psi. The loads and
moments on column AB are:
Factored dead load:

Axial force = 176 kips
Moment at top = 55 kip-ft
Moment at bottom = 55 kip-ft
Factored live load:

Axial force = 210 kips
Moment at top = 72 kip-ft
Moment at bottom = 50 kip-ft
Select a cross section and reinforcement.
22 ft
12 ft
24 ft
12 ft
D
Fig. P12-3
Since the building has a service core which resists the majority of the lateral loads, the
frame is braced, or non-sway.
12-5
Pu =176 + 210 = 386 kips

M top = 55 + 72 = 127 k-ft
M btm =
55 + 50= 105 k-ft < M top
∴M2 =
M top =
+127 ft-kips
Under dead and live loads, this exterior column is likely to bend in double
curvature. Therefore the column is in double curvature and M 1 = −105 k-ft
M1 / M 2 = −105 /127 = −0.827
Assume ρ g = 0.015
Pu 386 kips
A=
g (trial ) = = 164 in.2
0.4 ( f c′ + f y ρ g ) 0.4 × ( 5 ksi+60 ksi × 0.015 )

From Table 12-2, k ≈ 0.90
u = ( 24 × 12 ) in. − 18 in. =270 in.
k  u 0.9 × 270 in.
= = 50.6
r (0.3 × 16 in.)
M 
34 − 12  1 = 34 − 12 × (−0.827)= 43.9
 M2 
ku M 
= 50.6 > 34 − 12  1  = 43.9
r  M2 
Column is slender.

M=
2,min Pu (0.6 + 0.03h)
=386 kips × ( 0.6 in. + 0.03 × 16 in.) =
417 k-in.=34.8 k-ft < M 2
∴ use M 2
Compute k
Assume the columns CA and BD also have a cross section of 16 in. x 16 in.
(16 in.)
4
I ( column ) =
0.7 I g ( column ) =
0.7 × 3820 in.4
=
12
12 in. × (18 in.)
3
I ( beam ) = 0.35 × ( 2 I web ) =×

0.35 I g (beam) = 0.7 4080 in.4
=
12
 EI  3820 Ec
=
  = 26.5 Ec
  c CA (12 × 12 )
12-6
 EI  3820 Ec
=
  = 13.3Ec
  c  AB (12 × 24 )
 EI  4080 Ec
=  = 15.5 Ec
 
  beams
b
(12 × 22 )
26.5 Ec + 13.3Ec
ψ ( top joint
= ) = ψ ( bottom joint )
= 2.57
15.5 Ec
From monograph, read k = 0.87
Compute EI
Ec I g
EI =
2.5(1 + β d )
= 4030 × 103 psi
Ec 57,000 5000
=
I g = 5460 in.4
176
βd
= = 0.46
386
4030 × 103 psi × 5460 in.4
EI
= = 6.03 × 109 lb-in.2
2.5 × (1 + 0.46)
Magnified moment
M c = δ ns M 2
Cm
δ ns
= ≥ 1.0
Pu
1−
φ Pc
M1
Cm= 0.6 + 0.4 = 0.6 + 0.4 × (−0.827)= 0.27
M2
π 2 EI π 2 ( 6.03 × 109 lb-in.2 )
Pc
= = = 1077 × 103 lb =1077 kips
( ku ) [ ]
2 2
0.87 × 270 in.
0.27
δ ns = 0.52 < 1, use δ ns =
= 1
386 kips
1−
0.75 × 1077 kips
M c =1.0 × 127 =127 k-ft
Assume # 8 bars for longitudinal reinforcement, # 3 bars for ties, and a clear concrete
cover of 1.5 in.
16 in. − 2 × 1.5 in. − 2 × 0.375 in. − 1 in.
= γ = 0.70
16 in.
12-7
Pu Pu 386 kips
= = = 1.51 ksi
bh bh (16 in.) 2
=
Mc (=
127 × 12 ) k-in
0.37 ksi
(16 in.)
3
bh 2
Assume E-type reinforcement
Fig.A-7a yields ρ g < 0.01 for γ =
0.60
Fig.A-7b yields ρ g < 0.01 for γ =
0.75
∴Use ρ g ( min ) = 0.01
Ast = 2.56 in.2
Use 6 bars #6 ( Ast = 2.64 in.2 ) for the column of 16 in. × 16 in. Place 3 bars #6 each face
parallel to axis of bending
12-8
12-4 Use the ACI moment-magnifier method to redesign the columns in the main floor of
Example 12-3 assuming that the floor-to-floor height of the first story is 16 ft 0 in.
rather than 18 ft 0 in. Also, assume the lateral wind forces are 15 percent larger
than those used in Example 12-3.
The floor plan and elevation is shown in Fig. S12-1

6
20'
20'
a) Plan
20'
1 1
3
20'
N
2
20'
1
32' 30' 32'
A B C D
Roof
11' 6"
5 th floor
11' 6"
4 th floor
11' 6"
3 th floor
b) Section 1-1
11' 6"
2 th floor
16' 0"
Ground
floor
11' 6"
Slab thickness: 6"; Column size: 18" x 18"; Beam size: 18" x 30"
Fig. S12-1
12-9
The following design shall be performed for a typical interior frame, for instance the fram
along line 2. The design of the columns will follow the following steps:
A. Calculate loads
B. Calculate the beam and column properties and modulus of elasticity
C. Select preliminary column size
D. Check with gravity load case
E. Check with gravity plus wind load case
F. Finalize the design of column reinforcement
A. Calculate loads for a typical interior frame
Dead load from roof floor
Distributed loads on horizontal beams

 6 in.  (18 in. × 24 in.) 0.150 k/ft 3
DL 
= × 0.150 k/ft 3 + 0.025 k/ft 2  × 10 + ×
12 in/ft  144 in 2 /ft 2
= 1.45 k/ft
Concentrated on the interior columns

Distributed load on the transverse beams
 18 in.   18 in. × 30 in 
DL 
=  × 0.025 +  2 2 
× 0.150
= 0.6 k/ft
 12 in./ft   144 in /ft 
Concentrated dead load on the interior column
30.5 + 28.5
DL(concentrated)= 1.45 k/ft × ft + 0.6 k/ft × 18.5ft= 53.9 k
2
Concentrated on the exterior columns

 18 in.   18 in. × 30 in 
DL 
=  × 0.025 +  2 2 
× 0.150
= 0.6 k/ft
 12 in./ft   144 in /ft 
Concentrated dead load on the exterior column
30.5
2
Dead load from other floors

 6 in.  (18 in. × 24 in.) 0.150 k/ft 3
DL 
= × 0.150 k/ft 3 + 0.020 k/ft 2  × 10 + ×
12 in/ft  144 in 2 /ft 2
= 1.40 k/ft
Concentrated on the interior columns

12-10
 18 in.   18 in. × 30 in 
DL
=   × 0.020 +  2 2 
× 0.150
= 0.593 k/ft
 12 in./ft   144 in /ft 
Concentrated dead load on the interior column
30.5 + 28.5
2
Concentrated on the exterior columns

 18 in.   18 in. × 30 in 
DL
=   × 0.020 +  2 2 
× 0.150
= 0.593 k/ft
 12 in./ft   144 in /ft 
Concentrated dead load on the exterior column
30.5
2
For each column of 11.5 ft, a weight of 3.88 kips is added for the column self-weight.
For each column of 16.0 ft, a weight of 5.40 kips is added for the column self-weight.
The dead load is shown in Fig. S12-2.

Sym.
33.2 k 53.9 k
1.45 k/ft
36.2 k 56.2 k
1.40 k/ft
36.2 k 56.2 k
1.40 k/ft
36.2 k 56.2 k
1.40 k/ft
36.2 k 56.2 k
1.40 k/ft
37.7 k 57.7 k
1.40 k/ft
Dead load
Fig. S12-2
12-11
Live load from roof floor

=LL 0.030 k/ft ×10= ft 0.3 k/ft
Concentrated live load on the interior columns

 18 in. 
LL = 0.030 k/ft 2 ×   = 0.045 k/ft
 12 in./ft 
Concentrated live load on the interior column
30.5 + 28.5
LL(concentrated) = 0.3 k/ft × ft + 0.045 k/ft × 18.5ft = 9.68 k
2
Concentrated live load on the exterior columns

 18 in. 
LL = 0.030 k/ft 2 ×   = 0.045 k/ft
 12 in./ft 
30.5
2
Live load from other floors

=LL 0.080 k/ft 2 ×10
= ft 0.8 k/ft
Concentrated live load on the interior columns

 18 in. 
LL = 0.080 k/ft 2 ×   = 0.12 k/ft
 12 in./ft 
30.5 + 28.5
2
Concentrated live load on the exterior columns

 18 in. 
LL = 0.080 k/ft 2 ×   = 0.12 k/ft
 12 in./ft 
Concentrated live load on the exterior column
12-12
30.5
2
The live load is shown in Fig. S12-3.
5.41 k 9.68 k Sym.

0.3 k/ft
14.4 k 25.8 k
0.8 k/ft
14.4 k 25.8 k
0.8 k/ft
14.4 k 25.8 k
0.8 k/ft
14.4 k 25.8 k
0.8 k/ft
14.4 k 25.8 k
0.8 k/ft
Live load
Fig. S12-3.
B. Calculate the beam and column properties and modulus of elasticity
Column:
A = 18 in. × 18 in. = 324 in.2
(18 in.)
4
Ic 0.7 I =
= g0.7 × 6120 in 4
=
12
Beam:
Effective flange width
18 in. + 8 × 6 in. =66 in.
A =6 × 66 + 18 × 24 =828 in 2
12-13
18 in. × ( 30 in.)
3
0.7 I g ( beam-web ) =
Ib = 0.7 × 28350 in.4
=
12
Note that the selection of rigid end zones follows Example 12-3.
Modulus of elasticity
= 3600 × 103 psi
E 57000 4000
=
C. Select preliminary column size
Columns are sized based on the gravity load (1.2 D + 1.6 L + 0.5 Lr ) . In this load combination, live
load can be reduced. From separate analyses of dead load, live load from the roof floor, and live
load from the other floors, the axial loads of the columns in the ground floor are shown in the
Table P12-1.
The axial load in the exterior column from the live load from the other floors then can be reduced
with a reduction factor as follows:
15
0.25 + 0.46
=
4 × ( 4 × 16.75 × 20 )
The axial load in the interior column from the live load from the other floors then can be reduced
with a reduction factor as follows:
15
0.25 + 0.40
=
4 × ( 4 × 31 × 20 )
The calculation of reduced axial live load and factored load is shown in Table P12-1.
Table P12-1
Exterior Interior
All unit are in kips column column
Dead load 285 487
Live load from the roof floor 9.9 18.6
Live load from the other floors 100 186
Reduced live load from the other floors 46 74.4
Total factored load 421 713
Assume ρ g = 0.015
Exterior column
Pu 421 kips
= 215 in.2  (15 in.)
2
Ag (trial ) =
=
0.4 ( f c + f y ρ g )
′ 0.4 × ( 4 ksi + 60 ksi × 0.015 )
Interior column
Pu 713 kips
= 364 in.2  (19 in.)
2
Ag (trial ) =
=
0.4 ( f c′ + f y ρ g ) 0.4 × ( 4 ksi + 60 ksi × 0.015 )
12-14
Based on the result of Example 12-3, let choose a column cross section of
18 in. × 18 in. ( Ag = 324 in.2 ) for both exterior and interior columns.
D. Check with gravity load case 1.2 D + 1.6 L + 0.5 Lr
1. Is the story being designed sway or non-sway? In order to answer this question, we need
ΣPu ∆ oh
to calculate the stability index Q = .In order to have the terms from the same
Vus ×  c
analysis, we need to analyze a frame with an arbitrary lateral load of 20 kips applied at
the 2nd floor level in conjunction with the factored dead load and live load as shown in
Fig. S12-4. In order to take into account the live load reduction, an average of live load
reduction factor for exterior and interior columns (0.43) is multiplied with the live load
factor 1.6, yielding 0.69. Therefore, the load combination used is:
1.2 D + 0.69 L + 0.5 Lr + 20 k lateral load .
20 kips
Factored dead load and live load plus arbitrary lateral load to evaluate stability index, Q
Fig. S12-4
A structural analysis gives the following results:
∆ oh =0.127 in.
ΣPu = 414 + 722 + 723 + 418= 2277 kips
 c 16
= = ft 192 in.
12-15
2277 kips × 0.127 in.
Q
∴= = 0.075 > 0.05
20 kips × 192 in.
The first story is a sway story.

Note that the ΣPu = 2277 kips does not differ significantly from
ΣPu =2 × ( 421 + 713) =2268 kips
2. Are the columns slender?

k  u 1.2 × (192 − 30) in.
= = 36 > 22
r (0.3 × 18 in.)
The columns are slender.
3. Compute the factored axial loads and moments from a first-order frame analysis. As
explained in Example 12-3, the unfactored moments for exterior columns can be
determined based on the live load pattern shown in Fig. S12-5 while those for interior
columns based on the live load pattern shown Fig. S12-6 . After a structural analysis is
made, live load reduction factors will be applied. All results and calculation are shown in
Table P12-2.
All span loaded with live load

Fig. S12-5
12-16
Staggered live load pattern
Fig. S12-6
Table P12-2
Forces in kips Reduction
Interior Column
Moments in k-ft factor
PD 285 487
PL ( reduced ) 100 × 0.46 =
46 186 × 0.4 =
74.4
PLr 9.9 18.6
M D ( top ) 37.0 -4.9
M D ( bottom ) -36.2 5.5
M L ( top, reduced ) 20.9 × 0.67 =
14 −18.2 × 0.46 =
−8.4
M L ( bottom, reduced ) −20.5 × 0.67 =
−13.7 2.8 × 0.46 =
1.3
The factored load on exterior and interior column is as follows:
Exterior column
Pu =1.2 PD + 1.6 PL ( reduced ) + 0.5 PLr
1.2 × 285 + 1.6 × 46 + 0.5 × 9.9 =
421 kips
M ( top ) = 1.2 × 37 + 1.6 × 14 = 66.8 k-ft = M 2
M ( bottom ) =1.2 × ( −36.2 ) + 1.6 × ( −13.7 ) =−65.4 k-ft =M 1
12-17
M=
2,min Pu (0.6 + 0.03h)
=421 kips × ( 0.6 in. + 0.03 × 18 in.) =
480 k-in. = 40 k-ft < 66.8 k-ft
Use M 2
Interior column
1.2 PD + 1.6 PL ( reduced ) + 0.5 PLr
Pu =
1.2 × 487 + 1.6 × 74.4 + 0.5 × 18.6 =
713 kips
M ( top ) =1.2 × ( −4.9 ) + 1.6 × ( −8.4 ) =−19.3 k-ft =M 2
M ( bottom ) = 1.2 × ( 5.5 ) + 1.6 × (1.3) = 8.68 k-ft = M 1
M=
2,min Pu (0.6 + 0.03h)
=713 kips × ( 0.6 in. + 0.03 × 18 in.) =
813 k-in.=67.8 k-ft > 19.3 k-ft
Use M 2 = M 2,min
4. Find δ ns for the exterior and interior column?

Cm
= δ ns ≥ 1.0
P
1− u
φ Pc
Exterior column
M 65.4
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4 1 = 0.6 + 0.4 × ( ) = 0.21
M2 −66.8
π 2 EI
Pc =
( k)
2
0.2 Ec I g + Es I se
EI =
1 + β dns
I g = 8750 in.4
Ec = 3600 ksi
I se = 150 in.4
1.2 × 285
β= dns (ext) = 0.81
421
6 2
EI 5.88 × 10 kip-in
=
π 2 EI π 2 ( 5.88 × 106 kip-in 2 )

=Pc = = 2210 kips
( k) [1.0 × 162 in.]
2 2
0.21
δ ns = 0.28 1, use δ ns =
=< 1
421 kips
1−
0.75 × 2210 kips
M c = 66.8 k-ft
12-18
Interior column
M1 8.68
Cm = 0.6 + 0.4 = 0.6 + 0.4 × ( ) = 0.42
M2 −19.3
1.2 × 487
=β dns (int) = 0.82
713
Since β dns (int) does not change significantly, EI and Pc will
remain essentially the same.
0.42
δ ns = =<0.74 1, use δ ns = 1
713 kips
1−
0.75 × 2210 kips
M c = 67.8 k-ft
5. Check initial column sections for gravity load case
Exterior column
M c 66.8 × 12
= e = = 1.9 in.
Pu 421
e 1.9
= = 0.11
h 18
ρ g = 0.015
Fig. A-9b yields
φ Pn P 421
= 2.15 ksi= u ⇒ Ag = = 195 in.2 < 324 in.2 ,OK.
Ag Ag 2.15
Interior column
M c 67.8 × 12
= e = = 1.14 in.
Pu 713
e 1.14
= = 0.06
h 18
ρ g = 0.015
φ Pn Pu 713
= 2.2 ksi= ⇒ Ag = = 324 in.2 = 324 in.2 ,OK.
Ag Ag 2.2
Because the reading from the graph may not be accurate given the two
values are too close, we need to select reinforcement for the column and
check its capacity against the demand. Select 8 bars #8, Example 12-3
shows =φ Pn 759 kips = > Pu 713 kips , OK.
12-19
E. Check with gravity plus wind load case 1.2 D + 1.6W + 0.5 ( L + Lr )
Wind load is given in Fig. S12-7

4.46 kips
6.61 kips
6.61 kips
6.61 kips
8.49 kips
Wind load
Fig. S12-7
ΣPu ∆ oh
1. Calculation of the stability index Q =
Vus ×  c
Similar to the gravity load case, we need to do one single analysis with the wind load plus
gravity load case. To take into account of the live load reduction, an average live load
reduction factor of 0.43 will be multiplied with the live load factor 0.5, yielding 0.22.
Therefore, the load combination becomes 1.2 D + 1.6W + 0.215 Lr + 0.5 L . A structural
analysis yields the following results:
0.357 in.
∆ oh =
ΣPu = 352 + 635 + 633 + 385= 2005 kips
 c 16
= = ft 192 in.
Vus= 4.46 + 3 × 6.61 + 8.49
= 32.9 kips
2005 kips × 0.357 in.
∴= Q = 0.113 > 0.05
32.9 kips × 192 in.
12-20
1 1
δs
= = = 1.13
1 − Q 1 − 0.113
The first story is a sway story.
2. Factored axial loads and moments
A structural analysis of the frame subjected to the wind load (without the load factor) yields
the following results, as shown in Table P12-3.
Table P12-3
Forces in kips
Exterior Column Interior Column
Moments in k-ft
PW 10.4 0.5
M W ( top ) 46.2 65
M W ( bottom ) -46 -64.6
Exterior column
Pu = 1.2 PD + 1.6 PW + 0.5 ( PL + PLr )
= 1.2 × 285 + 1.6 × 10.4 + 0.5 × ( 46 + 9.9 ) = 387 kips
M 2 M 2 ns + δ s M 2 s
=
M 2 ns = 1.2 M D + 0.5M L = 1.2 × 37 + 0.5 × 14 = 51.4 k-ft
M 2s = 1.6 M W = 1.6 × 46.2 =73.9 k-ft
M 2 = 51.4 + 1.13 × 73.9 = 135 k-ft
Interior column
Pu = 1.2 PD + 1.6 PW + 0.5 ( PL + PLr )
= 1.2 × 487 + 1.6 × 0.5 + 0.5 × ( 74.4 + 18.6 ) = 632 kips
M 2 M 2 ns + δ s M 2 s
=
M 2 ns = 1.2 M D + 0.5M L = 1.2 × 4.9 + 0.5 × 8.4 = 10.1 k-ft
M 2 s = 1.6 M W = 1.6 × 65 = 104 k-ft
M 2 = 10.1 + 1.13 × 104 = 128 k-ft
2005 kips does not differ significantly from

Note that the ΣPu =
ΣPu =2 × ( 387 + 632 ) =2038 kips
3. Check column sections for axial loads and moments

Exterior column
M c 135 × 12
= e = = 4.17 in.
Pu 387
e 4.17
= = 0.23
h 18
12-21
ρ g = 0.01
Fig. A-9b yields
φ Pn P 387
= 1.4 ksi= u ⇒ Ag = = 276 in.2 < 324 in.2 ,OK.
Ag Ag 1.4
At this point, we can select 8 bars
= #6 ( Ast 3.52
= in.2 , ρ g 0.011 ) for the exterior columns.
Interior column
M c 128 × 12
= e = = 2.43 in.
Pu 632
e 2.43
= = 0.14
h 18
ρ g = 0.02
φ Pn Pu 632
= 2.1 ksi= ⇒ Ag = = 300 in.2 < 324 in.2 ,OK.
Ag Ag 2.1
Conclusion: The cross section of exterior and interior columns is 18 in. x 18 in. Use 8 bars #6 for
exterior columns, and 8 bars #8 for interior columns.
12-22
Chapter 13
13-1 Compute α f for the beam shown in Fig. P13-1. The concrete for the slab and beam
was placed in one pour.
Ib
Because the slab and the beam have the same elastic modulus, Eq. (13-9) reduces to α f =
Is
1. Compute I b . The cross section of the beam is shown in Fig. S13-1.1 and I b is computed for the
shaded area.
Fig. S13-1.1 Section through edge of slab.

Web 256 8 2048 5461 203
Flanges 63 3.5 220.5 257 821
Σ =319 Σ =2268.5 Ib = 6742 in.4
2268.5
ytop
= = 7.11 in.
319
I g = 6742 in.4
2. Compute I s . The cross section of the slab is shown in Fig. S13-1.2 and I s is computed for the
shaded portion of the slab.
(108 + 8) × 73
=Is = 3316 in.4
12
Fig. S13-1.2 Edge beam.
3. Compute α f .
Ib
αf
= = 6742 = 2.03
Is 3316
13-1
13-2 Compute the column-strip and middle-strip moments in the long-span direction for
an interior panel of the flat-slab shown in Fig. 13-27. Assume the slab is 6 in. thick,
the design live load is 40 psf and the superimposed dead load is 5 psf for ceiling,
flooring, and so on, plus 25 psf for the partitions. The columns are 10 in. × 12 in., as
shown in Fig. 13-27.
1. Compute the factored load.
 6 
qu = 1.2 ×  × 150 + 5 + 25  + 1.6 × 40 = 190 psf
 12 
Note: if the local building code allows a live-load reduction, the 40-psf live load could be
multiplied by the appropriate reduction factor.
2. Compute the statical moment in the long span of the slab.
12
 n = 14.5 − = 13.5 ft
12
 2 = 13.2 ft
The column strip extends the smaller of  2 4 or  1 4 on each side of the column centerline
(ACI Code Section 13.2.1). Thus, the column strip extends 13.2 4 = 3.3 ft on each side of column
centerlines. The total width of the column strip is 6.6 ft. Each half-middle strip extends from the
edge of the column strip to the centerline of the panel. The total width of two half-middle strips is
13.2 − 6.6 = 6.6 ft
The statical moment M o can be calculated from Eq. (13-5),

q   2 190 × 13.2 × 13.52
Mo = u 2 n =
8 8
× 1 (
1000 )
=57 kip-ft
3. Divide M o into negative and positive moments.
From ACI Code Section 13.6.3.2, for an interior span, the total moment is divided as follows:
Negative moment = −0.65M o = −0.65 × 57 = −37 kip-ft

Positive moment = 0.35M o = 0.35 × 57 = 20 kip-ft
4. Divide the moments between the column and middle strips.
Negative moments
From Table 13-3 for α f 1 2 1 = 0 (since there are no beam between the columns).
Column-strip negative moment = 0.75 × ( −37 ) =−27.8 kip-ft
Middle-strip negative moment = 0.25 × ( −37 ) =−9.3 kip-ft
Half of the middle-strip negative moment, -4.7 kip-ft, goes to each of the adjacent half-middle
strip. Because the adjacent bays have the same width,  2 ,a similar moment will be assigned to
the other half of each middle strip so that the total middle-strip negative moment is 9.3 kip-ft.
13-2
Positive moments
From Table 13-4 for α f 1 2 1 = 0 ,
Column-strip positive moment = 0.60 × 20 =12 kip-ft
Middle-strip positive moment = 0.40 × 20 =
8 kip-ft
13-3 Use the direct-design method to compute the moments for the column-strip and
middle-strip spanning perpendicular to the edge of the exterior bay of the flat-plate
1
shown in Fig. P13-3. Assume the slab is 7 in. thick and supports a superimposed
2
dead load of 25 psf and a live load of 50 psf. There is no edge beam. The columns are
all 18 in. square.
1. Compute the factored load.
 7.5 
qu = 1.2 ×  × 150 + 25  + 1.6 × 50 = 223 psf
 12 
multiplied by the appropriate factor.
2. Compute the statical moment for the span perpendicular to the edge of the exterior bay
18
 n = 20 − = 18.5 ft
12
 2 = 19 ft
The column strip extends the smaller of  2 4 or  1 4 on each side of the column centerline
(ACI Code Section 13.2.1). Thus, the column strip extends 19 4 = 4.75 ft on each side of column
centerlines. The total width of the column strip is 9.5ft. Each half-middle strip extends from the
edge of the column strip to the centerline of the panel. The total width of two half-middle strips is
19 − 9.5 = 9.5 ft
The statical moment M o can be calculated from Eq. (13-5),

q   2 223 × 19.0 × 18.52
Mo = u 2 n =
8 8
× 1 (
1000 )
=181 kip-ft
From ACI Code Section 13.6.3.3, for a “slab without beams between interior supports and
without edge beam”, the total moment is divided as follows:
Interior negative moment = −0.70 M o = −0.70 × 181 = −127 kip-ft

Positive moment = 0.52 M o = 0.52 × 181 = 94 kip-ft
Exterior negative moment = −0.26 M o = −0.26 × 181 = −47 kip-ft
13-3
4. Divide the moments between the column and middle strips.
Interior negative moments

From Table 13-3 for α f 1 2 1 = 0 (since there are no beam between the columns),
Interior column-strip negative moment = 0.75 × ( −127 ) =−95 kip-ft
Interior middle-strip negative moment = 0.25 × ( −127 ) =−32 kip-ft
Half of the middle-strip negative moment, -16 kip-ft, goes to each of the adjacent half-middle
strip. Because the adjacent bays have the same width,  2 ,a similar moment will be assigned to
the other half of each middle strip so that the total middle-strip negative moment is 32 kip-ft.
Positive moments
From Table 13-4 for α f  2 1 = 0 ,
Column-strip positive moment = 0.60 × 94 =56 kip-ft
Middle-strip positive moment = 0.40 × 94 =
38 kip-ft
Exterior negative moment

From Table 13-5, for α f 1 2 1 = 0 (since there is no beam parallel to 1 ) and for βt = 0 (since
there is no edge beam),
Exterior column-strip negative moment = 1.0 × 47 =47 kip-ft
Exterior middle-strip negative moment = 0 × 47 =0 kip-ft
13-4
13-4 For the slab configuration and loading conditions in P13-3, use the direct-design
method to compute moments for the edge-column strip and the middle strip
spanning parallel to the edge of the slab.
1. Compute the factored loads.
 7.5 
qu = 1.2 ×  × 150 + 25  + 1.6 × 50 = 223 psf
 12 
multiplied by the appropriate factor.
2. Compute the statical moment for the span parallel to the edge of the slab.
18
 n =19 − =17.5 ft
12
For the definition of  2 refer to Fig. 13-22 in the textbook.
20 9
Edge frame:  2,e = + = 10.8 ft
2 12
Intrerior frame:  2,i = 20 ft
Generally, the column strip extends the smaller of  2 4 or  1 4 on each side of the column
centerline (ACI Code Section 13.2.1).Thus, the width of the edge-column strip is
19 9
+ = 5.5 ft . The half-middle strip extends from the edge of the column strip to the centerline
4 12
of the panel. The total width of two half-middle strips is 20 − 9.5 =10.5 ft .
The statical moment M o can be calculated from Eq. (13-5).
qu  2,e  2n
223 × 10.8 × 17.52
Edge frame: M o =
8
=
8
(
× 1
1000 )
= 92.2 kip-ft
q   2 223 × 20 × 17.52
Interior frame: M o = u 2,i n =
8 8
× 1(1000 )
= 171 kip-ft
From ACI Code Section 13.6.3.2, for the edge frame, the total moment is divided as follows:
Negative moment = −0.65M o ,e =

−0.65 × 92.2 =
−60 kip-ft
Positive moment = 0.35M o ,e = 0.35 × 92.2 = 32 kip-ft
For the interior frame, the total moment is divided as follows:
Negative moment = −0.65M o ,i =

−0.65 × 171 =
−111 kip-ft
Positive moment = 0.35M o ,i = 0.35 × 171 = 59.9 kip-ft
13-5
4. Divide the moments between the edge-column and middle strips.
Exterior negative moment

From Table 13-3, for α f 1 2 1 = 0 (since there is no beam between the columns),
Edge column-strip negative moment = 0.875 × 60 = 52.5 kip-ft
1
Middle-strip negative moment = × ( 0.25 × 60 + 0.25 × 111) =21.4 kip-ft
2
1 
Note that  × 0.25 + 0.875  =1.0
2 
Positive moments
From Table 13-4 for α f  2 1 = 0 ,
Edge column-strip positive moment = 0.80 × 32 = 25.6 kip-ft
1
Middle-strip positive moment = × ( 0.40 × 32 + 0.40 × 59.9 ) =18.4 kip-ft
2
 1 
Note that  × 0.40 + 0.80  = 1.0
 2 
13-6
13-5 A 7-in. thick flat-plate slab with spans of 20 ft in each direction is supported on
16 in. × 16 in. columns. The effective depths are 5.9 and 5.3 in. in the two directions.
Assume the slab supports its own dead load, plus 20 psf superimposed dead load
and 40 psf live load. The concrete strength is 4000 psf. Check two-way shear at a
typical interior support. Assume unbalanced moments are negligible.
1. Compute the factored uniform load.

 7 
qu = 1.2 ×  × 150 + 20  + 1.6 × 40 = 193 psf
 12 
2. Check one-way shear.
One-way shear is critical at a distance d = 5.3 in. from the face of the column. Thus, the critical
sections for one-way shear are A-A and B-B in Fig. S13-5.1. The loaded areas causing shear on
these sections are cross hatched. Their outer boundaries are lines of symmetry on which Vu = 0 .
We will only check the shear for section A-A, since the check for section B-B is the same.
Fig. S13-5.1 Critical section for one-way shear at interior column.
13-7
(a) Compute Vu at section A-A.
Vu = (193 × 11000) × 10 − 8 +125.3  × 20= 34.3 kips
(b) Compute φVc for one-way shear.
Because there is no shear reinforcement, we have φVn = φV c and from Eq. (13-27),
φV=
c ( ) ( )
0.75 × 2λ f c' bd= 0.75 × 2 × 1 × 4000 × 240 × 5.3 × 1 = 121 kips > 34.3 kips
1000
Thus, the slab is OK for one-way shear.
3. Check two-way shear
Punching shear is critical on a rectangular section located at d 2 away from the column face, as
shown in Fig. S13-5.2. The critical perimeter is 21.6 in. by 21.6 in. The average d value for
determining the shear strength of the slab is d = 5.6 in.
Fig. S13-5.2 Critical section for two-way shear at interior column.
(a) Compute Vu on the critical perimeter for two-way shear.
Vu = (193 × 11000) ×  20 × 20 − 21.6144

× 21.6 
=

76.6 kips
13-8
(b) Compute φVc for the critical section.
The length of the critical perimeter is bo = 2 ( 21.6 + 21.6 ) = 86.4 in.

Now, φVc is to be taken as the smallest of the following. From Eq. (13-24),
Vc = 4λ f c' bo d = 4 × 1 × 4000 × 86.4 × 5.6 × 1
1000( )
= 122 kips
For Eq. (13-25), β = 1.0 (since column is square). Therefore,

 4
Vc =  2 +  λ f c' bo d =
 β
( 2 + 4 ) × 1× (
4000 × 86.4 × 5.6 × 1 )
1000
= 184 kips
For Eq. (13-26), α s = 40 for this interior column. Therefore,

α d 
Vc  s + 2  λ f c' b=
=
b
 o 
od
 40 × 5.6

 86.4

 1000 (
+ 2  × 1 × 4000 × 86.4 × 5.6 × 1 = 140 kips )
Therefore, the smallest values is Vc = 122 kips , so φVc = 0.75 × 122 = 91.5 kips > Vu and the slab
is OK in two-way shear.
13-9
13-6 Assume the slab described in Problem 13-5 is supported on 10 in. × 24 in. columns.
Check two-way shear at a typical interior support. Assume unbalanced moments
are negligible.
1. Compute the factored uniform load.

 7 
qu = 1.2 ×  × 150 + 20  + 1.6 × 40 = 193 psf
 12 
2. Check one-way shear.
Assume d = 5.9 in. in long span direction. One-way shear is critical at a distance d from the face
of the column. Thus, the critical sections for one-way shear are A-A and B-B in Fig. S13-6.1. The
loaded areas causing shear on these sections are cross hatched. Their outer boundaries are lines of
symmetry on which Vu = 0 . Because the tributary area for section B-B is larger, this section will
be more critical.
Fig. S13-6.1 Critical section for one-way shear at interior column.
13-10
(a) Compute Vu at section B-B.
Vu = (193 × 11000) × 10 − 5 +125.9  × 20= 35 kips
(b) Compute φVc for one-way shear.
Because there in no shear reinforcement, we have φVn = φV c and from Eq. (13-27),
φV=
c ( ) ( )
0.75 × 2λ f c' bd= 0.75 × 2 × 1 × 4000 × 240 × 5.9 × 1 = 134 kips > 35 kips
1000
Thus, the slab is OK for one-way shear.
3. Check two-way shear
Punching shear is critical on a rectangular section located at d 2 away from the column face, as
shown in Fig. S13-6.2. The critical perimeter is 29.6 in. by 15.6 in. The average d value for
determining the shear strength of the slab is d = 5.6 in.
Fig. S13-6.2 Critical section for two-way shear at interior column.
(a) Compute Vu on the critical perimeter for two-way shear.
Vu = (193 × 11000) ×  20 × 20 − 15.6144

× 29.6 
=

77 kips
13-11
(b) Compute φVc for the critical section.
The length of the critical perimeter is bo = 2 ( 29.6 + 15.6 ) = 90.4 in.

Now, φVc is to be taken as the smallest of the following. From Eq. (13-24),
Vc = 4λ f c' bo d = 4 × 1 × 4000 × 90.4 × 5.6 × 1(1000 )
= 128 kips
24
For Eq. (13-25), =β = 2.4 (since column is 10 in. by 24 in.). Therefore,
10
 4 
Vc =  2 +  λ f c' bo d =  2 +
 β 
4 
2.4 
1 ( )
 × 1 × 4000 × 90.4 × 5.6 × 1000 = 117 kips
For Eq. (13-26), α s = 40 for this interior column. Therefore,

α d 
Vc  s + 2  λ f c' b=
=
 bo 
od
 40 × 5.6

 90.4

 1000(
+ 2  × 1 × 4000 × 90.4 × 5.6 × 1 = 143 kips )
Therefore, the smallest values is Vc = 117 kips , so φVc = 0.75 × 117 = 88 kips > Vu and the slab is
OK in two-way shear.
13-12
13-7 The slab shown in Fig. P13-7 supports a superimposed dead load of 25 psf and a live
load of 60 psf. The slab extends 4 in. past the exterior face of the column to support
an exterior wall that weighs 400 lbs/ft of length of wall. The story-to-story height is
9.5 ft. Use 4500-psi concrete and Grade-60 reinforcement.
(a) Select slab thickness.
• Determine the thickness to limit deflections.
From Table 13-1, the minimum thicknesses of the four typical slab panels are as follows:
Panel 1-2-A-B (corner; treat as exterior), and panels 2-3-A-B and 1-2-B-C (exterior)
Maximum  n = ( 20 × 12 ) − 16 = 224 in.

 n 224
h
Minimum = = = 7.47 in.
30 30
Panel 2-3-B-C (interior)

Maximum  n = 224 in.
 n 224
Minimum = h = = 6.78 in.
33 33
Try h = 8.0 in.
• Check the thickness for shear. We should check the shear at columns A2 and B2
The tributary area for column A2 is cross-hatched in Fig. S 13-7.1 The factored uniform load can
be calculated as:
 8 
qu = 1.2 ×  × 150 + 25  + 1.6 × 60 = 246 psf
 12 
Note that if the area of any of the panels exceeded 400 ft 2 , it would be possible to reduce the live
load before factoring it.
Fig. S 13-7.1 Initial critical shear perimeters and tributary areas for column A2.
13-13
The critical shear perimeter is located at d 2 away from the interior column face and 4 in. from
the exterior column face, as shown in Fig. S 13-7.1. In the following calculation for the factored
shear force transmitted to column A2, the shear force multiplier of 1.15 required for the first
interior support will be applied directly to the appropriate tributary lengths. Then,
d avg ≈ 8 − 0.75 − 0.5 =6.75 in. (assuming 3 in. clear cover and No. 4 bars as slab
4
reinforcement).
bo 22.75 + 2 × 23.38
= = 69.5 in.
  12   22.75 × 23.38  
Vu = 246 × ( 9 × 1.15 + 9 ) 10 +  −    + 1.2 × 400 × ( 9 × 1.15 + 9 )  = 60700 lbs ≈ 61 kips
  12   144 
From Eq.(13-25),
16
β = 1
=
16
 4
 2 +  = 6.0 > 4 (does not govern)
 β
From Eq. (13-26),
α s = 30 , for an exterior slab-column connection
 αsd   30 × 6.75 
 + 2 =  + 2  = 4.91 > 4.0 (does not govern)
 bo   69.5 
Thus, using Eq. (13-24):

( )
φVc = φ 4λ f c' bo d = 0.75 × 4 × 1 × 4500 × 69.5 × 6.75 × 11000 = 94.4 kips > Vu
Note: Vu φ=Vc 0.65 < 0.75
For this ratio, ACI Code Section permits modification of γ f for moment transfer about an axis
parallel to the edge of the slab. With that information and because this ratio is below 0.8, the slab
thickness at this connection should be sufficient for checking shear and moment transfer about an
axis perpendicular to the edge of the column. Shear check for column B2 follows the same
procedure as for column A2. Thus, use a 8-in. slab.Final shear checks will be made in part (c)
after completing the flexural design of the slab.
13-14
(b) Use the direct design method to compute moments, and then design the
reinforcement for slab strips running north and south.
Because there is no edge beams, α f = 0
• Compute moments in the slab strip along column line 2
A2 B2 C2
1 (ft) 20.0 20.0
 n (ft) 18.67 18.67
 2 (ft) 18.0 18.0
qu (ksf) 0.25 0.25
qu  2  2n
Mo = (kip-ft) 196 196
8
Moment Coef. -0.26 0.52 -0.70 -0.65 0.35 -0.65
Moments (kip-ft) -51 +102 -137 -127 +69 -127
• Compute moments in the slab strip along column line 1
A1 B1 C1
1 (ft) 20.0 20.0
 n (ft) 18.67 18.67
 2 (ft) 10.0 10.0
qu (ksf) 0.25 0.25
qu  2  2n
Mo = (kip-ft) 109 109
8
Moment Coef. -0.26 0.52 -0.70 -0.65 0.35 -0.65
Moments (kip-ft) -28 +57 -76 -71 +38 -71
Wall load (kip/ft) 0.48 0.48
q × 2
Wall M o = wall n 21 21
8
Moments from wall
-5.5 11 -15 -14 +7 -14
(kip-ft)
• Distribute the negative and positive moments to the column and middle strips and design the
reinforcement.
In each panel, the column strip extends 0.25 × min ( 1 ,  2 ) = 0.25 × (18 × 12 ) = 54 in. on each side
of the column lines. The total width of the column strip is 2 × 54 in.= 108 in. = 9 ft . The width of
the middle strip is 9 ft. The edge strip has a width of 54 in. + 12 in. = 66 in. = 5.5 ft .
13-15
Division of moment to column and middle strip: north-south strips
Edge Middle Column Middle Column

Column Strip Strip Strip Strip Strip
Strip Width, ft 9.0 9.0 9.0 9.0 5.5
Exterior Negative Moments A1 A2 A3
Slab moment (kip-ft) -28 -51 -51
Moment Coef. 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0 0.0 0.0 1.0
Distributed moments to
strips
-28 0.0 0.0 -51 0.0 0.0 -51
Wall moment (kip-ft) -5.5
Total strip moment (kip-
ft)
-33.5 0.0 -51 0.0 -51
Required As (in.2 ) 1.13 0.0 1.72 0.0 1.56
Minimum As (in.2 ) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 6 #4 9 #4 9 #4 9 #4 9 #4
As (in.2 ) provided 1.20 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80
End Span Positive Moments
Slab moment (kip-ft) 57 102 102
Moment Coef. 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.2 0.2 0.6
strips
34.2 22.8 20.4 61.2 20.4 20.4 61.2
Wall moment (kip-ft) 11
ft)
45.2 43.2 61.2 40.8 61.2
Required As (in.2 ) 1.52 1.45 2.06 1.37 2.06
Minimum As (in.2 ) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 8 #4 10 #4 10 #4 10 #4 10 #4
As (in.2 ) provided 1.60 2.00 2.00* 2.00 2.00*
First Interior Negative
Moments B1 B2 B3
Moment Coef. 0.75 0.25 0.125 0.75 0.125 0.125 0.75
strips
-57 -19 -17.1 -102.3 -17.1 -17.1 -102.3
Wall moment (kip-ft) -15
ft)
-72 -36.1 -102.3 -34.2 -102.3
Required As (in.2 ) 2.43 1.22 3.45 1.15 3.45
Minimum As (in.2 ) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 8 #5 9 #4 11 #5 9 #4 11 #5
As (in.2 ) provided 2.48 1.80 3.41* 1.80 3.41*
* For the reinforcement provided φ M n ≈ M u and the section should be OK for flexure. We could
though add an extra bar to be more conservative.
13-16
Interior Positive Moments
Slab moment (kip-ft) 38 69 69
Moment Coef. 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.6 0.2 0.2 0.6
strips
22.8 15.2 13.8 41.1 13.8 13.8 41.1
Wall moment (kip-ft) 7
Total strip moment (kip-ft) 29.8 29 41.1 27.6 41.1
2
Required As (in. ) 1.00 0.98 1.36 1.04 1.36
Minimum As (in.2 ) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 6 #4 9 #4 9 #4 9 #4 9 #4
As (in.2 ) provided 1.20 1.80 1.80 1.80 1.80
Interior Negative Moments C1 C2 C3
Moment Coef. 0.75 0.25 0.125 0.75 0.125 0.125 -0.75
strips
-53.2 -17.8 -15.9 -95.2 -15.9 -15.9 -95.2
Wall moment (kip-ft) -14
Total strip moment (kip-ft) 67.2 -33.7 -95.2 -31.8 -95.2
2
Required As (in. ) 2.26 1.14 3.21 1.07 3.21
Minimum As (in.2 ) 0.95 1.56 1.56 1.56 1.56
Selected Steel 8 #5 9 #4 11 #5 9 #4 11 #5
As (in.2 ) provided 2.48 1.80 3.41 1.80 3.41
Place the steel in the long direction close to the surface of the slab. Try No. 4 bars. Thus,
d ≈ 8 − 0.75 − 0.25 = 7.0 in.
Compute trial As required at the section of maximum moment (column strip at B2). The largest
M u is 102.3 kip-ft. Assuming that ( jd = 0.95) ,
102.3 × 12,000
=As (trial) = 3.42 in.2
0.9 × 60,000 × 0.95 × 7.0
Compute a and check whether the section is tension controlled:
3.42 × 60,000
= a = 0.82 in.
0.85 × 4500 × ( 5.5 × 12 )
0.82
=c = 1.00 in.
0.825
Clearly, the section is tension-controlled; therefore, φ = 0.9 .
0.82
Compute the value of jd : jd =7.0 − =6.59 in.
2
Assuming that a is constant for all sections (conservative assumption), compute a constant for
computing As :
13-17
M u × 12,000
=As (in.2 ) = 0.0337 M u (kip-ft) (Eq. A)
0.9 × 60,000 × 6.59
The values of As required in the following table are computed from Eq. (A).
From ACI Code Section 13.3.1,

As ,min = 0.0018bh for Grade-60 reinforcement. Maximum bar spacing is 2h (ACI Code
Section 13.3.2), but not more than 18 in. (ACI Code Section 7.12.2.2). Therefore maximum is
16 in.
Edge column strip:

As=
,min 0.0018 × ( 5.5 × 12 )=
× 8 0.95 in.2
5.5 × 12
Minimum number of bar =
spaces = 4.1
16
Therefore, the minimum number of bars is 5.
Other strips:
As=
,min 0.0018 × ( 9 × 12 )=
× 8 1.56 in.2
The minimum number of bars is 7.
(c) Check two-way shear and moment transfer at columns A2 and B2. Neglect
unbalanced moments about column line 2.
Column A2
The critical perimeter is at d 2 from the face of the column, where d is the average depth. At all
exterior ends, the reinforcement is No. 4 bars and d avg = 6.75 in. The shortest perimeter results
from the section shown in Fig. S13-7.2 and the perimeter dimensions are,
b 1= 20 in. + d 2= 23.38 in.
b=2 16 in. + =d 22.75 in.
For moments about the z − z axis,
2 × ( 23.38 × 5.69 ) × 23.38 2
= y AB = 7.86 in.
2 ( 23.38 × 5.69 ) + ( 22.75 × 5.69 )
Therefore, c AB 7.86
= = in. and cCD 13.4 in.
For moments about the w − w axis,
22.75
c=
CB c=
AD = 11.38 in.
2
As calculated in part (a), Vu = 61 kips .
For slabs designed by the direct-design method, the moment transferred from the slab to the
column axis z-z is 0.3M o , and using the moments calculated from part (b),
0.3 × M o =0.3 × 196 =58.8 kip-ft (acting about the centroid of the shear perimeter).
13-18
Fig. S 13-7.2 Critical section- ColumnA2
From part (b), we found that the unbalanced moment due to the wall moments is 7 kip-ft and
assuming that the loads acts at 2 in. from the edge of the slab,
= 23.38 − 2.0 − 7.86= 13.52 in. from centroid
The total moment to be transferred is,

13.52
M z −=
z 58.8 − 7 × = 50.9 kip-ft
12
Note that the unbalanced moment about column line 2 ( M w− w ) is neglected as stated in the
problem.
From Eq. (13-32), calculate the fraction of moment transferred by flexure,

1 1
= γf = = 0.6
2 2
1+ b1 b2 1 + 23.38 23.75
3 3
ACI Code Section 13.5.3.3 allows γ f to be increased to 1.0 if Vu φVc and the resulting ρ is less
than 0.375 ρb within a width of c2 + 3h centered in the column. From part (a), Vu φVc = 0.65 .
Therefore, take γ f = 1.0 and check the reinforcement required.
Width effective fro flexure = c2 + 3h = 16 + 3 × 8 = 40 in.

Effective width ≤ c2 + 2ct ≤ c2 + 2c1 (second expression governs)
Effective width ≤ 16 + 2 × 16 = 48 in.
Assume that ( jd = 0.95d ) , with d = 7.0 in.

50.9 × 12,000
=As = 1.70 in.2
0.9 × 60,000 × 0.95 × 7.0
The steel provided is 9 No. 4 in a column strip width of 9 ft = 108 in. , or roughly 13.5 on centers.
The bars within the 40 in. effective width can be used for the moment transfer. Place four
column-strip bars into this region and add 5 No. 4 bars, giving As = 1.8 in.2 in the effective width.
13-19
Recompute As ,
1.80 × 60,000
= a = 0.71 in.
0.85 × 4500 × 40
50.9 × 12,000
=As (in.2 ) = 1.70 kip-ft (steel chosen OK)
 0.71 
0.9 × 60,000 ×  7 −
 2 
The reinforcement ratio is,
As 1.8
=ρ = = 0.0064
bd 40 × 7
and from Eq. (4-24),
0.85 × 0.825 × 4500  0.003 
ρb =   0.0311 ,
60,000  0.003 + 0.00207 
and thus, 0.375
= ρb 0.0117 > 0.0064 and we can use γ f = 1.0 . As a result, it is not necessary to
transfer any of the moment about z-z axis by eccentric shear stresses.
Column B2
The critical perimeter is shown in Fig. S 13-7.3 and the centroidal axes pass through the centers
of the sides.
bo = 2 ( 22.75 + 22.75 ) = 91 in.
Fig. S 13-7.3 Critical section- Column B2
The factored shear force transmitted to column B2 is,

  22.75 × 22.75  
Vu = 246 × ( 9 × 1.15 + 9 )(10 × 1.15 + 10 ) −    =101500 lbs ≈ 102 kips
  144 
From Eq.(13-25),
 4
 2 +  = 6.0 > 4 (does not govern)
 β
From Eq. (13-26),
α s = 40 , for an exterior slab-column connection
13-20
 αsd   40 × 6.75 
 + 2 =  + 2 = 4.97 > 4.0 (does not govern)
 bo   91 
Thus, using Eq. (13-24):

φV=
c d 0.75 × 4 × 1 × 4500 × 91 × 6.75 × 1
φ 4λ f c' bo= ( )
= 124 kips > Vu
1000
Since, Vu φ=Vc 0.82 > 0.4 no adjustment will be permitted in the ratio of unbalanced moment
resisted by eccentric shear.
The moment about x-x axis to be transferred comes from part (b) and is the difference between
the negative moments on the two sides of column B2, i.e. M u , x − x = 137 − 127 = 10 kip-ft .
From Eq. (13-32), calculate the fraction of moment transferred by flexure (x-x axis),
1 1
= γf = = 0.6
2 2
1+ b1 b2 1 + 1
3 3
The torsional moment of inertia can be calculated from Eq. (13-34),
2
 b d 3 db3  b 
J c= 2  1 + 1  + 2 ( b2 d )  1 
 12 12  2
Where d= 6.75 in. and b=
1 b=
2 22.75 in. Thus, J c = 54150 in.4
By inspection, the reinforcement that is already in the slab is adequate for moment transfer.
From Eq. (13-30) and neglecting unbalanced moment about column line 2 (i.e. about axis y-y),
M u (shear transfer) =γ υ M u =(1 − 0.6 ) × 10 = 4 kip-ft = 48,000 lb-in.
Then,
γ υ M u c 48,000 × 11.38
= = 12.1 psi
Jc 45,150
So,
102,000 124,000
υu (max) = = 166 psi + 12.1 psi=178 psi < φυ=
+ 12.1 c = 202 psi
91 × 6.75 91 × 6.75
Thus, the shear is OK at this column.
13-21
13-8 Refer to the slab shown in Fig. P13-7 and the loadings and material strengths given
in Problem 13-7.
(a) Select slab thickness.
• Problems 13-7 and 13-8 refer to the same flat-slab. As a result, the thickness of the slab was
chosen in part (a) of problem 13-7. Thus, use a 8-in. thick slab.
(b) Use the direct design method to compute moments, and then design the
reinforcement for slab strips running east and west.
In part (b) of Problem 13-7, reinforcement was designed for strips of the slab running north and
south. A similar process should be followed to design the reinforcement for the east-west slab
strips.
(c) Check two-way shear and moment transfer at columns B1 and B2. Neglect
unbalanced moments about column line B.
Follow similar procedure as in Problem 13-7.
13-9 For the corner column (A1) in Fig. P13-7 and the loadings and material strengths
given in Problem 13-7, select a slab thickness to satisfy ACI Code strength
requirements for two-way shear and moment transfer.
(a) Make the check for moment transfer in only one principal direction (use the
more critical direction).
First determine the thickness to limit deflections:

From Table 13-1, the minimum thicknesses of the corner panel is (treat it as an exterior
column):
 in 
Maximum  n =  20 ft × 12  − 16 in = 224 in
 ft 
 n 224 in
Minimum = h = = 7.47 in
30 30
Like Problem 13-8, try h = 8.0 in
Now check whether this thickness is OK for shear at column A1, considering moment transfer in
the more critical direction:
Note that if the area of any of the panels exceeded 400 ft 2 , it would be possible to reduce
the live load before factoring it, but this is not the case for column A1. Therefore the factored
uniform load acting on the corner panel is:
 
 8 in lb 
qu = 1.2 ×  × 150 3 + 25 psf  + 1.6 × 60 psf = 246 psf
 12 in ft 
 ft 
13-22
Although the shear force acting on the first interior column face is amplified by 1.15, the ACI
Code does not permit reducing the tributary shear area for an exterior column to below 0.5×  in
either principal direction. Also note that the critical shear perimeter is located at d 2 away from
the interior column faces.
Therefore,
d avg ≈ 8 in − 0.75 in − 0.5 in =
6.75 in
2 × (16 in + 4 in + 6.75 in / 2 ) =
bo = 46.8 in
  
  ( 23.4 in )2  
V=u 246 psf × (10 ft + 1 ft ) × ( 9 ft + 1 ft ) −  = 26100 lb ≈ 26.1 k
  in 2  
  144 2  
  ft  
Now calculate the ultimate shear stress given this V u and moment transfer in the more critical
direction.
Vu γ v M u c
=vu +
bo d Jc
where:
1 1
γv = 1− 1−
= = 0.4
2 2
1+ b1 / b2 1+ 1
3 3
b=1 b=2 23.4 in
c = 16 in
d ( b1 ) 6.75 in × ( 23.4 in )
2 2
=c AB = = 5.85 in
2 ( b1d + b2 d ) 4 ( 23.4 in × 6.75 in )
 b d 3 db 3 b  
2
J c =  1 + 1 + b1d  1 − c AB   + b2 dc AB 2
 12 12 2  
 23.4 in × ( 6.75 in )3 6.75 in × ( 23.4 in )3  23.4 in  
2
=Jc  + + 23.4 in × 6.75 in ×  − 5.85 in  

 12 12  2  
+ 23.4 in × 6.75 in × ( 5.85 in )

2
J c = 18,600 in 4
And, the more critical moment transfer axis is along column line 1, which is presented in the
solution to Problem 13-7.
M u = −28 k-ft
Finally, we can calculate the maximum combined shear stress considering moment transfer in the
more critical direction as follows:
in
0.4 × ( −28 k-ft ) × 12 × 16 in
V γ M c 26.1 k ft
vu =u ± v u = − 0.198 ksi =
= 198 psi
bo d Jc 46.8 in × 6.75 in 18,600 in 4
13-23
Now compare compute v n to check whether this level of shear stress is acceptable.


 φ 4λ f=
c
'
0.75 × 4 × 1 × 4500 psi = 201 psi

  4  4
φ vn ≤  φ  2 +  f c' = 0.75 ×  2 +  × 4500 psi = 302 psi
  β  1
 α d 
φ  s + 2  f c' = 0.75 ×  20 × 6.75 in + 2  × 4500 psi = 246 psi
  bo   46.8 in 
Therefore,
φ vn = 201 psi > 198 psi = vu OK
(b) Make the check for moment transfer in both principal directions, but permit
a 20 percent increase in the maximum permissible shear stress calculated at
the corner of the critical shear perimeter.
From part (a),

  
  ( 23.4 in )2  
V=u 246 psf × (10 ft + 1 ft ) × ( 9 ft + 1 ft ) −  = 26100 lb ≈ 26.1 k
  in 2  
  144 2  
  ft  
M u1 = −28 k-ft
Following the same procedure shown in Problem 13-7, the moment in the E-W direction is:
M u 2 = −25 k-ft
Now we can calculate the maximum combined shear stress considering moment transfer in both
principal directions as follows:
V γ M c γ M c
vu =u ± v u1 ± v u 2
bo d Jc Jc
in in
0.4 × ( −28 k-ft ) × 12 × 16 in 0.4 × ( −25 k-ft ) × 12 × 16 in
26.1 k ft ft
vu = − 4
− 4
46.8 in × 6.75 in 18,600 in 18,600 in
=vu 0.301
= ksi 301 psi
Now compare compute v n to check whether this level of shear stress is acceptable.


 φ 4λ f=
c
'
0.75 × 4 × 1 × 4500 psi = 201 psi

  4  4
φ vn ≤  φ  2 +  f c' = 0.75 ×  2 +  × 4500 psi = 302 psi
  β  1
 α d 
φ  s + 2  f c' = 0.75 ×  20 × 6.75 in + 2  × 4500 psi = 246 psi
  bo   46.8 in 
13-24
Even allowing for a 20% increase in the maximum permissible shear stress, a slab thickness of 8
in does not seem to be deep enough to satisfy this shear check. Repeat with h = 9.5 in.
d avg ≈ 9.5 in − 0.75 in − 0.5 in =
8.25 in
2 × (16 in + 4 in + 8.25 in / 2 ) =
bo = 48.3 in
  
  ( 24.1 in )2 
V=
u 246 psf × (10 ft + 1 ft ) × ( 9 ft + 1 ft ) − 
  26100 lb ≈ 26.1 k
=
  in 2 
  144 
  ft 2 
b=
1 b=
2 24.1 in
d ( b1 ) 8.25 in × ( 24.1 in )
2 2
=c AB = = 6.03 in
2 ( b1d + b2 d ) 4 ( 24.1 in × 8.25 in )
 b1d 3 db13  b1  
2
Jc =  + + b1d  − c AB   + b2 dc AB 2
 12 12 2  
 24.1 in × ( 8.25 in )3 8.25 in × ( 24.1 in )3  24.1 in  
2
=Jc  + + 24.1 in × 8.25 in ×  − 6.03 in  

 12 12  2  
+ 24.1 in × 8.25 in × ( 6.03 in )

2
J c = 25, 200 in 4
So, now the shear stress demand is:
V γ M c γ M c
vu =u ± v u1 ± v u 2
bo d Jc Jc
in in
0.4 × ( −28 k-ft ) × 12 × 16 in 0.4 × ( −25 k-ft ) × 12 × 16 in
26.1 k ft ft
vu = − −
48.3 in × 8.25 in 25, 200 in 4 25, 200 in 4
= vu 0.227
= ksi 227 psi
If a 9.5 in deep slab is used, then 227 psi = vu ≤ 1.2φ vn =241 psi .
(c) Check one-way shear for a critical diagonal section across the corner near
the corner column.
Assume that the critical section for one-way shear at this corner column occurs at a 45 degree
angle from either of the exterior edges, at a distance, d, from the most interior corner. If we
assume that d = 6.75 in, as in part (a), the length of the critical section is as follows:
2 ( 4 in + 16 in ) × 2 + 6.75 in  =
 =× 70 in
Therefore,
  
  ( 35.0 in )2 
V=
u 246 psf ×  (10 ft + 1 ft ) (
× 9 ft + 1 ft ) 
−  25000 lb ≈ 25.0 k
=
  in 2 
  144 
  ft 2 
13-25
The capacity of the section is:
φVn = φλVc × 6.75 in × 70.0 in =0.75 × 1.0 × 2 × 4,500 psi × 6.75 in × 70.0 in =
47,500 lb =
47.5 k
Therefore, a slab with h = 8 in will not fail in one-way shear along this diagonal failure plane.
13-10 For the slab system shown in Fig. P13-7, assume the slab has four equal spans in the
north-south direction and three equal spans in the east-west direction. Use the
loading and material strengths given in Problem 13-7 and assume a slab thickness of
7.5 in.
(a) Use an equivalent-frame method to analyze the factored design moments

along column line 2 and compare the results with the moments used in part
(b) of Problem 13-7.
For this solution, structural analysis software is used to model an equivalent frame used
to represent the column line in question. Before this can be done, an appropriate equivalent frame
must be defined, which is done here following recommendations from the text.
Column properties:
Ag = 16 in × 16 in = 256 in 2
16 in × (16 in )
3
=I g = 5460 in 4
12
I=e I=
g 5460 in 4
Note that a full 9.5 ft of column will be modeled above and below the slab. These
elements will be fixed at their ends.
Beam properties:
In the positive bending regions and the negative bending regions near interior columns:
α = 0.5 , β = 0.5
bh3 α  2 h3 0.5 × 18 ft × 12 in/ft × ( 7.5 in )
3
Ig
= = = = 3800 in 4
12 12 12
I e β=
= I g 0.5=I g 1900 in 4
In the negative bending regions near exterior columns (assumed to be 0.2 × 1 ft long):
α = 0.2 , β = 0.33
bh3 α  2 h3 0.2 × 18 ft × 12 in/ft × ( 7.5 in )
3
Ig
= = = = 1520 in 4
12 12 12
I e β=
= I g 500 in 4
I g 0.33=
13-26
Loads to be applied:
 
 7.5 in lb lb  lb k
qD = 18 ft ×  × 150 3 + 25 2  = 2140 = 2.14
 12 in ft ft  ft ft

 ft 
 lb  lb k
qL = 18 ft ×  60 2  = 1080 = 1.08
 ft  ft ft
use
= qU 1.2qD + 1.6qL with appropriate pattern loading schemes for each location
Location Equivalent Frame Analysis with Direct Design Method

Software-Based Model (From Problem 13-7)
Column A-2 -62.8 k-ft -51 k-ft
Midspan A-B 80.3 k-ft 102 k-ft
Exterior of col. B-2 -156 k-ft -137 k-ft
Interior of col. B-2 -130 k-ft -127 k-ft
Midspan B-C 64.5 k-ft 69 k-ft
Column C-2 -126 k-ft -127 k-ft
Note that the remaining locations along column line 2 are symmetrical across column C-2.
Some discussion should be presented in the solution, in addition to this table, commenting on the
relative precision of the two approaches, noting that neither is necessarily accurate nor “correct”,
although they are hopefully close to reality. It might be noted that similar discrepancies show up
when the results of a software analysis of a frame system are compared with the results from
using an ACI moment coefficient approach.
(b) Use an equivalent-frame method to analyze the factored design moments

along column line B and compare the results with the moments used in part
(b) of Problem 13-8.
This solution will not be presented, since it is equivalent to Problem 13-10 (a).
13-11 For the same floor system described in Problem 13-10 and the loading and material
strengths given in Problem 13-7, assume the slab thickness has been selected to be
6.5 in.
(a) For a typical interior floor panel, calculate the immediate deflection due to
live load and compare to the limit given in ACI Code Table 9.5 (b).
This solution will follow the approach shown in Example 13-16.
Step 1: Compute the immediate deflection of an interior column strip, which should be taken in
the N-S direction, as these are the longer span column strips. Take the span between columns B-
2 and C-2 as the interior span in question.
13-27
First compute M a . The loads we must consider for deflection calculations are:
6.5 in lb
Dead load: 1.0 × ( Dead Load ) = × 150 3 + 25 psf =106 psf
in ft
12
ft
Service load: 1.0 × ( Dead + Live )= 106 psf + 60 psf = 166 psf
Construction load: 2.0 × ( Slab Dead Load ) =2 × ( 81.3 psf ) =
163 psf
Therefore, cracking will be governed by the service load. Since we know that the moments
calculated in Problem 13-7b are based on an area load of 246 psf, we can take M a to be 166/246 =
0.675 times the column strip moments calculated in Problem 13-7b, as follows:
Negative moment at B-2 and C-2: 0.675 × ( −95.2 k-ft ) =−64.3 k-ft
Positive moment at midspan: 0.675 × 41.1 k-ft = 27.7 k-ft
Now compute M cr :
in
f r I g 7.5 4500 psi × 9 ft × 12 ft × ( 6.5 in ) 12
3
1
M cr =
= = 383 lb-in
= 31.9 k-ft
yt 3.25 in
I think it is a safe bet that the slab will be cracked in both the positive and negative
moment regions regardless, due to temperature and shrinkage effects.
Next, we have to compute I cr and I e . For simplicity, we will assume that the reinforcement
selected in Problem 13-7 is used in this slab as well.
Negative moment region:
11 × 0.31 in 2
= ρ = 0.00486
in
9 ft × 12 × 6.5 in
ft
29,000,000 psi
= n = 7.58
57,000 4500 psi
ρ n = 0.0368
k = 2 ρ n + ( ρ n ) − ρ n = 2 × 0.0368 + ( 0.0368 ) − 0.0368 = 0.237
2 2
1
b ( kd ) + Ast n ( d − kd )
3 2
I cr =
3
1 in
= × 9 ft × 12 × ( 0.237 × 5.4 in ) + 3.41 in 2 × 7.58 × ( 5.4 in − 0.237 × 5.4 in ) =
3 2
514 in 4
3 ft
3 3
M   31.9 k-ft 
(
I e =I cr + ( I g − I cr )  cr  =514 in 4 + 2470 in 4 − 514 in 4  )  =753 in 4
 Ma   64.3 k-ft 
Positive moment region:
Ie ≈ I g = 2470 in 4
So, the weighted average value of I e is:
( )
I e ( average ) =0.7 I em + 0.15 ( I e1 + I e 2 ) =0.7 × 2470 in 4 + 0.15 753 in 4 + 753 in 4 =1950 in 4
13-28
Now we can calculate the immediate deflection due to live load. Using the same logic described
in Example 13-16, assume that 67.5% of the loads will be carried by the column strip.
wL= 60 psf × 18 ft × 0.675= 0.729 k/ft= 60.8 lb/in
wD= 106 psf × 18 ft × 0.675
= 1.29 k/ft= 107 lb/in
4
 in 
4 60.8 lb/in ×  20 ft × 12 
w  ft 
∆ L (column strip max) = 0.0048 × L = 0.0048 × = 0.130 in
EI 57,000 4500 psi × 1950in 4
4
 in 
4 107 lb/in ×  20 ft × 12 
w   ft 
∆ D (column strip max) = 0.0026 × D = 0.0026 × = 0.124 in
EI 57,000 4500 psi × 1950in 4
Step 2: Compute the immediate deflection of an interior middle strip, which should be taken in
the E-W direction, as these are the shorter span middle strips. Take an interior span between
column lines 2 and 3.
First compute M a . The loads we must consider for deflection calculations are:
6.5 in lb
Dead load: 1.0 × ( Dead Load ) = × 150 3 + 25 psf =106 psf
in ft
12
ft
Service load: 1.0 × ( Dead + Live )= 106 psf + 60 psf = 166 psf
Construction load: 2.0 × ( Slab Dead Load ) =
2 × ( 81.3 psf ) =
163 psf
Therefore, cracking will be governed by the service load. Since we know that the moments
calculated in Problem 13-7b are based on an area load of 246 psf, we can take M a to be 166/246 =
0.675 times the slab strip moments calculated using the loading described in Problem 13-7b.
Negative moment at B-2 and C-2: 0.675 × ( −28.3 k-ft ) =−19.1 k-ft
Positive moment at midspan: 0.675 × 24.4 k-ft = 16.5 k-ft
Now compute M cr :
in
f r I g 7.5 4500 psi × 11 ft × 12 ft × ( 6.5 in ) 12
3
1
M cr =
= = 468,000 lb-in
= 39.0 k-ft
yt 3.25 in
It is unlikely that the middle strip will be significantly cracked given that the moments
which control the cracking state are so far below the cracking moment for the strip section.
Therefore, we can assume that:
Negative moment region:
Ie ≈ I g = 3020 in 4
Positive moment region:
3020 in 4
Ie ≈ I g =
And therefore the weighted average value of I e is obviously:
I e ( average ) = 3020 in 4
13-29
Now we can calculate the immediate deflection due to live load. Using the same logic described
in Example 13-16, assume that 32.5% of the loads will be carried by the middle strip.
wL = 60 psf × 20 ft × 0.325= 0.390 k/ft = 32.5 lb/in
wD= 106 psf × 20 ft × 0.325= 0.689 k/ft= 57.4 lb/in
4
 in 
4 32.5 lb/in × 18 ft × 12 
w  ft 
∆ L (middle strip max) = 0.0048 × L = 0.0048 × = 0.029 in
EI 57,000 4500 psi × 3020in 4
4
 in 
4 57.4 lb/in × 18 ft × 12 
w   ft 
∆ D (middle strip max) = 0.0026 × D = 0.0026 × = 0.028 in
EI 57,000 4500 psi × 3020in 4
Step 3: Compute the maximum immediate total deflection in the panel due to the live load, and
compare against allowable deflections according to ACI Code limits.
= 0.130 in + 0.029 =
∆ L (max) in 0.159 in
in
20 ft × 12
ACI Code =
Limit =
/ 360 = ft 0.667 in We are OK.
360
(c) For the same floor panel, calculate the total deflection after the attachment
of partitions and compare to the limit given in ACI Code Table 9.5(b) for
partitions that are not likely to be damaged by long term deflections.
Assume that 85 percent of the dead load is acting when the partitions are
attached to the structure and assume that 25 percent of the live load will be
sustained for a period of one year.
We will assume that the total expected deflection after the attachment of partitions is a
sum of the following:
1. Dead load
Assuming that 85% of the dead load is already acting when the partitions are
attached, consider 15% of the immediate deflection due to dead load affects the
partitions.
0.1 × (0.124 in + 0.028 in) =
∆ Dead immediate = 0.015 in
2. Live load
Assume that the total instantaneous deflection due to live load could occur at any
time once the partitions are attached, so include the full instantaneous deflection
due to live load.
0.159 in
∆ Live immediate =
3. Long term deflections

Assume that the full dead load acts plus 25% of the live load over the
course of a year. Use the suggested deflection coefficient of 3.0 to adjust
for long-term amplification effects.
∆ Long term =3.0 × ( 0.124 in + 0.028 in + 0.25 × 0.159 in ) =0.575 in
13-30
Therefore, the total expected deflection felt by the partitions is:
∆ partitions = ∆ Dead immediate + ∆ Live immediate + ∆ Long term
∆ partitions= 0.015 in + 0.159 in + 0.575 in= 0.749 in
Compare this to the ACI limit for slab systems supporting partitions which are not
likely to be damaged by large deflections:
in
20 ft × 12
ACI Code =
Limit =
/ 240 = ft 1.0 in We are OK.
240
13-12 Repeat the questions in Problem 13-11 for the following panels.
(a) An exterior panel along the east side of the floor system.
This solution will follow the same lines as the solution for Problem 13-11. The column
strip in question will still be taken along the N-S direction. The major change will lie in the
definition of moments acting in the column and middle strips.
(b) An exterior panel along the north side of the floor system.
This solution will follow the same lines as the solution for Problem 13-11. The column
strip in question will still be taken along the N-S direction. The major change will again lie in the
definition of moments acting in the column and middle strips.
(c) A corner panel.
This solution will again follow the same lines as the solution for Problem 13-11. The
column strip in question will still be taken along the N-S direction. The major change will still lie
in the definition of moments acting in the column and middle strips.
13-31
Chapter 14
14-1 Find the minimum q f for the slab panel in Fig. P14-1.
Note: We may need to investigate two yield-line mechanism to find the minimum q f .
1. Select first plastic mechanism. Try the mechanism from text Example 14-4.
II 9 ft.
I 18 ft.
A B
β L1
L1 = 22 ft.
Mechanism No. 1
2. Assume a virtual displacement equal to δ along the positive yield line from A to B.
δ δ
=θI = , and θ II
β × 22 ft 9 ft
3. Compute the internal work. For slab segment I the internal work is:
IW ( I ) = (m p + mn ) ×18 ft × θ I
k-ft δ 9.0 k × δ
=(4 + 7) ×18 ft × =
ft β × 22 ft β
Similarly, the internal work for slab segment II is:
k-ft δ
IW ( II ) =m p × 22 ft × θ II =4 × 22 ft × =9.78 k × δ
k 9 ft
From these, the sum of the internal work is:
 9.0 k   18.0 k 
∑=
IW 2  ×δ 
+ 9.78 k = + 19.6 k  × δ
 β   β 
4. Compute the external work. The two end regions outside of the points A and B are essentially
two half-pyramids that can be combined into a single pyramid with a base area 18 ft x 2β x 22 ft. The
central region between points A and B has a triangular cross-section and extends over a length of
22 ft x (1 – 2β). Thus, the external work is:
14-1
 δ δ
EW= q f  2 β × 22 ft ×18 ft × + 18 ft × (1 − 2 β ) × 22 ft × 
 3 2
= q f ( β × 264 ft 2 + 198 ft 2 − β × 396 ft 2 ) × δ
= q f (198 − β ×132 ) ft 2 × δ
5. Equate the external and internal work. Set EW = Σ(IW) and solve for q f .
 18.0 
 β + 19.6  kips
qf =  
(198 − β ×132 ) ft 2
6. Solve for the minimum value of q f . The solution table below starts with β = 0.5 and slowly
decreases β.
β Numerator, kips Denominator, ft2 q f , ksf
0.50 55.6 132 0.421

0.48 57.1 135 0.424
0.46 58.7 137 0.428
From this table the minimum value of q f is 0.421 ksf and it occurs for a β value of 0.50. Because of
this result, we should investigate a second possible yield-line mechanism.
7. Select a second possible plastic yield-line mechanism.
II
D
I
C L2 = 18 ft.
α L2
11 ft
22 ft.
Mechanism No. 2
8. Assume a virtual displacement of δ along positive yield line C – D.
δ δ
=θI = , and θ II
11 ft α ×18 ft
14-2
IW ( I ) = (m p + mn ) ×18 ft × θ I
k-ft δ
=(4 + 7) ×18 ft × 18.0 k × δ
=
ft 11 ft
IW ( II ) =m p × 22 ft × θ II
k-ft δ 4.89 k
= 4 × 22 ft × = ×δ
k α ×18 ft α
 4.89 k   9.78 k 
∑=
IW 2 18.0 k +
 α  =× δ  36.0 k +
 α 
×δ
10. Compute the external work. The two end regions outside of the points C and D are essentially
two half-pyramids that can be combined into a single pyramid with a base area 22 ft x 2α x 18 ft.
The central region between points C and D has a triangular cross-section and extends over a length of
18 ft x (1 – 2α). Thus, the external work is:
 δ δ
EW= q f  2α ×18 ft × 22 ft × + (1 − 2α ) ×18 ft × 22 ft × 
 3 2
= q f (α × 264 ft 2 + 198 ft 2 − α × 396 ft 2 ) × δ
= q f (198 − α ×132 ) ft 2 × δ
 9.78 
 36 + kips
 α 
qf =
(198 − α ×132 ) ft 2
6. Solve for the minimum value of q f . The solution table below starts with β = 0.5 and slowly
decreases β.
α Numerator, kips Denominator, ft2 q f , ksf
0.50 55.6 132 0.421

0.48 56.4 135 0.419
0.46 57.3 137 0.417
0.44 58.2 140 0.416
0.42 59.3 143 0.416
From this table the minimum value of q f is 0.416 ksf and it occurs for an α value of approximately
0.43. In this case it was important for us to investigate this second possible yield-line mechanism.
14-3
1. Select plastic yield-line mechanism. Try a mechanism similar to that in text Example 14-6.
10 ft. free edge
II A
L1 = 20 ft.
I β L1
20 ft.
Assumed yield-line mechanism
2. Assume a virtual displacement equal to δ along the positive yield line from A to B.
δ δ
=θI = , and θ II
β × 20 ft 10 ft
IW ( I ) = (m p + mn ) × 20 ft × θ I
k-ft δ 12.5 k × δ
=(4.5 + 8) × 20 ft × =
ft β × 20 ft β
k-ft δ
IW ( II ) =m p × 20 ft × θ II =4.5 × 20 ft × =9.0 k × δ
k 10 ft
∑=
IW IW ( I ) + 2 × IW ( II )
 12.5 k 
=  + 18.0 k  × δ
 β 
4. Compute the external work. The end region below the point A is essentially a half-pyramid with
a base area of 20 ft x β x 20 ft. The region between points A and B has a triangular cross-section and
extends over a length of 20 ft x (1 – β). Thus, the external work is:
14-4
 δ δ
EW = q f  β × 20 ft × 20 ft × + 20 ft × (1 − β ) × 20 ft × 
 3 2
= q f ( β ×133.3 ft 2 + 200 ft 2 − β × 200 ft 2 ) × δ
= q f ( 200 − β × 66.7 ) ft 2 × δ
 12.5 
 β + 18.0  kips
qf =  
( 200 − β × 66.7 ) ft 2
6. Solve for the minimum value of q f . The solution table below starts with β = 0.75 and increase β
in increments of 0.05.
0.75 34.7 150 0.231

0.80 33.6 147 0.229
0.85 32.7 143 0.228
0.90 31.9 140 0.228
0.95 31.2 137 0.228
1.00 30.5 133 0.229
From this table the minimum value of q f is 0.228 ksf and it occurs for a β value of approximately
0.90.
14-5
1. Select plastic yield-line mechanism. Try a mechanism similar to that in Fig. 14-5(d).
F
LIII
X
C
III
II
D
18 ft
I
Y
A B E
24 ft
This is a complex mechanism with many potential variables. We will select values for some of the
distances shown in this figure as an initial trial. A few points should be noted regarding this
mechanism. As stated in the text, a positive yield line between two adjacent plate segments will
extend to or toward the intersection of the axes of rotation for those two plate segments. Thus, the
positive yield line A-D starts at the intersection between the axes of rotation for segments I and II (at
point A). Similarly, the other two positive yield lines branching out from point D aim toward the
points E (intersection of axes of rotation for segments I and III) and F (intersection of axes of rotation
for segments II and III). Experience with this particular mechanism indicates that the minimum value
of q f will occur when the point D is relatively close to the corner column support.
2. Select trial values for the assumed mechanism. The following values were selected for the
mechanism shown above.
B-E = 24 ft C-F = 18 ft Y = 15 ft X = 20 ft
With these values selected, geometry can be used to determine the additional values shown on the
following figure. It should be noted that the three lines extending from the slab to line E-F (the axes
of rotation for segment III) are all perpendicular to that line.
3. Assume a virtual displacement equal to δ occurs at the point D.
δ δ δ
=θI = ; θ II , and θ III
=
15 ft 20 ft 4.80 ft
14-6
F
24
.5'
4.5
'
4.1
9'
'
4.0
C
17.1'
0'
4.8
III
'
11
26
4.
D .9'
18 ft II
I
12.9'
A B E
24 ft
4. Compute the internal work. For the three slab segments the internal work is:
IW ( I ) = (m p + mn ) × 24 ft × θ I
k-ft δ
=(6 + 8) × 24 ft × =(22.4 k) × δ
ft 15 ft
IW ( II ) = (m p + mn ) ×18 ft × θ II
k-ft δ
=(6 + 8) ×18 ft × =(12.6 k) × δ
k 20 ft
IW ( III ) = m p × LIII × θ III
k-ft δ
=6 × 8.60 ft × =(10.8 k) × δ
k 4.80 ft
∑ IW
= ( 45.8 k ) × δ
5. Compute the external work. Rather than calculate a displaced volume, we will determine the
magnitude of load acting on each plate segment and then multiply that load times the displacement at
the centroid of the segment. If we did this directly for the defined segments, it would be difficult to
find the centroids of each segment. Thus, for plate segment I we will calculate the work done by the
distributed load acting on the triangular segment A-D-E, and then subtract to work for the triangular
piece outside the actual slab panel. So, for segment I:
 δ (12.9 15) × δ 
EW
= ( I )  A(total) × − A(outside) ×  × q f
 3 3
14-7
1 1 1 12.9 15 
EW ( I ) =  × 48′ ×15′ × − × 24′ ×12.9′ × × q f ×δ
2 3 2 3 
= (75.6 ft 2 ) × q f × δ
Similarly, for segment II:
1 1 1 17.1 20 
EW ( II ) =  × 36′ × 20′ × − ×18′ ×17.1′ × × q f ×δ
2 3 2 3 
= (76.1 ft 2 ) × q f × δ
And for segment III, where some additional small triangles are used outside the slab panel:
1 1 1 4.11 4.80 1 4.09 4.80

EW ( III ) =[ × 60′ × 4.80′ × − × 26.9′ × 4.11′ × − × 24.5′ × 4.09′ × −
2 3 2 3 2 3
1 4.11 4.80 1 4.09 4.80
− × 3.10′ × 4.11′ × − × 5.5′ × 4.09′ × ]× q f × δ
2 3 2 3
EW=( III ) (13.0 ft 2 ) × q f × δ
Thus, the sum of external work is:
∑=
EW (165 ft 2 ) × q f × δ
6. Setting the sum of the internal work equal to the sum of the external work gives:
45.8 kips
q f (trial)
= = 0.278 ksf
165 ft 2
7. Estimate for the minimum value of q f . Rather than doing several trials, we will assume that the
selected trial mechanism is reasonable and should give an answer within ten percent of the true
minimum value for q f . Thus, we can say:
q f (min) ≅ 0.9 × 0.278 =

0.250 ksf
14-8
1. Select a plastic yield-line mechanism. Try the mechanism shown below. Note that there is a
single variable for this mechanism, the value of β.
free edge
A
II L1 = 18 ft.
β L1
I
β L2
L2 = 24 ft.
2. Assume a virtual displacement equal to δ occurs at the point A.
δ δ
=θI = , and θ II
β ×18 ft (1 − β ) × 24 ft
IW ( I ) =  mn + m py (1 − β )  × 24 ft × θ I
k-ft δ
=[3.0 + 4.0(1 − β ) ] × 24 ft ×
ft β ×18 ft
 4.0 + 5.33(1 − β ) 
= 
β  kips × δ
 
IW ( II ) =  mn + m px × β  ×18 ft × θ II
k-ft δ
= [3.0 + 6.0 × β ] ×18 ft ×
ft (1 − β ) × 24 ft
 2.25 + 4.50 × β 
= 
1− β  kips × δ
 
 4.0 + 5.33(1 − β ) 2.25 + 4.50 × β 

∑ IW =
 β
+
1− β  kips × δ
 
14-9
4. Compute the external work. The deflected shape is essentially a half-pyramid, with a combined
base area (18 ft x 24 ft)/2. Thus, the external work is:
18 ft × 24 ft δ 
EW q f 
= = ×  q f (72.0 ft 2 ) × δ
 2 3
 4.0 + 5.33(1 − β ) 2.25 + 4.50 × β 

 β
+
1− β  kips
qf =  
2
72.0 ft
6. Solve for the minimum value of q f . Because the denominator is constant, we need to minimize
the numerator. It is expected that β ≈ 0.5.

0.48 22.6 --- ---
0.50 22.3 --- ---
0.52 22.2 --- ---
0.54 22.1 72.0 0.307
0.56 22.2 --- ---
From this table the minimum value of q f is 0.307 ksf and it occurs for a β value of 0.54.
14-10
14-5 Find the maximum required values of mn and m p to safely carry the distributed loads
acting on the slab panel in Fig. P14-5. In addition to the weight of the slab, the panel is to resist
a superimposed dead load of 25 psf and a live load of 60 psf.
1. Determine the total factored load to be resisted.
Slab weight is (7.5/12) x 150 = 94 psf; Thus, the total dead load = 94 + 25 = 119 psf.
The live load can be reduced based on the panel area (20 x 26 = 520 ft2). Note: K LL = 1.0. For
this area, the reduced live load is equal to 54.5 psf.
So, the total factored load, q u = 1.2 x 119 + 1.6 x 54.5 = 230 psf = 0.230 ksf
2. Select a second possible plastic yield-line mechanism. A couple items should be noted. First, in
text Example 14-4, the value of β was close to 0.5, so having a virtual displacement of δ only at a
single point (point A) will give a relatively good answer. Also, because of the fixed supports at the
support edges for plate segments I and II, we would like to make the rotations of those plate segments
smaller than for plate segments III and IV. Thus, β will be greater than 0.5.
β x 26 ft
III
A
II IV
20 ft
I β x 20 ft
26 ft
3. Assume a virtual displacement equal to δ at point A.

δ δ
=θI = , and θ II
β × 20 ft β × 26 ft
δ δ
=θ III = , and θ IV
(1 − β ) × 20 ft (1 − β ) × 26 ft
3. Compute the internal work. For the four slab segments the internal work is:
1.3(mn + m p )
IW ( I ) = (mn + m p ) × 26 ft × θ I = ×δ
β
0.77(mn + m p )
IW ( II ) = (mn + m p ) × 20 ft × θ II = ×δ
β
14-11
1.3m p
IW ( III ) = m p × 26 ft × θ III = ×δ
1− β
0.77 m p
IW ( IV ) = m p × 20 ft × θ IV = ×δ
1− β
 2.07(mn + m p ) 2.07 m p 
∑=
IW 
β
+
1− β 
 ×δ

At some point in the design process we will need to make a decision on the ratio between the flexural
strength of the bottom reinforcement, m p , vs. the strength of the top reinforcement, m n . For this
solution, assume this ratio is 0.75. Thus, the internal work can be expressed as a function of m n .
 3.62mn 1.55mn 
∑ IW =  β
+
1 − β 
×δ

4. Compute the external work. In previous problems we have solved for the distributed load, q f , at
the development of a failure mechanism. In this case, q f is equivalent to q u divided by the strength
reduction factor, φ, which will be assume to be equal to 0.9. Thus,
qu  δ  0.230 ksf
EW
=  20 ft × 26 ft ×=  ) × δ (44.2 k) × δ
(173 ft 2=
φ  3 0.9
5. Equate the external and internal work.
 3.62mn 1.55mn  k-ft

 β + 1 − β  ≥ 44.2 kips =
44.2
k
 
6. Solve for the minimum required value of mn . The solution table below starts with β = 0.5 and
increase β in increments of 0.05.
β Required m n , kip-ft/ft
0.50 4.27
0.55 4.41
0.60 4.46
0.65 4.42
From this table the minimum required value of m n is 4.46 kip-ft/ft. Assuming Grade 60
reinforcement and 4000 psi concrete, the use of No. 4 bars at a spacing of 14-in. on centers in each
direction will provide a negative moment strength of 5.24 kip-ft/ft. This is a tension-controlled
section, so φ = 0.9. Also, this design satisfies the maximum spacing limits and minimum area
requirements for slab reinforcement. Required m p = 0.75 x 4.46 = 3.35 k-ft/ft.
14-12
Chapter 15
15-1 Design a wall footing for the following conditions: Service dead load is 6 kips/ft,
service live load is 8 kips/ft. Wall is 12 in. thick. Allowable soil pressure, qa , is 4000
final grade. f c′ 3500
psf at 3 ft below the = = psi and f y 60, 000 psi.
The following design is made for a foot length of footing; therefore, the part “per foot” will not
be repeated in all units for simplicity.
Estimate size of footing and factored net pressure

Assume the bottom face of the footing is 3 ft below the ground surface.
Assume the thickness of the footing 12 in.
Assume the soil density is 120 lb/ft 3
Allowable net soil pressure:
qn = 4 ksf − (1.0 ft × 0.15 k/ft 3 + 2.0 ft × 0.12 k/ft 3 ) = 3.61 ksf
Required footing area:
6 k +8 k
=Areq. = 3.88 ft 2
3.61 ksf
∴ Try 4 ft wide strip footing.
Factored net pressure:
1.2 × 6 k + 1.6 × 8 k
=qnu = 5 ksf
4 ft ×1 ft
Check one-way shear

Assume a concrete cover of 3 in., and #8 bars being used.
d = 12 in. − 3 in. − 0.5 in. = 8.5 in.
The distance the footing extends to each side from the column face:
( 48 in. − 12 in.) / 2 =
18 in.
 18 in. − 8.5 in. 
Vu = 5 ksf ×   ×1 ft= 3.96 k
 12 in/ft 
φVc= φ 2λ f c′bw d= 0.85 × 2 3500 ×12 × 8.5= 10300 lb= 10.3 k
Since φVc is significantly greater than Vu , we reduce the footing thickness to the
minimum allowable by ACI Section 15.7, i.e.:
6 in. + bar dia. + 3 in. cover. = 10 in.
d = 10 in. − 3 in. − 0.5 in. = 6.5 in.
 18 in. − 6.5 in. 
Vu = 5 ksf ×   ×1 ft= 4.79 k
 12 in/ft 
φVc= φ 2λ f c′bw d= 0.85 × 2 3500 ×12 × 6.5= 7840 lb= 7.84 k > Vu , OK.
∴ Use 10 in. thick footing
Design reinforcement
(1.5 ft ) =
2
M u= ( 5 ksf ×1ft ) × 5.63 k-ft

2
15-1
Assume j = 0.90
5.63 k-ft ×12 in/ft
=As = 0.21 in.2
0.9 × 60 ksi × (0.9 × 6.5 in)
As ,min = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 ×12 in. ×10 in. = 0.22 in.2
∴Use #4 bars at with a spacing of 10 in. ( As = 0.24 in.2 )
d = 10 in. − 3 in. − 0.25 in. = 6.75 in.
0.24 in.2 × 60 ksi
=a = 0.4 in.
0.85 × 3.5 psi × 12 in.
d −c 6.75 − ( 0.4 / 0.85 )
εt
= ε=
cm × 0.003 φ 0.9
= 0.040 > 0.005,∴=
c 0.4 / 0.85
0.9 × 0.24 in.2 × 60 ksi × ( 6.75 in. − 0.4 in./2 )
φMn =
= 84.9
= k-in. 7.07 k-ft > M u
Check development
Bar spacing exceeds 2db and cover exceeds d b ∴ This is Case 2 development.
ψ eψ t f y 1 × 1 × 60000 psi
d = db = × 0.5 in. = 20 in. > 18 in. − 3 in., NG.
25λ f c′ 25 × 1 × 3500 psi
We shall use 90º standard hooks to anchor the bars. The required development length for
a 90º standard hook is:
0.02ψ e f y 0.02 × 1 × 60000 psi
= d = db × 0.5=in. 10 in. < 18 in. − 3 in., OK.
λ f c′ 1 × 3500 psi
Temperature requirement for longitudinal reinforcement:

As , req. = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 × 48 in. ×10 in. = 0.86 in.2
∴ Use 5 #4 bars for longitudinal reinforcement.
Use 10 in. thick by 4 ft. wide footing with #4 bars at 10 in. o.c. with 90º hooks at both ends in the
transverse direction, and 5 #4 bars in the longitudinal direction.
15-2 Design a wall footing for the following conditions: Service dead load is 18 kips/ft,
service live load is 8 kips/ft. Wall is 16 in. thick. Allowable soil pressure,
=qa 6000 psf at ground
= surface. f c′ 3,=
000 psi and f y 60, 000 psi.

Assume top of footing is flush with surface of ground.
Assume the thickness of the footing 16 in.
qn =6 ksf − 1.33 ft × 0.15 k/ft 3 =5.80 ksf
18 k + 8 k
=Areq. = 4.48 ft 2
5.8 ksf
∴ Try 4.5 ft wide strip footing.
15-2
Factored net pressure:
1.2 ×18 k + 1.6 × 8 k
=qnu = 7.64 ksf
4.5 ft ×1 ft
Check one-way shear

Assume a concrete cover of 3 in., and #8 bars being used.
d = 16 in. − 3 in. − 0.5 in. = 12.5 in.
( 54 in. − 16 in.) / 2 =
19 in.
 19 in. − 12.5 in. 
Vu 7.64 ksf × 
=  ×1=
ft 4.14 k
 12 in/ft 
φVc= φ 2λ f c′bw d= 0.85 × 2 3000 ×12 ×12.5= 14 k
Since φVc is significantly greater than Vu , we reduce the footing thickness to, say, 12 in.:
d = 12 in. − 3 in. − 0.5 in. = 8.5 in.
 19 in. − 8.5 in. 
Vu 7.64 ksf × 
=  ×1=
ft 6.69 k
 12 in/ft 
φVc= φ 2λ f c′bw d= 0.85 × 2 3000 ×12 × 8.5= 9500 lb= 9.5 k , OK.
∴ Use 12 in. thick footing (note that if the thickness is reduced to the minimum
of 10 in., the shear check will not be satisfied.
(1.583 =
ft )
2
Mu
= ( 7.64 ksf ×1ft ) × 9.57 k-ft
2
Assume j = 0.90
9.57 k-ft ×12 in/ft
=As = 0.28 in.2
0.9 × 60 ksi × (0.9 × 8.5 in)
As ,min = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 ×12 in. ×12 in. = 0.26 in.2
∴Use #5 bars at with a spacing of 12 in. ( As = 0.31 in.2 )
d = 12 in. − 3 in. − 0.31 in. = 8.7 in.
0.31 in.2 × 60 ksi
=a = 0.61 in.
0.85 × 3.0 psi × 12 in.
d −c 8.7 − ( 0.61/ 0.85 )
εt
= ε=
cm × 0.003 φ 0.9
= 0.033 > 0.005,∴=
c 0.61/ 0.85
0.9 × 0.31 in.2 × 60 ksi × ( 8.7 in. − 0.61/ 2 in.)
φMn =
= 141
= k-in. 11.7 k-ft > M u
Check development
ψ eψ t f y 1 × 1 × 60000 psi
 d= db= × 0.625 in.= 27.4 in. > 19 in. − 3 in., NG.
25λ f c′ 25 × 1 × 3000 psi
15-3
We shall use 90º standard hooks to anchor the bars. The required development length for
a 90º standard hook is:
0.02ψ e f y 0.02 × 1 × 60000 psi
=
hb d=
b × 0.625 in.
= 14 in. < 19 in. − 3 in., OK.
λ f c′ 1 × 3000 psi
Temperature requirement for longitudinal reinforcement:

As , req. = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 × 54 in. ×12 in. = 1.17 in.2
∴ Use 6 #4 bars for longitudinal reinforcement.
Use 12 in. thick by 4 ft – 6 in. wide footing with #5 bars at 12 in. o.c. with 90º hooks at both ends
in the transverse direction, and 6 #4 bars in the longitudinal direction.
15-3 Design a square spread footing for the following conditions: Service dead load is 350
kips, service live load is 275 kips. Soil density = 130 lb/ft 3 . Allowable soil pressure =
4500 psf at 5 ft below the basement floor. Column is 18 in. square.
f c′ = 3500 psi and f y = 60, 000 psi . Place bottom of footing at 5 ft below floor level.

Estimate thickness between 18 and 36 in., say 30 in.
Assume the floor thickness as 6 in.
qn = 4.5 ksf − (2.5 ft + 0.5 ft) × 0.15 k/ft 3 − 2.0 ft × 0.13 k/ft 3 = 3.79 ksf
qn =6 ksf − 1.33 ft × 0.15 k/ft 3 =5.80 ksf
350 k + 275 k
=Areq. = 165 ft 2
3.79 ksf
∴ Try 13 ft square footing.
Factored net soil pressure
1.2 × 350 k + 1.6 × 275 k
=qnu = 5.09 ksf
169 ft 2
Check thickness for two-way shear
Assume a concrete cover of 3 in., and #8 bars being used. Average effective depth:
d = 30 in. − 3 in. − 1 in. = 26 in.
 2  18 in. + 26 in.  
2
Vu = 5.09 ksf × 169 ft −    = 792 k

  12 in./ft  
Vc is taken as the smaller of the following:
 4   4
 2 +  λ f c′bw d =
Vc =  2 +  λ f c′bw d =
6λ f c′bw d
 βc   1
(Note β c is the ratio of the column dimensions)
 αsd   40 × 26 in. 
Vc = 2+  λ f c′bw d = 2 +  λ f c′bw d =
7.9λ f c′bw d
 bo   ( 4 × 44 in. ) 
(Note α s = 40 for a column placed at the center of its footing)
15-4
Vc = 4λ f c′bw d
∴φVc= φ 4λ f c′bw d= 0.85 × 4 3000 × (4 × 44) × 26= 852000 lb= 852 k > Vu , OK.
∴ Use 30 in. thick footing.
Check one-way shear

(156 in. − 18 in.) / 2 =
69 in.
 69 in. − 26 in. 
V=
u 5.09 ksf ×   ×13 =
ft 237 k
 12 in/ft 
φV=c 0.85 × 2 × 3000 × (13 × 12 ) × 26 = 378 k > Vu , OK.
= 378000 lb
( 5.75 ft=
)
2
M=
u ( 5.09 ksf ×13 ft ) × 1095 k-ft
2
Assume j = 0.90
1095 k-ft ×12 in/ft
=As = 10.4 in.2
0.9 × 60 ksi × (0.9 × 26 in)
As ,min = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 ×156 in. × 30 in. = 8.4 in.2
∴Use 17 #7 ( As = 10.2 in.2 )
d= 30 in. − 3 in. − 1.5 × 0.875 in.
= 25.7 in.
10.2 in.2 × 60 ksi
=a = 1.54 in.
0.85 × 3.0 ksi × 156 in.
d −c 25.7 − (1.51/ 0.85 )
εt
= ε=cm × 0.003 φ 0.9
= 0.040 > 0.005,∴=
c 1.51/ 0.85
0.9 ×10.2 in.2 × 60 ksi × ( 25.7 in. − 1.54 / 2 in.)
φMn =
= 13700
= k-in. 1140 k-ft > M u
Check development
ψ eψ t f y 1 × 1 × 60000 psi
 d= db= × 0.875 in.= 38 in.<69 in. − 3 in., OK.
25λ f c′ 25 × 1 × 3000 psi
Use 13 ft square footing, 30 in. thick with 17 #7 bars each way.
Design footing-column joint

Factored load at base of column:
1.2 × 350 + 1.6 × 275 =860 kips
Allowable bearing on footing:
0.7 × 0.85 × 3 ×18 ×18 × 2 =
1160 k
Allowable bearing on column (assume column f c′ = 3000 psi )
15-5
0.7 × 0.85 × 3 ×18 ×18 =578 k
860 − 578
Area of dowels= required = 6.7 in.2
0.7 × 60
Depending on how the column reinforcement is selected, the dowel bars will be selected
accordingly for construction simplicity.
15-4 Design a square spread footing for the following conditions: Service dead load is 400
kips, service live load is 250 kips. Soil density is 120 lb/ft 3 . Allowable soil pressure is
6000 psf. Column cross section is 30 in. × 12 in. f c′ = 3000 psi and
f y = 60, 000 psi. Select the elevation of the top of the footings so that there is 6 in. of
soil and a 6 in. slab on grade above the footing.
Estimate size of footing and factored soil pressure

If the column were square it would be 19 × 19 in. to have the same area. Estimate
thickness between 19 and 38 in. Say 30 in.
qn = 6 ksf − (2.5 ft + 0.5 ft) × 0.15 k/ft 3 + 0.5 ft × 0.12 k/ft 3 = 5.49 ksf
400 k + 250 k
=Areq. = 118 ft 2
5.49 ksf
∴Try 11 ft square footing

Factored net soil pressure:
1.2 × 400 k + 1.6 × 250 k
=qnu = 7.27 ksf
121
Check thickness for two-way shear

d = 30 in. − 3 in. − 1 in. = 26 in.
Dimension of the critical perimeter are:
30 + 26 = 56 in.
12 + 26 = 38 in.
bo = 188 in.
 56 in. × 38 in. 
Vu = 7.27 ksf × 121 ft 2 − = 772 k
 144 in.2 /ft 2 
Vc is taken as the smaller of the following:
 4   4 
 2 +  λ f c′bw d =
Vc = 2+  λ f c′bw d =3.6λ f c′bw d
 βc   2.5 
 αsd   40 × 26 in. 
Vc =
2+  λ f c′bw d = 2+  λ f c′bw d =
7.5λ f c′bw d
 bo   188 in. 
Vc = 4λ f c′bw d
∴φVc = φ 3.6λ f c′bw d = 0.85 × 3.6 3000 ×188 × 26 = 819000 lb = 819 k > Vu , OK.
15-6
∴ Use 30 in. thick footing.
Check one-way shear. Check the most severe side (shear along the 30 in. – side)
 60 in. − 26 in. 
V=
u 7.27 ksf ×   × 11=
ft 227 k
 12 in/ft 
φVc = 0.85 × 2 3000 ×132 × 26 = 320 kips > Vu , OK.
Design reinforcement along the 12 in. – side of the column.

d = 30 in. − 3 in. − 0.5 in. = 26.5 in.
( 5 ft=
)
2
M=
u ( 7.27 ksf ×11 ft ) × 1000 k-ft
2
Assume j = 0.90
1000 k-ft ×12 in/ft
=As = 9.3 in.2
0.9 × 60 ksi × (0.9 × 26.6 in)
As ,min = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 ×132 in. × 30 in. = 7.1 in.2
∴Use 16 #7 ( As = 9.6 in.2 )
d= 30 in. − 3 in. − 0.5 × 0.875 in.= 26.6 in.
9.6 in.2 × 60 ksi
=a = 1.71 in.
0.85 × 3.0 ksi × 132 in.
d −c 26.6 − (1.71/ 0.85 )
εt
= ε=
cm × 0.003 φ 0.9
= 0.037 > 0.005,∴=
c 1.71/ 0.85
0.9 × 9.6 in.2 × 60 ksi × ( 26.6 in. − 1.71/ 2 in.)
φMn =
= 13300
= k-in. 1110 k-ft > M u
Design reinforcement along the 30 in. – side of the column.

d= 30 in. − 3 in. − 1.5 × 0.875 in.
= 25.7 in.
( 4.25 ft=
)
2
M=
u ( 7.27 ksf ×11 ft ) × 722 k-ft
2
Assume j = 0.90
722 k-ft ×12 in/ft
=As = 6.94 in.2
0.9 × 60 ksi × (0.9 × 25.7 in)
As ,min = 0.0018bh = 0.0018 ×132 in. × 30 in. = 7.1 in.2
∴Use 12 #7 ( As = 7.2 in.2 )
7.2 in.2 × 60 ksi
=a = 1.28 in.
0.85 × 3.0 psi × 132 in.
d −c 25.7 − (1.28 / 0.85 )
εt
= ε=
cm × 0.003 φ 0.9
= 0.048 > 0.005,∴=
c 1.28 / 0.85
15-7
0.9 × 7.2 in.2 × 60 ksi × ( 25.7 in. − 1.28 / 2 in.)
φMn =
= 9740
= k-in. 812 k-ft > M u
Check development
ψ eψ t f y 1 × 1 × 60000 psi
 d= db= × 0.875 in.= 38 in.<51 in. − 3 in., OK.
25λ f c′ 25 × 1 × 3000 psi
Use 11ft square footing. 30 in. thick with 16 #7 bars parallel to the 30 in. side of the column and
12 #7 bars perpendicular.
Footing-column joint
Factored load at base of column = 1.2 × 400 + 1.6 × 250 = 880 kips
Allowable bearing on footing= 0.7 × 0.85 × 3 × 30 ×12 × 2= 1290 kips
Allowable bearing on column 645 kips ( if column f c′ = 3000 psi )
880 − 645
Area of dowels= required = 5.6 in.2
0.7 × 60
Depending on how the column reinforcement is selected, the dowel bars will be selected
accordingly for construction simplicity.
15-8
Chapter 17
17-1 The deep beam shown in Fig. P17-1 supports a factored load of 1450 kips. The beam
and columns are 24 in. wide. Draw a truss model neglecting the effects of stirrups
and the dead load of the wall. Check the strength of the nodes and struts, and design
the tension tie. Use f c′ = 4000 psi (normal weight concrete) and f y = 60,000 psi .
69 36
1450 k
1290 k
644 k
B C
Node 1
21.1 10.5
Node 2 55.3° Node 3

35.8º
A D
644 k
1290 k
30 24
243
Note: Length units are in inches.
Fig. S17-1
1. Compute Pu / φ and reactions

To include φ in calculations
= use Pu / φ 1450
= kips/0.75 1930 kips
Sum moments about the center of the support at A, assuming the member acts as a simple
beam and all loads and reactions act along the axes of the columns.
17-1
69 + 18 − 15
R=
D × 1930 kips
= 644 kips
243 − 12 − 15
RA = 1930 kips − 644 kips = 1286 kips ≅ 1290 kips
2. Select size of beam

Assume RA is the maximum value of Vu / φ , and set this equal to ( 6 to 8 ) f c′bd . For
b = 24 in. , solve to find d values between 142 and 106 in. Try an overall beam height h
of 10 ft. and assume that d is approximately 9 ft. = 108 in.
3. Isolate D-regions
Because the distance between the load and the reactions is less than 2h at both ends, the
beam consists of two D-regions, one of each side of the load.
4. Draw a strut-and-tie model and establish base dimensions of the nodes

Use a truss with two inclined struts and a tie, as shown below.
Compute f cu
Node 1 (CCC node):

f cu = 0.85β n f c′ = 0.85 × 1.0 × 4000 psi = 3400 psi
Node 2 and 3 (CCT nodes):
f cu = 0.85β n f c′ = 0.85 × 0.8 × 4000 psi = 2720 psi
Strut 1-2 (assume sufficient web reinforcement is used to satisfy Eq. 17-10):
f cu = 0.85β s f c′ = 0.85 × 0.75 × 4000 psi = 2550 psi
Select the sizes of the nodes assuming they are hydrostatic nodes with f cu = 2550 psi
Node 1
Divide the load into two components equal to the two reactions.
Width of left
= part of node 1290 k /(2.55 ksi × 24 in.) = 21.1 in.
Similarly, the width of the right part of the node = 10.5 in.
Total node width = 21.1 + 10.5 = 31.6 in. < 36 in. , OK.
Node 2
Width of node = 21.1 in. < 30 in. (assume reaction is at center of column)
Node 3
Width of node = 10.5 in. < 24 in. (assume reaction is at center of column)
5. Establish geometry of truss and forces in struts and tie:

Assume that d v =−h 2 ft = 10 ft. − 2 ft. = 8 ft. = 96 in.
Then, tanθ ( left part of span ) = 96 in./(69 + 18 − 15) in.; so, θ ( left )=53.1
Total span length = 243 − 12 − 15 = 216 in.
Then, tanθ ( right part of span ) =
96 in./(216 − 72)in.; so,θ ( right) =
33.7
17-2
Strut 1-2
Axial force = 1290 kips/sin53.1 = 1610 kips
Horizontal component = 1610 kips × cos53.1 = 967 kips = force in Tie 2-3
Node 2 (Note that φ was included in force calculations)

Node height = force in the Tie 2-3/(
= f cu × b) 967 k /(2.55 ksi × 24 in.)
Node height = 15.8 in.; this is also the height of Node 1.
At this point we must check the assumed value for d v

Revised: d v = h − 2 × (15.8 in./2)=120 in. − 15.8 in. = 104.2 in. (should recycle)
Assume: d v = 104 in.
With this value: θ (left)= 55.3 and θ (right) = 35.8
Axial forces: Strut 1-2 = 1570 kips and Tie 2-3 = 893 kips
Heights of nodes 1 and 2 = 14.6 in., and= d v 120 in. − 2 × (14.6 in./2) ≈ 105.4 in. , OK.
Strut 1-3
Axial force: 644 kips/sin35.8 = 1100 kips
Horizontal component: 1100 kips × cos35.8 =
892 kips ( approx. 893 kips, OK.)
6. Select reinforcement for Tie 2-3 (Note that φ was included in force calculations)
As = 893 k / 60 ksi = 14.9 in.2
Use 16 #9 bars ( As = 16.0 in.2 )
Provide 4 layers of 4 No. 9 hooked bars. These must be anchored into the column at each
end with anchorage starting where the centroid of the tie first meets the inclined struts at
each end of the beam. The length required for a 90° standard hook is 21.4 in. for a No. 9
bar, which is less than the dimension of each support of column. Thus, this should be OK.
The centroid of the bars should be at about the mid-height of the nodal zones at each end,
i.e. about 7.5 in. above the bottom of the beam.
7. Minimum web reinforcement to control cracking inclined struts

Because β s = 0.75 was used for the inclined struts in both the left and right spans,
minimum web reinforcement that satisfies Eq. 17-10 is required throughout the length of
the beam. For a deep beam, it is a good practice to also satisfy the reinforcement
requirements in ACI sections 11.8.4 and 11.8.5
Part of the beam to the left of the concentrated load:
For horizontal reinforcement, try #5 bars on the front and back faces at a vertical spacing
of 12 in.
2 × 0.31 in.2
= ρh = 0.0022 ≥ 0.0015 (OK.)
12 in. × 24 in.
γ h =90 − 55.3 =34.7
For vertical reinforcement, try #5 two-legged stirrups at a spacing of 10 in.
17-3
2 × 0.31 in.2
=ρv = 0.0026 ≥ 0.0025 (OK.)
10 in. × 24 in.
γ v = 55.3
Checking Eq. 17-10:

A
∑ b si sin γ i = ∑ ρi sin γ i
si
=(0.0022) × (sin 34.7 ) + (0.0026) × (sin 55.3 ) =0.0034 ≥ 0.003,OK.
Part of the beam to the right of the concentrated load:

Use the same reinforcement. Here γ v = 35.8 and γ h =90 − 35.8 =54.2
∑ ρ sin γ
i i = 0.00174 + 0.00151 = 0.00325 > 0.003 (OK.)
Therefore, throughout the span use 2 #5 horizontal bars at a vertical spacing of 12 in. and use #5
two-legged stirrups as a spacing of 10 in.
17-2 Repeat Problem 17-1, but include the dead load of the wall. Assume that stirrups
crossing the lines AB and CD have a capacity φ ∑ Av f yt equal to one-third or more
of the shear due to the column load.
This problem is solved similarly to Problem 17-1. The factored dead load of the wall can be
added to the factored load applied on top of the beam. In this case, the vertical reinforcement is
designed such that the dead load of the wall portion below the lines AB and CD can be
transferred to the level at least above those lines.
17-3 Design a corbel to support a factored vertical load of 120 kips acting at 5 in. from
the face of a column. The column and corbel are 14 in. wide. The concrete in the
column and corbel was cast monolithically. Use 5000-psi normal-weight concrete
and f y = 60,000 psi.
Interface transfer shear stress is limited to the smallest of

0.2 f c′ = 1000 psi
480 + 0.8 f c′ = 880 psi and
1600 psi
∴The transfer shear stress is taken as 880 psi.
120,000
Compute minimum effective = depth: d = 13 in.
0.75 × 880 × 14
= Try d 16 = in. and h 18 in.
Factored shear = 120 kips = 120,000 lbs.

Normal force = 0.2 × 120 kips =
24 kips = 24000 lbs.
Moment = 120 × 5 + 24 × 2= 648 k-in.
Shear Friction Steel
17-4
Vu 120
Avf
= = = 1.90 in.2
φµ f y 0.75 × (1.4 × 1.0 ) × 60
(Note that we have used µ = 1.4λ for monolithic concrete and λ = 1 for normal-weight
concrete)
Flexural Steel
648
Af ≅ 1.0 in.2
=
0.75 × 60 × (0.9 × 16)
1.0 × 60
=a = 1 in.
0.85 × 5 × 14
648
=Af = 0.93 in.2
0.75 × 60(16 − 1/ 2)
Direct Tension Steel

24
= An = 0.53 in.2
0.75 × 60
Area of Tension Tie will be taken as the largest of:

Af + An= (0.93 + 0.53)= 1.5 in.2
2 Avf / 2 + An =2 × 1.90 / 3 + 0.53 =1.8 in.2
0.04 f c′ 0.04 × 5
Asc=
,min bw d
= × 14 ×
= 16 0.75 in.2
fy 60
∴ Use 2 #9 bars or 3#7, As = 2.00 in.2
Horizontal Stirrups
Area required: Avf / 3 = 0.63 in.2
Use 2 #4 closed stirrups, As = 0.80 in.2
Anchor tension tie into column

Use 90° standard hooks to anchor the tension tie.
Also assume that the ties are inside the column cage; therefore a modification factor of
0.7 is multiplied to the basic development length per ACI Code Section 12.5.3(a):
0.02ψ e f y 0.02 × 1 × 60000
0.7 dh = 0.7 × φ=0.7 × × 0.875 =
10.4 in.
λ f c′ 1 × 5000
Assume a column size of 14 in. × 14 in. , #8 bars used for column longitudinal
reinforcement, and a concrete cover of 2.5 in. to the longitudinal bars. The available
space for anchorage is:
14 in. − 2.5 in. + 0.5 in. =12 in. > 10.4 in. , OK.
Fig. S17-2 shows the detailed reinforcement of the corbel.
17-5
2 #9 welded
to the angle
plate
9 in.
2 #4
closed ties
2 #4
9 in.
bars
14 in. 8 in.
Fig. S17-2
17-4 Repeat Problem 17-3, but with a factored vertical load of 100 kips and a factored
horizontal load of 40 kips.
The problem is solved similar to Problem 17-3.
17-5 Figure P17-5 shows the dapped support region of a simple beam. The factored
reaction is 100 kips, normal-weight concrete with f c′ = 5000 psi and
f y = 60,000 psi (weldable). The beam is 16 in. wide.
(a) Isolate the D-region.
(b) Draw a truss to support the reaction.
(c) Detail the reinforcement.
The factored load on the dap is 100 kips. To include φ in the design we shall design the dap for
= Vn 100= / 0.75 133 kips
In addition, design the dap for a horizontal force of
H n = 0.2 × 133 = 26.6 kips
(a) Isolate the D-region.
Fig S17-3(a) shows the D-region.
17-6
(a) Truss model
D-region
2.5
120
B F
10.5
9
15
17
47.9°
A 147 D
133
133 19
8
14.5
133
67.2°
15
C 42.2°
147 E 203 G
4 6 3.5 16 10.5
2.5
10 30
(b) Reinforcement details
17
4 #5 closed 4 #5 U-stirrups @ 3 in.
double-leg stirrups 4 #5 U-stirrups @ 2 in. top reinforcement
2 #4 U bars
@ 3.5 in. B F
5 # 7 with left ends
D welded to the angle plate
2 #5 U bars @ 3.8 in.

B
2 #8 U bar
C E G
bottom reinforcement
22
48
Note: Force units are in kips, length units are in inches.
17-7
(b) Draw a truss to support the reaction.
1. Select a strut-and-tie model

There are two basis types of truss which can be drawn:
- Vertical stirrups at end of deeper part
- Inclined stirrups in the end
We shall use the former detail. Fig. S17-3(a) shows the assumed truss model.
2. Locate nodes at A, B, and C

( ΣV ) B =⇒
0 N BC = 133 kips
As=
, required 133/
= 60 2.22 in.2
Use 4 #5 closed double leg stirrups ( As = 2.48 in.2 ). Since these must be as close to the
end of the deeper part of the beam as possible, place them as shown in Fig. S17-3(b).
The centroid of this group is at 1.5 + (2 × 0.625) + 0.75 = 3.5 in. from the end of the
deeper section.
Assume 2.5 in. from the bottom of the beam to the centroid of the steel at C, 2 in. at A,
and assume the centroid of the compression force B-F is 2.5 in. below the top of the
beam.
4. Compute the strut and tie forces
Solve Join at A
10.5 in.
tan θ= = 1.11 ⇒ θ= 47.9
9.5 in.
=N AB 133/ = sin 47.9 179 kips (−)
9.5
N AD = × 133 + 26.6 = 147 kips ( + )
10.5
Solve Joint at B
ΣV = 0 ⇒ N BC =133 kips ( + )
9.5
ΣH =0 ⇒ N BF = × 133 =120 kips ( − )
10.5
Locate node at D
Strut CD is axially compressed by the horizontal tensile force in AD and the
vertical tensile force in DE. The horizontal distance from C to D is
147
× 14.5 = 16.0 in.
133
The axial force in CD is 198 kips.

The horizontal distance EG is 30 in. − 3.5 in. − 16 in. =
10.5 in.
Solve Joint at E
10.5
Horizontal component in EF = × 133 = 55.9 kips
25
Axial force in EF = 144 kips
17-8
Force in EG = 147 + 55.9 = 203
Joint F
Horizontal force to the right of F = 176 kips
As a check on the calculations, cut a section parallel to EF and sum moments
about F to calculate the force in EG 133 × 36 in. +26.6 × 10.5 = TEF × 25
=TEF 203 kips ∴ OK
5. Compute strut widths and see if they will fit

f cu = 0.85β s f c′ = 0.85 × 0.75 × 5000 = 3190 psi
(Note that the struts are assumed to have confinement steel, hence β s = 0.75 )
Strut AB
Assume the concrete outside the ties spalls at B. Remaining thickness of strut
= 16 − 2 × 1.5 = 13 in.
179
= Width = 4.32 in.
3.19 × 13
Strut BF
120
= Width = 2.89 in.
3.19 × 13
Strut CD
Use full thickness.
198
= Width = 3.88 in.
3.19 × 16
Strut BE
144
Width
= = 2.82 in.
3.19 × 16
Struts having these approximate widths are shown in the drawing.
6. Select reinforcement for the ties

Tie BC
We have already chosen 4 #5 double leg closed stirrups in two groups of two
stirrups.
Ties DE and FG
Also use 4 #5 double leg stirrups with 135 hooks spaced at 3 in. o.c. for each of
these ties (same tension demand of 133 kips).
Ties AD
= As 147
= / 60 2.45 in.2
Use 5 #7 bars. Weld these to the angle at A.
We need to extend these bars past D a distance equal to the development length.
These bars are considered top bars, from Table A-6,
=  d 55.2
= φ 48.3 in. So,
extend the bars 50 in past D.
17-9
Tie CE
As = 2.45 in.2
Provide 2 #8 U bars spaced 1 in. clear above the bottom steel. Lap splice them
1.3 1.3=d 1.3 × 42.4 in.  55 in. with the tension reinforcement in the bottom of
the beam.
7. Design confinement reinforcement:
Strut AB. Use only horizontal steel. Try 2 #4 U bars spaced equally at 3.5 in. o.c.
Ash 2 × 0.20 in.2
ρh =
= = 0.0071
bsv 16 in. × 3.5 in.
γ h = 47.9
ρh =sin γ h 0.0053 > 0.0030 , OK.
Strut CD. Use only horizontal steel. Try 2 #5 U bars spaced equally at 3.83 in. o.c.
Ash 2 × 0.31 in.2

ρh
= = = 0.0101
bsv 16 in. × 3.83 in.
γ h = 42.2
ρh =sin γ h 0.0068 > 0.0030 , OK.
17-10
Chapter 18
18-1 Check moment and shear strength at the base of structural wall shown in Fig. P18-1.
1. Calculate factored loads at base of wall.
M u (base) =1.6 × (7 k ×15 ft + 12 k × 26 ft + 18 k × 37 ft + 22 k × 48 ft + 20 k × 59 ft)

= 5310 kip-ft
Vu (base) = 1.6 × ( 7 + 12 + 18 + 22 + 20 ) kips = 126 kips
N u ,min (base) =
0.9 × 230 k =
207 kips
2. Calculate flexural strength. The total area of vertical wall reinforcement is:
w 240 in.
Ast =2 × 0.20 in.2 × =0.40 in.2 × =8.00 in.2
s 12 in.
From Eq. (18-26a), the percentage of vertical (longitudinal) reinforcement is:
Ast 8.00 in.2

=ρ = = 0.00333
h ×  w 10 in. × 240 in.
From Eq. (18-26b), the vertical reinforcement index is:

fy 60 ksi
ω =ρ × =0.00333 × =0.0444
f c′ 4.5 ksi
From Eq. (18-27), the axial load index is:

Nu 207 kips
=α = = 0.0192
h ×  w × f c′ 10 in. × 240 in. × 4.5 ksi
For 4500 psi concrete, β 1 = 0.825. Then, from Eq. (18-28) the depth to the neutral axis is:
 α +ω   0.0192 + 0.0444 
=c = w  =  240 in. 19.3 in.
 0.85β1 + 2ω   0.85 × 0.825 + 2 × 0.0444 
This is very small compared to d (taken as 0.8 ℓ w ), so this is clearly a tension-controlled section
and φ = 0.9. From Eq. (18-25a), the tension force in the vertical reinforcement is:
  −c   240 − 19.3 
T=
Ast f y  w =8.00 in.2 × 60 ksi  =441 kips

 w   240 
18-1
And, from Eq. (18-29) the nominal moment strength at the base of the wall is:
    −c   240 in.   240 in. − 19.3 in. 

Mn =T  w  + Nu  w  =441 k   + 207 k  
 2   2   2   2 
=53, 000 k-in. + 22,800 k-in. =75,800 k-in. =6320 k-ft
Using the strength reduction factor, φ, the design strength is:

φMn =0.9 × 6320 =5690 k-ft > M u (o.k.)
3. Check shear strength. Because the wall is subjected to compression, we are permitted to use
Eq. (18-41) to determine the concrete contribution to shear strength. For this calculation we will
assume d = 0.8 x ℓ w = 0.8 x 240 = 192 in., as permitted in ACI Code Section 11.9.4.
Vc =2λ f c′ × hd =2 ×1 4500 psi ×10 in. ×192 in.

= 258,
= 000 lbs 258 kips
Using φ = 0.75 for shear, the design strength contribution from the concrete is:
φVc = 0.75 × 258 = 193 kips > Vu
Thus, no horizontal reinforcement is required for shear strength. However, because Vu exceeds
one-half of φVc , the reinforcement requirements in ACI Code Section 11.9.9 must be satisfied.
Horizontal reinforcement. From Eq. (18-45a), the percentage of horizontal reinforcement is:
Av ,horiz 2 × 0.20 in.2
=ρt = = 0.0025 ≥ 0.0025 (o.k.)
h × s2 10 in. ×16 in.
The maximum center-to-center spacing for the horizontal reinforcement is the smallest of ℓ w /5
(48 in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. Thus, the provided spacing of 16 in. for the horizontal
reinforcement is ok.
Vertical reinforcement. Because the wall aspect ratio, h w /ℓ w = 59ft/20ft = 2.95, exceeds 2.5, the
minimum required percentage of vertical reinforcement is 0.0025. From step 2, ρ ℓ = 0.00333,
which exceeds the minimum value. The maximum center-to-center spacing for the vertical
reinforcement is the smallest of ℓ w /3 (80 in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. Thus, the provided spacing of
12 in. for the vertical reinforcement is ok.
18-2
18-2 Design a uniform distribution of vertical and horizontal reinforcement for the
structural wall shown in Fig. P18-2.
1. Calculate factored loads at base of wall.
M u (base) =1.6 × (75 k ×12 ft + 100 k × 24 ft) =5280 kip-ft

Vu (base) =1.6 × ( 75 + 100 ) kips = 280 kips
N u ,min (base) = 0.9 × (70 + 40) kips = 99.0 kips
2. Flexural design. Based on the results from Problem 18-1 (a wall with similar design base
moment and similar dimensions), select a trial value for ρ ℓ = 0.0035. Then, from Eq. (18-26b),
fy 60 ksi
ω =ρ × =0.0035 × =0.0525
f c′ 4 ksi
From Eq. (18-27), the axial load index is:

Nu 99.0 kips
=α = = 0.0103
h ×  w × f c′ 10 in. × 240 in. × 4 ksi
For 4000 psi concrete, β 1 = 0.85. Then, from Eq. (18-28) the depth to the neutral axis is:
 α +ω   0.0103 + 0.0525 
=c = w  =  240 in. 18.2 in.
 0.85 β1 + 2ω   0.85 × 0.85 + 2 × 0.0525 
This is very small compared to d (taken as 0.8 ℓ w ), so this is clearly a tension-controlled section
and φ = 0.9. The total area of vertical wall reinforcement is:
Ast = ρ × h ×  w = 0.0035 ×10 in. × 240 in. = 8.40 in.2

From Eq. (18-25a), the tension force in the vertical reinforcement is:
  −c   240 − 18.2 
T=
 w   240 
And, from Eq. (18-29) the nominal moment strength at the base of the wall is:
    −c   240 in.   240 in. − 18.2 in. 

Mn =T  w  + Nu  w  =466 k   + 99.0 k  
 2   2   2   2 
= 55,900 k-in. + 11, 000 k-in. = 66,900 k-in. = 5570 k-ft
Using the strength reduction factor, φ, the design strength is:

φMn =0.9 × 5570 =5020 k-ft < M u (not o.k.)
18-3
For a wall with relatively low axial load, the nominal moment strength should increase approximately
linearly with increases in the percentage of vertical reinforcement. Thus,
Mu 5280
ρ (req'd.) ≅ ρ (trial) × = 0.0035 × = 0.00368
φ M n (trial) 5020
Round this up a little and try ρ ℓ = 0.0038. Then, redo the calculations to find:
=ω 0.0570,
= c 19.3
= in., Ast 9.12
= in.2 , T 503 kips, and
φ M n 5350 k-ft > M u (o.k.)
=
Select vertical reinforcement as:

No. 4 bars at 10 in. spacing in each face (EF), results in ρ ℓ = 0.00400
No. 5 bars at 16 in. spacing in each face (EF), results in ρ ℓ = 0.00388
Either selection will work. To use less total bars, select No. 5 bars at 16 in. spacing, EF. It is good
practice to replace the pair of No. 5 bars at the edges of the wall with a pair of No. 6 bars.
3. Shear Design. The aspect ratio for this wall is, h w /ℓ w = 24/20 = 1.20. Thus, this is a short wall and
the shear strength contribution from the concrete is probably given by Eq. (18-43). Using d = 0.8 x ℓ w
= 192 in., results in:
Nu d
=Vc 3.3λ f c′ hd +
4 w
99, 000 lbs ×192 in.
=3.3 × 1 4000 psi × 10 in. × 192 in. +
4 × 240 in.
=(401, 000 + 19,800) lbs =421, 000 lbs = 421 kips
Before accepting this value, we will check the value of Vc from Eq. (18-44). For this flexural-shear
strength equation, we need to evaluate the ratio of M u /Vu at the critical section above the base of the
wall, as defined in Fig. 18-19. For this wall, ℓ w /2 = 10 ft, governs. At that section the factored
moment is,
w
M u (crit.
= sect.) M u (base) − Vu (base)
2
= 5280 kip-ft − 280 kip ×10
= ft 2480 kip-ft
18-4
Thus, the ratio of M u /V u = 2480/280 = 8.86 ft. Using this value, the denominator in the second term
of Eq. (18-43) is,
Mu w
− 8.86 ft − 10 ft =
= −1.14 ft
Vu 2
Because this is a negative number, Eq. (18-44) is not valid for this wall. So, using φ = 0.75 and the
value for Vc from Eq. (18-43):
φVc = 316 kips > Vu
0.75 × 421 kips =
Thus, no horizontal reinforcement is required for shear strength. However, because Vu exceeds
one-half of φVc , the reinforcement requirements in ACI Code Section 11.9.9 must be satisfied.
Horizontal reinforcement. Use 2 No. 4 bars at 16 in. spacing in each face. Then, from Eq. (18-
45a), the percentage of horizontal reinforcement is:
Av ,horiz 2 × 0.20 in.2
=ρt = = 0.0025 ≥ 0.0025 (o.k.)
h × s2 10 in. ×16 in.
The maximum center-to-center spacing for the horizontal reinforcement is the smallest of ℓ w /5
(48 in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. Thus, the provided spacing of 16 in. for the horizontal
reinforcement is ok.
Vertical reinforcement. Because ρ t = 0.0025, the minimum value for ρ ℓ in Eq. (18-46) is
0.0025. From the flexural design, the provided value for ρ ℓ = 0.00388, so it is o.k. Also, the
selected spacing of 16 in. is less than the smallest of ℓ w /3 (80 in.), 3h (30 in.) and 18 in. (o.k.)
18-5
18-3 Check the moment and shear strength at the base of the structural wall shown in Fig.
P18-3. Use x = 40 ft. for the flexural strength check and x = 30 ft for the capacity-based
design approach to check the shear strength.
1. Calculate factored loads for flexural strength check at base of wall.
M u (base) = 1.0 ×150 k × 2 3 × 60 ft = 6000 kip-ft

N u ,min (base) =
0.9 ×150 k =
135 kips
2. Flexural strength. For a boundary element in tension, use Eq. (18-30) to find:
T= 12 × 0.79 in.2 × 60 ksi =
As f y = 569 kips
Assuming that the depth of the compression stress block does not exceed the size of the boundary
element, use Eq. (18-32) to find:
T + Nu 569 k + 135 k
=a = = 8.28 in. ( ≤ 20 in., o.k.)
0.85 f c′ b 0.85 × 5 ksi × 20 in.
Assume d = ℓ w – 20in./2 = 180 – 10 = 170 in. Then, from Eq. (18-33), the nominal moment
strength is:
 a  −a
M n = T  d −  + Nu  w 
 2  2 
 8.28 in.   180 in. − 8.28 in. 
=569 k × 170 in. −  + 135 k  
 2   2 
=(94, 400 + 11, 600)k-in. = 8830 kip-ft
With a = 8.28 in., it is clear that this is a tension-controlled section, and thus φ = 0.9. So,
φMn =0.9 × 8830 =7950 kip-ft  M u
The wall is substantially over-designed in flexure and we should reduce the steel in the boundary
element to reduce the shear required to develop the flexural strength. One possible redesign is to
use eight No. 9 bars in each boundary element. This leads to the final result of φM n = 6860 kip-
ft.
3. Design shear (determine capacity-based design shear using original flexural design).
Assume that the probable axial load is:
N pr = N D + N L = 150 k + 100 k = 250 kips
18-6
With this axial load the wall moment strength will be reevaluated and referred to as the probable
moment strength, M pr .
First, the depth of the compression stress block is,
T + Nu 569 k + 250 k
=a = = 9.64 in.
0.85 f c′ b 0.85 × 5 ksi × 20 in.
This is larger than calculated previously, but it is still clear that the tension steel in the boundary
element will be yielding. With this value of a, the moment strength is:
 a  −a
M pr = T  d −  + N pr  w 
 2  2 
= 94, 000 k-in. + 21,300 k-in.
= 115,
= 000 kip-in. 9610 kip-ft
With this moment and assuming that x = 0.5 x 60 ft = 30 ft, the capacity-based design shear is,
M pr 9610 k-ft
Vu (cap-based)
= = = 320 kips
0.5hw 0.5 × 60 ft
4. Check shear strength. For this wall, the value of A cv in Eq. (18-48) is:
Acv =h ⋅  w =10 in. ×180 in. =1800 in.2
Because this is a slender wall, α c = 2.0. Eq. (18-45b) will be used to determine ρ t for the distributed
horizontal reinforcement.
Av ,horiz 2 × 0.20 in.2
=ρt = = 0.0025
h ⋅ s2 10 in. ×16 in.
Using the values calculated here, the nominal shear strength of the wall from Eq. (11-48) is,
= (
Vn Acv α c λ f c′ + ρt f y )
(
= 1800 in.2 2 ×1 5000 psi + 0.0025 × 60, 000 psi )
= 1800 in.2 (141 psi + 150 psi=
) 524, 000 lbs
= 524 kips
Using φ = 0.75 for shear,

φVn =0.75 × 524 k =393 kips > Vu (cap-based) (o.k.)
18-7
The vertical and horizontal steel percentages in the web of the wall (both 0.0025) and the bar spacing
(16 in. both horizontal and vertical) satisfy the requirements of ACI Code Section 11.9.9, which are
applicable for this wall.
18-4 Check the moment and shear strength at the base of the structural wall shown in Fig.
P18-4. Use the capacity-based design approach to check the shear strength.
1. Calculate factored loads for flexural strength check at base of wall.
M u (base) =1.0 × 220 k ×15 ft =3300 kip-ft

N u ,min (base) =0.9 × 80 k =72 kips
2. Flexural strength. From Eq. (18-454a) the vertical reinforcement percentage is:
Av ,vert 2 × 0.31 in.2
ρ
= = = 0.00388
h × s1 10 in. ×16 in.
From Eq. (18-26b) the reinforcement ratio for the vertical reinforcement is:
fy 60 ksi
ω = ρ = 0.00388 × = 0.0582
f c′ 4 ksi
From Eq. (18-27) the axial load ratio is:

Nu 72 kips
=α = = 0.00750
h w f c′ 10 in. × 240 in. × 4 ksi
For 4000 psi concrete, β 1 = 0.85. Then, from Eq. (18-28), the depth to the neutral axis is:
 α +ω   0.0075 + 0.0582 
=c = w  =  240 in. 18.8 in.
 0.85β1 + 2ω   0.85 × 0.85 + 2 × 0.0582 
This is very small compared to d (0.8ℓ w = 192 in.), so this is clearly a tension-controlled section
and φ = 0.9. For the longitudinal steel,
240 in.
2 × 0.31 in.2 ×
Ast = 9.30 in.2
=
16 in.
Then, from Eq. (18-25a), the flexural tension force is:
  −c   240 in. − 18.8 in. 

T=
  w   240 in. 
18-8
Finally, the nominal moment capacity is found using Eq. (18-29):
    −c 
M n T  w  + Nu  w
= 
 2   2 
 240 in.   240 in. − 18.8 in. 
514 k × 
=  + 72 k  
 2   2 
(61, 700 + 7960)k-in. =
= 5810 kip-ft
Applying the strength factor, the design flexural strength is,

φMn =0.9 × 5810 =5230 kip-ft  M u
The wall is substantially over-designed in flexure and we should reduce the vertical
reinforcement in the wall to reduce the shear required to develop the flexural strength. One
possible redesign is to use two No. 4 bars at a 16 in. spacing in each face. For this reinforcement
ρ ℓ = 0.0025 (the minimum value) and the design flexural strength, φM n = 3670 kip-ft.
3. Design shear (determine capacity-based design shear using original flexural design).
Assume that the probable axial load is:
N pr = N D + N L = 80 k + 40 k = 120 kips
With this axial load, the axial load ratio is:

120 kips
=α = 0.0125
10 in. × 240 in. × 4 ksi
And, the depth to the neutral axis is:
 0.0125 + 0.0581 
=c =  240 in. 20.2 in.
 0.85 × 0.85 + 2 × 0.0581 
Then, the flexural tension force is:
  −c   240 in. − 20.2 in. 

T=
 w   240 in. 
Finally, the probably moment capacity is:
18-9
 240 in.   240 in. − 20.2 in. 
M pr =
511 k ×   + 120 k  
 2   2 
(61,300 + 13, 200)k-in. =
= 6210 kip-ft
With this probable moment strength, the capacity-based design shear is,
M pr 6210 k-ft
Vu (cap-based)
= = = 414 kips
hw 15 ft
4. Check shear strength. For this wall, Eq. (18-45b) will be used to determine ρ t for the distributed
horizontal reinforcement.
Av ,horiz 2 × 0.20 in.2
=ρt = = 0.0025
h ⋅ s2 10 in. ×16 in.
The effective wall shear area from Eq. (18-48) is:

Acv =h ⋅  w =10 in. × 240 in. =2400 in.2
Because this is a squat wall (h w/ℓ w = 0.75), αc = 3.0. Thus, the nominal shear strength of the wall
from Eq. (11-48) is,
= (
Vn Acv α c λ f c′ + ρt f y )
(
= 2400 in.2 3 ×1 4000 psi + 0.0025 × 60, 000 psi )
= 2400 in.2 (190 psi + 150 psi=
) 815, 000 lbs
= 815 kips
Using φ = 0.75 for shear,

φVn =0.75 × 815 k =612 kips > Vu (cap-based) (o.k.)
The vertical and horizontal steel percentages in the web of the wall (both ≥ 0.0025) and the bar
spacing (16 in. both horizontal and vertical) satisfy the requirements of ACI Code Section 11.9.9,
which are applicable for this wall.
18-10
Chapter 19
19-1 Use Eq. (19-27) to check the need for specially confined boundary elements for the
structural wall analyzed in Problem 18-3 and shown in Fig. P18-3.
1. Building drift ratio. The ratio, δu /h w , represents the building drift ratio due to the design
earthquake for the building in question. We are given a value for the design displacement, δu , at the
top of the building, so the building drift ratio is:
δu 0.6 ft
Building drift ratio
= = = 0.010 (1%)
hw 60 ft
2. Limit for neutral axis depth. Eq. (19-27) gives a limiting value for the neutral axis depth. For
larger values, the wall boundary elements must be confined.
w 15 ft ×12 in./ft
c(limit)
= = = 30.0 in.
600 (δ u hw ) 600 × 0.010
3. Calculated neutral axis depth. The depth of the neutral axis for this check should come from
the calculation of the probable moment strength of the wall, which was calculated in step 3 of
Problem 18-3. In that calculation the depth of the equivalent stress block, a, was found to be 9.64
in. Then, using β 1 = 0.80 for 5000 psi concrete, the corresponding neutral axis depth is:
a 9.64 in.
c
= = = 12.1 in. < c(limit)
β1 0.80
Therefore, special confinement reinforcement is not required in the wall boundary elements.
19-1
19-2 Use Eq. (19-28) to check the need for specially confined boundary elements for the
structural wall analyzed in Problem 18-3 and shown in Fig. P18-3.
1. Factored loads at base of wall. From step 1 of Problem 18-3:
M u (base) 6000
= = kip-ft 72, 000 kip-in.
N u ,min (base) = 135 kips
2. Wall section properties. To determine the gross area and moment of inertia of the wall, divide
the wall into rectangular pieces representing the web and the two boundary elements. Then,
=A A(web) + 2 A(boundary)
= 10 in. ×140 in. + 2 × ( 20 in.=
) 2200 in.2
2
And,
10 ×1403  20 × 203 
I
= ∑( )
I i + Ai y=
i
2
12
+ 0 + 2 + 20 × 20 × 802 
i  12 
= 7.43 ×106 in.4
Also,
 w 180 in.
y
= = = 90 in.
2 2
3. Combined stress in edge of wall at base of wall. Eq. (19-28) will be used to find the combined
stress at the edge of the wall at its base. If that stress exceeds the limit of 0.2f c ', then we will need use
special confinement reinforcement in the wall boundary and continue that reinforcement up the wall
until we reach a section where the combined stress in the edge of the wall is less than 0.15f c '. Using
the values from steps 1 and 2:
Nu M u y
+ fc
=
A I
135 k 72, 000 k-in. × 90 in.
= 2
+
2200 in. 7.43 ×106 in.4
= 0.061 ksi + 0.872= ksi 0.934 ksi < 0.2 × 5=
ksi 1.0 ksi
Therefore, special confinement reinforcement is not required in the wall boundary elements.
19-2

Concrete Mechanics and Design - Solution Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Concrete Mechanics and Design - Solution Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Chapter 3

3-1 What is the significance of the “critical stress”?

(a) with respect to the structure of the concrete?

(b) with respect to spiral reinforcement?

(c) with respect to strength under sustained loads?

From Eq. 3-3a:

Assume f cr′ = 3622 psi

(for design) f c′ = 3622 − 1.34 × 421 = 3058 psi

Using f cr′ = 3622 psi

(for design) f c′ = 3622 − 1.23 × 421 + 500 = 3141 psi

= (21.1 + 10)(3) + (4.4 + 10)(6) = 180 C days

(a) σ 1 = 0.0, σ2 = f c '

(b) σ 1 = 0.75 ft ' in tension, σ 2 = 0.5 f c '

(c) σ 1 = 0.5 fc ' in compression, σ 2 = 1.2 f c'

From Eq. 3-16:

σ 1= 4000 + 4.1× 800= 7280 psi

(g) Exposure to carbon dioxide tends to increase shrinkage.

3-7 What factors affect the creep of concrete?

1. Compute basic shrinkage strain using Eqs. 3-29 and 3-30.

2. Compute development of shrinkage with time using Eq. 3-32.

1. Compute basic creep strain, φ o , using Eqs. 3-38.

2. Compute development of creep with time using Eq. 3-42.

4. Compute the total stress-dependent strain, ε cσ (t), using Eq. 3-44.

1. Calculate the dead load of the beam.

2. Compute the factored moment, M u .

Tension steel area: A s = 3 No. 9 bars = 3 × 1.00 in.2 = 3.00 in.2

Check whether tension steel is yielding:

Thus, ε > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s = f y ).

Compute the nominal moment strength, using Eq. (4-21):

1. Calculate the dead load of the beam.

2. Compute the factored moment, M u .

Tension steel area: As = 6 No. 8 bars = 6 × 0.79 in.2 =4.74 in.2

Check whether tension steel is yielding:

Thus, ε > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s = f y ).

Compute the nominal moment strength, using Eq. (4-21):

Thus, ε > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s = f y ).

Since, ε t > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and φ =0.9.

For Beam 1, φ M = 164 kip-ft

A f ( 2 × 1.00 + 0.79 ) × 60000

Thus, ε > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s = f y ).

Since, ε t > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and φ =0.9.

Thus, ε > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s = f y ).

Since, ε t > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and φ =0.9.

ε (s =εt ) = d c− c  ε cu = 222.85

Thus, ε > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s = f y ).

Thus, ε > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s = f y ).

Since, ε t > 0.005 the section is clearly tension-controlled and φ =0.9.

Effect of As (Beams 1 and 2)

Effect of f y (Beams 1 and 3)

Effect of f c' (Beams 1 and 4)

Effect of d (Beams 1 and 5)

Tension steel area: As = 4 No. 7 bars = 4 × 0.60 in.2 =2.40 in.2

Check whether tension steel is yielding:

Thus, ε > 0.002 and the steel is yielding ( f s = f y ).

Compute the nominal moment strength, using Eq. (4-21):

2. Compute Live Load

Tension steel area: As = 6 No. 8 bars = 6 × 0.79 in.2 =4.74 in.2

For f c' = 4500 psi, β1 = 0.825 . Therefore,

Tension steel area: As = 6 No. 8 bars = 6 × 0.79 in.2 =4.74 in.2

For f c' = 4000 psi, β1 = 0.85 . Therefore,

Check whether tension steel is yielding:

We can use Eq. (4-21) to calculate M n :

For f c' = 3500 psi, β1 = 0.85 . Therefore,